7 Series Plug-
In Hybrid
Owner's Manual for the vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help
you make full use of the technical features available in your
BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in
the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
You can find supplementary information in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride.
The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app.
Additional information on the Internet:
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
© 2017 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English VI/17, 07 17 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 352.
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and
Communication can be called up via the fol‐
lowing Owner's Manuals: Integrated Owner's
Manual on the Control Display in the vehicle,
Online Owner's Manual, BMW Driver’s Guide
App.
6 Information
At a glance
16 Cockpit
21 Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready
state
23 iDrive
32 BMW Gesture Control
35 Voice activation system
38 BMW Touch Command
40 General settings
53 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
55 BMW eDRIVE
57 Safety of the hybrid system
Controls
60 Opening and closing
86 Settings
104 Transporting children safely
109 Driving
129 Displays
149 Lights
157 Safety
188 Driving stability control systems
192 Driver assistance systems
226 Driving comfort
228 Climate control
242 Interior equipment
251 Storage compartments
256 Cargo area
Driving tips
264 Things to remember when driving
268 Saving fuel
Mobility
276 Charging the vehicle
285 Refueling
288 Fuel
290 Wheels and tires
314 Engine compartment
316 Engine oil
320 Coolant
322 Maintenance
324 Replacing components
327 Breakdown assistance
334 Care
Reference
342 Technical data
344 Appendix
352 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Information
Using this Owner's Manual
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐
ular topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐
ferences may exist between the printed Own‐
er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐
uals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Notes on updates can be found in the appen‐
dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi‐
cle.
Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, and Communication can be obtained as
printed book from the service center.
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and
Communication can be called up via the fol‐
lowing Owner's Manuals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual on the Control
Display in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Additional sources of
information
Dealer’s service center
A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer
questions at any time.
Internet
The Owner's Manual and general information
on BMW, for example on technology, are avail‐
able on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.
BMW Driver’s Guide App
The Owner's Manual is available in many coun‐
tries as an app. Additional information on the
Internet:
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
Symbols and displays
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Indicates precautions that must be followed
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of
personal injury and serious damage to the
vehicle.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of
information.
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
"..." Identifies display texts in vehicle used to
select individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
Seite 6
Information
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Action steps
Action steps to be carried out are presented as
numbered list. The steps must be carried out
in the defined order.
1. First action step.
2. Second action step.
Enumerations
Enumerations without mandatory order or al‐
ternative possibilities are presented as list with
bullet points.
▷ First possibility.
▷ Second possibility.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the
relevant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
Indicates, on certain parts or assemblies, that
incorrect use of high-voltage equipment or of
orange-colored high-voltage components re‐
sults in the risk of life-threatening injury from
electric shock.
Vehicle features and options
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
all standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series.
Therefore, this Owner's Manual also describes
and illustrates features and functions that are
not available in your vehicle, for example be‐
cause of the selected optional features or the
country-specific version.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
For any options and equipment not described
in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supple‐
mentary Owner's Manuals.
Your BMW dealer’s service center is happy to
answer any questions that you may have about
the features and options applicable to your ve‐
hicle.
Status of the Owner's
Manual
Basic information
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
policy of constant development that is con‐
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
embody the highest quality and safety stan‐
dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from
those in your vehicle.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐
ferences may exist between the printed Own‐
er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐
uals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Notes on updates can be found in the appen‐
dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi‐
cle.
Seite 7
Information
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
For Your Own Safety
Intended use
Observe the following when using the vehicle:
▷ Owner's Manual.
▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove
stickers.
▷ Technical vehicle data.
▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where
the vehicle is driven.
▷ Vehicle documents and statutory docu‐
ments.
Warranty
Your vehicle is technically configured for the
operating conditions and registration require‐
ments applying in the country of first delivery,
also known as homologation. If your vehicle is
to be operated in a different country it might be
necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially
differing operating conditions and registration
requirements. If your vehicle does not comply
with the homologation requirements in a cer‐
tain country you may not be able to lodge war‐
ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further in‐
formation on warranty is available from a
dealer’s service center.
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e. g. the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics,
requires suitable maintenance and repair work.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
a BMW dealer’s service center. If you choose
to use another service facility, BMW recom‐
mends use of a facility that performs work, for
instance maintenance and repair, according to
BMW specifications with properly trained per‐
sonnel, referred to in this Owner's Manual as
"another qualified service center or repair
shop".
If work is performed improperly, for instance
maintenance and repair, there is a risk of sub‐
sequent damage and related safety risks.
Parts and accessories
BMW recommends the use of parts and ac‐
cessory products approved by BMW.
Approved parts and accessories, and advice
on their use and installation are available from
a BMW dealer's service center.
BMW parts and accessories have been tested
by BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW
vehicles.
BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐
sories.
BMW does not evaluate whether each individ‐
ual product from another manufacturer can be
used with BMW vehicles without presenting a
safety hazard, even if a country-specific official
approval was issued. BMW does not evaluate
whether these products are suitable for BMW
vehicles under all usage conditions.
California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to state the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
bile components and parts, including compo‐
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects and reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
water.
Seite 8
Information
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐
ranty.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐
ited Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con‐
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to de‐
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate your vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐
hicle to meet different prevailing operating
conditions and homologation requirements.
You should also be aware of any applicable
warranty limitations or exclusions for such
country or region. In such case, please contact
Customer Relations for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
road safety, operational reliability and the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ures:
▷ BMW Maintenance system
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in seri‐
ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is
not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Data memory
General information
Electronic control devices are installed in the
vehicle. Some of these are necessary for the
vehicle to function safely or provide assistance
during driving, for instance driver assistance
systems. Furthermore, control devices facili‐
tate comfort or infotainment functions.
Electronic control devices contain data memo‐
ries, which are able to temporarily or perma‐
nently store information about the condition of
the vehicle, component load, maintenance re‐
quirements, technical events or faults.
This information generally records the state of
a component, a module, a system, or the envi‐
ronment, for instance:
▷ Operating states of system components,
e.g., fill levels, tire pressure, battery status.
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and its in‐
dividual components, e.g., wheel rotational
speed, wheel speed, deceleration, trans‐
verse acceleration, engaged safety belt in‐
dicator.
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐
tem components, for instance lights and
brakes.
▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events.
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
tions such as airbag deployment or en‐
gagement of the stability control systems.
▷ Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain
sensor signals.
The data is required to perform the control de‐
vice functions. Furthermore, it also serves to
recognize and correct malfunctions, and helps
the vehicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle
functions. The majority of this data is transient
and is only processed within the vehicle itself.
Seite 9
Information
9
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Only a small proportion of the data is stored in
event or fault memories and, if needed, in the
vehicle key.
Reading out data
When servicing, for instance during repairs,
service processes, warranty cases, and quality
assurance measures, this technical information
can be read out from the vehicle together with
the vehicle identification number. A dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop can read out the information.
The socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis re‐
quired by law in the vehicle is used to read out
the data. The data is collected, processed, and
used by the relevant organizations in the serv‐
ice network. The data documents the technical
conditions of the vehicle, helps in locating
faults and improving quality, and is transferred
to the vehicle manufacturer, if needed.
Furthermore, the manufacturer has product
monitoring duties to meet in line with product
liability law. To fulfill these duties, the vehicle
manufacturer needs technical data from the
vehicle. Fault and event memories in the vehi‐
cle can be reset when a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop performs repair or servicing work.
Data on the scope of servicing work performed
and maintenance records are stored in the ve‐
hicle by means of the service history and trans‐
ferred to the vehicle manufacturer. The vehicle
owner can contact a dealer's service center to
object to the data being stored and transferred
to the vehicle manufacturer. This objection ap‐
plies for as long as the vehicle owner remains
the proprietor of the vehicle.
Data entry and data transfer into the
vehicle
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, some
data can be transferred into the vehicle when
using comfort and infotainment functions,
for instance:
▷ Multimedia data such as music, films or
photos for playback in an integrated multi‐
media system.
▷ Address book data for use in conjunction
with an integrated hands-free system or an
integrated navigation system.
▷ Entered navigation destinations.
▷ Data on the use of Internet services.
This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or
is found on a device that has been connected
to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or
MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle,
it can be deleted at any time. This data is only
transmitted to third parties if expressly desired.
This depends on the personal settings se‐
lected for using online services.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the fol‐
lowing comfort and individual settings can be
stored in the vehicle and modified at any time,
for instance:
▷ Settings for the seat and steering wheel
positions.
▷ Suspension and climate control settings.
▷ Individual settings, for instance lighting in
the car's interior.
Control via mobile devices
Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile
devices connected to the vehicle, for instance
smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle
control elements. The sound and picture from
the mobile device can be played back and dis‐
played through the multimedia system. Certain
information is transferred to the mobile device
at the same time. Depending on the type of
connection, this includes, for instance position
data and other general vehicle information.
This optimizes the way in which selected apps,
for instance navigation or music playback,
work.
Seite 10
Information
10
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
There is no further interaction between the
mobile device and the vehicle, for instance ac‐
tive access to vehicle data. How the data will
be processed further is determined by the pro‐
vider of the particular app being used. The ex‐
tent of the possible settings depends on the
respective app and the operating system of the
mobile device.
Services
General information
If the vehicle has a wireless network connec‐
tion, this enables data to be exchanged be‐
tween the vehicle and other systems. The
wireless network connection is realized via an
in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unit or via
personal mobile devices brought into the vehi‐
cle, for instance smartphones. This wireless
network connection enables 'online functions'
to be used. These include online services and
apps supplied by the vehicle manufacturer or
by other providers.
Services from the vehicle
manufacturer
Where online services from the vehicle manu‐
facturer are concerned, the corresponding
functions are described in the appropriate
place, for instance the Owner's Manual or
manufacturer's website. The relevant legal in‐
formation pertaining to data protection is pro‐
vided there too. Personal data may be used to
perform online services. Data is exchanged
over a secure connection, for instance with the
IT systems of the vehicle manufacturer in‐
tended for this purpose. Any collection, proc‐
essing, and use of personal data above and be‐
yond that needed to provide the services must
always be based on a legal permission, con‐
tractual arrangement or consent.
In addition, the vehicle manufacturer evaluates
anonymized information on transport infra‐
structure and how the infotainment system is
used. This information cannot be traced back
to individual vehicles or people. Evaluating the
data enables the manufacturer to further im‐
prove its products or services, for instance by
incorporating the most up-to-date traffic bulle‐
tins. The data transfer feature can be deacti‐
vated in the vehicle. Certain services and func‐
tions, some of which are subject to a charge,
can be deactivated by the driver. It is also pos‐
sible to activate or deactivate the data connec‐
tion as a whole. That is, with the exception of
functions and services required by law such as
Assist systems.
Services from other providers
When using online services from other provid‐
ers, these services are the responsibility of the
relevant provider and subject to their data pri‐
vacy conditions and terms of use. The vehicle
manufacturer has no influence on the content
exchanged during this process. Information on
the way in which personal data is collected and
used in relation to services from third parties,
the scope of such data, and its purpose, can be
obtained from the relevant service provider.
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
operating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
Seite 11
Information
11
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
This data can help provide a better under‐
standing of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re‐
corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐
tions and no personal data, for instance name,
gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
ment, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Vehicle identification
number
The vehicle identification number can be found
in the engine compartment, on the right-hand
side of the vehicle.
The vehicle identification number can also be
found behind the windshield.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in‐
jury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐
tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐
wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐
ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐
formation about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
Seite 12
Information
12
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the
toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
Seite 13
Information
13
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
At a glance
This chapter shows the arrangement of the
buttons, switches and displays. Moreover, you
will become familiar with the available control
concepts and options quickly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Cockpit
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Seating comfort features
Gentleman function 88
Memory function 98
Massage function 99
2 Roller sunblind in the rear win‐
dow 81
3 Safety switch for the windows
and roller sunblinds 81
4 Power windows 80
5 Exterior mirror operation 96
6 Lights
Front fog lights 153
Night Vision 171
Seite 16
At a glance Cockpit
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Light switch 149
Lights off
Daytime running lights 151
Parking lights 149
Automatic headlight control 150
Adaptive light functions 151
High-beam Assistant 151
Low beams 149
Instrument lighting 153
Right roadside parking light 150
Left roadside parking light 150
7 Central locking system
Unlock 69
Lock 69
8 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 118
High beams, head‐
light flasher 118
High-beam Assistant 151
Onboard Computer 142
9 Steering wheel buttons, left
Cruise control on/off 192
Active Cruise Control on/off 195
Steering and lane control assis‐
tant on/off 201
Cruise control: store speed
Pause or continue cruise control
Active Cruise Control: increase
distance
Active Cruise Control: reduce dis‐
tance
With steering and lane control as‐
sistant: adjust distance
Cruise control rocker switch
10 Instrument cluster 129
11 Steering wheel buttons, right
Entertainment source, see Own‐
er's Manual for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment and Communication 6
Volume, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
Voice activation system 35
Telephone, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
Thumbwheel for selection lists 142
12 Steering column stalk, right
Seite 17
Cockpit At a glance
17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Wiper 118
Rain sensor 119
Clean the windshield and head‐
lights 120
13 Switch drive-ready state on/
off 109
14 Horn, entire surface
15 Heated steering wheel 98
16 Adjust steering wheel 98
17 Unlock hood 315
18 Open/close tailgate 72
19 Tank vent 285
20 Glove compartment 252
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Control Display 23
2 Ventilation 232
Seite 18
At a glance Cockpit
18
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
3 Hazard warning system 327
Intelligent Safety 160
4 Glove compartment 251
5 Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, and Communi‐
cation 6
6 Automatic climate control 228
7 Controller with buttons 24
8 Parking brake 115
Automatic Hold 116
9 eDRIVE 111
PDC Park Distance Control 205
Without Surround View: rearview
camera 209
Surround View 211
Crossing traffic warning 223
Parking assistant 218
Surround View: Panorama
View 211
Air suspension level adjust‐
ment 226
10 Driving Dynamics Control 126
SPORT driving mode
COMFORT driving mode
ECO PRO driving mode
ADAPTIVE driving mode
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 188
11 Steptronic transmission selector
lever 122
Seite 19
Cockpit At a glance
19
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
In the vicinity of the roofliner
1 Emergency Request, SOS 329
2 Glass sunroof 82
3 Indicator light, front-seat passen‐
ger airbag 160
4 Reading lights 154
5 Depending on the vehicle equip‐
ment: opening the rear sliding vi‐
sor 84
Depending on the vehicle equip‐
ment: closing the rear sliding vi‐
sor 84
6 Interior lights 153
Seite 20
At a glance Cockpit
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready
state
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
General information
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in
one of the three states:
▷ Idle state.
▷ Standby state.
▷ Drive-ready state.
Idle state
Concept
If the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched off.
All electronic systems/power consumers are
deactivated.
General information
The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening
from the outside and after exiting and locking.
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Automatic idle state
The idle state is automatically established un‐
der the following conditions:
▷ After several minutes, if no operation takes
place on the vehicle.
▷ If the charge state of the vehicle battery is
low.
▷ Depending on the setting via iDrive, if one
of the front doors is opened when exiting
the vehicle.
The idle state is not automatically established
while a phone call is active.
Seite 21
Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready state At a glance
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Establishing idle state when opening
the front doors
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Turn off after door opening"
Manual idle state
To establish idle state in the vehicle after end
of trip:
Hold button down until the OFF
indicator on the instrument clus‐
ter goes out.
Standby state
Concept
When standby state is switched on, most func‐
tions can be used while the vehicle is station‐
ary. Desired settings can be adjusted.
General information
The vehicle is in standby state after opening
the front doors.
Display in the instrument cluster
OFF is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster. The drivetrain is
switched off and standby state
switched on.
Drive-ready state
Concept
Switching on drive-ready state corresponds to
starting the engine.
General information
Some functions, such as DSC Dynamic Stabil‐
ity Control, can only be used with drive-ready
state switched on.
Follow further information on the drive-ready
state, refer to page 109.
Switching on drive-ready state
Drive-ready state is switched on
via the Start/Stop button:
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Display in the instrument cluster
When the drive-ready state is
switched on, READY is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Switching off drive-ready state
Press the Start/Stop button to switch off drive-
ready state. The vehicle switches into standby
state.
Seite 22
At a glance Idle state, standby state, and drive-ready state
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
iDrive
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Concept
The iDrive combines the functions of many
switches. These functions can be operated via
the Controller or touchscreen.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating the integrated information
systems and communication devices while
driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to
lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident. Only use the systems or devices
when the traffic situation allows. If necessary,
stop and use the systems and devices while
the vehicle is stationary.◀
Operation
Overview
1 Control Display with touchscreen
2 Controller with touchpad
Control Display
General information
To clean the Control Display, follow the care
instructions, refer to page 337.
In the case of very high temperatures on the
Control Display, for instance due to intense so‐
lar radiation, the brightness may be reduced
down to complete deactivation. Once the tem‐
perature is reduced, for instance through
shade or air conditioning, the normal functions
are restored.
Safety information
NOTE
Objects in the area in the front of the
Control Display can shift and damage the Con‐
trol Display. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Do not place objects in the area in front of
the Control Display.◀
Switching on
1.
Turn on standby state.
2. Press the controller.
Seite 23
iDrive At a glance
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Switching off
1.
Press button.
2. "Turn off control display"
Controller
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the Controller, refer to
page 28.
Operation
▷ Turn.
▷ Press.
▷ Move in four directions.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: call up main menu.
Press twice: display all menu items
of the main menu.
Open the Communication menu.
Open the Media/Radio menu.
Open destination input menu for
navigation.
Open navigation map.
Press once: open the previous dis‐
play.
Press and hold: open the menus
used last.
Open the Options menu.
Seite 24
At a glance iDrive
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Operating with the Controller
Opening the main menu
Press button.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the
main menu.
Adapting the main menu
1. Press the button twice.
All menu items of the main menu are dis‐
played.
2. Select a menu item.
3. To move the menu item to the desired po‐
sition, tilt the Controller to the right or left.
Selecting menu items
Highlighted menu items can be selected.
1.
Turn the Controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the Controller.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
"iDrive settings".
Changing between displays
After a menu item is selected, for instance
"iDrive settings", a new display appears.
▷ Move the Controller to the left.
Closes the current display and shows the
previous display.
▷
Press button.
The previous display opens.
▷ Move the Controller to the right.
New display is opened.
The arrow indicates that additional displays
can be opened.
Opening recently used menus
The recently used menus can be displayed.
Press and hold this button.
Opening the Options menu
Press button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Seite 25
iDrive At a glance
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
The Options menu consists of various areas:
▷ Screen settings, for instance "Split
screen".
▷ Control options for the selected main
menu, for instance for "Media/Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, for instance "Save
station".
Changing settings
1.
Select a field.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐
ting is displayed.
3. Press the Controller.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
menu item activates or deactivates the func‐
tion.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Entering letters and numbers
General information
Letters and numbers can be entered using the
Controller or the touchscreen. The keyboard's
display changes automatically.
Input
1. Turn the Controller: select letters or num‐
bers.
2. : confirm entry.
Deleting
Symbol Function
Press the Controller: delete letters
or number.
Hold the Controller down: delete all
letters or numbers.
Switching between upper/lower case,
numbers and characters
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case, letters
and numbers.
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or
Change between capital and
lower-case letters.
Entry comparison
When entering names and addresses, the
choice is narrowed down with every letter en‐
tered and letters may be added automatically.
Entries are continuously compared with data
stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during entry
for which data is available.
Seite 26
At a glance iDrive
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
▷ Destination search: place names can be
entered in all languages that are available
in iDrive.
Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en‐
tries, the letters for which there is an entry are
displayed at the left edge.
1. Turn the controller to the left or right
quickly.
All letters for which there are entries are
displayed on the left edge.
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.
The first entry of the selected letter is dis‐
played.
Operating via touchscreen
General information
The Control Display is equipped with a touch‐
screen.
Touch screen with your fingers. Do not use
any objects.
Opening the main menu
Tap on symbol.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the
main menu.
Adapting the main menu
1.
Tap on symbol.
All menu items of the main menu are dis‐
played.
2. Drag the menu item to the desired position
on the right or left.
Selecting menu items
Tap desired menu item.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
"iDrive settings".
Changing between displays
After a menu item is selected, a new display
opens.
The arrow indicates that additional displays
can be opened.
▷ Swipe to the left.
▷ Tap on symbol.
New display is opened.
Changing settings
Settings such as volumes can be changed via
the touchscreen.
Seite 27
iDrive At a glance
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
▷ Slide in the selected field to the right or
left, until the desired setting is displayed.
▷ , Tap on symbol.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
menu item activates or deactivates the func‐
tion.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Entering letters and numbers
General information
Letters and numbers can be entered using the
controller or the touchscreen.
The keyboard's display changes automatically.
Symbol Function
Tapping the symbol: delete the let‐
ter or number.
Tapping and holding the symbol for
an extended period: delete all letters
or numbers.
Switching between upper/lower case,
numbers and characters
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or
Change between capital and
lower-case letters.
Operating navigation map
The navigation map can be moved with the
touchscreen.
Function Operation
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out with the fin‐
gers.
Touchpad
General information
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the controller.
Selecting functions
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Touchpad"
4. Select the desired setting.
▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.
▷ "Map": using the map.
▷ "Search fields": write letters without
selecting the list field.
▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered
letters and numbers.
Entering letters and numbers
Entering letters requires some practice at the
beginning. When entering, pay attention to the
following:
Seite 28
At a glance iDrive
28
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
▷ The system distinguishes between upper
and lower-case letters and numbers. To
make entries, it may be necessary to
change between upper and lower-case let‐
ters, numbers and characters, refer to
page 26.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on
the Control Display.
▷ Always enter associated characters, such
as accents or periods so that the letter can
be clearly recognized. The set language
determines what input is possible. Where
necessary, enter special characters via the
Controller.
Entering special characters
Input Operation
Delete a charac‐
ter.
Swipe to the left on the
touchpad.
Enter a blank
space.
Swipe to the right in the
center of the touchpad.
Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the
upper area of the touch‐
pad.
Enter an under‐
score.
Swipe to the right in the
lower area of the touch‐
pad.
Using the map
The map in the navigation system can be
moved via the touchpad.
Function Operation
Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di‐
rection.
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out on the touch‐
pad with fingers.
Display menu. Tap once.
Split screen
General information
Additional information can be displayed in sev‐
eral menus on the right side of the split screen,
e.g., information from the onboard computer.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when switching to another menu.
Switching the split screen on/off
1.
Press button.
2. "Split screen"
Selecting the display
The display can be selected in menus, where
the split screen is supported.
1.
Move the Controller to the right until the
split screen is selected.
2. Press the Controller.
3. Select the desired setting.
Specifying the number of displays
It is possible to specify the number of displays.
1.
Move the Controller to the right until the
split screen is selected.
2. Press the Controller.
3. "Personalize menu"
4. Select the desired setting.
5. Move the Controller to the left.
Seite 29
iDrive At a glance
29
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Status information
General information
The status field can be found in the upper area
of the Control Display. Status information is
displayed in the form of symbols.
Status field symbols
Radio
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio station is being received.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Telephone
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Signal strength of cellular network.
Network search.
Cellular network is not available.
The critical charge state of the mo‐
bile phone has been reached.
Roaming is active.
SMS text message received.
Message received.
Reminder.
Sending not possible.
Contacts are loaded.
Entertainment
Symbol Meaning
Music collection.
AUX-IN port.
AUX-IN port in the front or in the
rear.
Bluetooth audio.
USB audio interface.
Mobile phone audio interface.
WiFi.
iPod.
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Check Control message.
The sound output has been
switched off.
Request for the current vehicle po‐
sition.
Checking the current vehicle posi‐
tion.
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐
tions, phone numbers and menu entries or
pages in the Integrated Owner's Manual.
Settings are stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Seite 30
At a glance iDrive
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Saving a function
1. Select function via iDrive.
2.
Press and hold the desired button
until a signal sounds.
Running a function
Press button.
The function will work immediately. This
means, e.g., that the number is dialed when a
phone number is selected.
Displaying the key assignment
Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves
or use objects.
The button assignment is displayed at the top
edge of screen.
Deleting the button assignments
1.
Press and hold buttons 1 and simulta‐
neously for approx. 5 seconds.
2. "OK"
Seite 31
iDrive At a glance
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
BMW Gesture Control
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Concept
Several iDrive functions can be operated by
hand motion only using BMW Gesture Control.
Overview
The gestures that are performed underneath
the interior mirror are captured by a camera in
the roofliner.
Activating/deactivating
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Gestures"
4. "Gesture control"
Settings
▷ "Display tips": the possible gesture is
shown on the Control Display.
▷ "Audio feedback": an acoustic signal is
emitted once the gesture is recognized.
Seite 32
At a glance BMW Gesture Control
32
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Possible gestures
Gesture Operation Function
Move index finger forward and backward in the di‐
rection of the screen.
Accept call.
Confirm Check Control mes‐
sage.
Select a highlighted entry in a
list during voice activation.
Swipe with the hand across the width of the Con‐
trol Display in the direction of the front-passenger
side.
Reject call.
Close popup.
Terminate voice activation.
Slowly move forearm clockwise in a circular pat‐
tern with the index finger stretched out forward.
Gesture is detected after one circular motion.
Increase the volume.
Slowly move forearm counterclockwise in a circu‐
lar pattern with the index finger stretched out for‐
ward.
Gesture is detected after one circular motion.
Reduce the volume.
Pinch with thumb and index finger and move hand
horizontally to the right or left.
Surround View: turn camera
view.
This gesture can only be exe‐
cuted while the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.
Move stretched out index and middle finger for‐
ward.
Individually assignable ges‐
ture.
Perform gestures underneath the interior mir‐
ror and next to the steering wheel.
Execute gestures clearly.
The gestures can also be executed from the
front-passenger side.
Assigning gesture individually
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Gestures"
Seite 33
BMW Gesture Control At a glance
33
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
4. "Function assignment"
5. Select the desired setting.
System limits
Gesture recognition by the camera can be dis‐
turbed by the following circumstances:
▷ The camera lens is covered.
▷ Objects are located on the rear-view mir‐
ror.
▷ The camera lens is dirty. Clean the camera
lenses, refer to page 337.
▷ The gesture is executed outside of the de‐
tection range.
▷ Wearing of gloves or jewelry.
▷ Smoking in the vehicle's interior.
Seite 34
At a glance BMW Gesture Control
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Voice activation system
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Concept
Most functions displayed on the Control Dis‐
play can be operated by voice commands via
the voice activation system. The system sup‐
ports you with announcements during input.
General information
▷ Functions that can only be used when the
vehicle is stationary can only be operated
via the voice activation system to a limited
extent.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes verbal
instructions to use with the voice activation
system.
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
Functional requirements
To enable voice command recognition, a lan‐
guage must be set via iDrive that is supported
by the voice activation system.
To set the language, refer to page 40.
Using the voice activation
system
Activating the voice activation system
1.
Press button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
This symbol in the instrument cluster
indicates that the voice activation sys‐
tem is active.
If no other commands are possible, operate
the function via iDrive.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Press the button on the steering
wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Possible commands
General information
Most menu items on the Control Display can
be voiced as commands.
Commands from other menus can also be spo‐
ken.
You may select list entries such as phone list
entries via voice activation. Read these list en‐
Seite 35
Voice activation system At a glance
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
tries out loud exactly as they are shown in the
respective list.
Displaying possible commands
The following is displayed in the top area of the
Control Display:
▷ Some possible commands for the current
menu.
▷ Some possible commands from other me‐
nus.
▷ Status of the voice recognition.
▷ Encrypted connection is not available.
Help on the voice activation system
▷ To have the available spoken instructions
read out loud: ›Voice commands‹.
▷ To have information on the operating prin‐
ciple of the voice activation system read
out loud: ›General information on voice
control‹.
▷ To have help for the current menu read out
loud: ›Help‹.
Example: opening the tone
settings
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the Controller.
1.
Switch on the Entertainment sound output,
if needed.
2.
Press button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›Media and radio‹
4. ›Tone‹
Settings
Setting the voice dialog
You can set the system to use standard dialog
or a short version.
The short version of the voice dialog plays
back short messages in abbreviated form.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Speech mode:"
5. Select the desired setting.
Selecting the input language
For some languages, the input language can
be selected.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Voice control:"
5. Select the desired setting.
Activating voice recognition via the
server
The voice recognition feature via the server
provides a dictation function and a natural
method of entering destinations while improv‐
ing the quality of voice recognition. To use the
functions, data is transmitted to a service pro‐
vider via an encrypted connection and stored
locally there.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Server speech recognition"
Speaking during voice output
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the
voice activation system. The function can be
deactivated if inquiries are often undesirably
interrupted, for instance due to background
noise or talking.
Seite 36
At a glance Voice activation system
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Speaking during voice output"
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
structions until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Information for Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐
ment of a phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 329, close to the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
Seite 37
Voice activation system At a glance
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
BMW Touch Command
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Concept
The BMW Touch Command is a tablet com‐
puter, which can be used to operate important
vehicle functions.
General information
Depending on the equipment version, BMW
Touch Command is located in the rear console
or in the center armrest in the rear.
The following functions can be used via
BMW Touch Command.
▷ Seat adjustments for front passenger seat
and seats in the rear.
▷ Climate control in the rear.
▷ Sun protection.
▷ Ambient light.
▷ Ambient highlight.
▷ Bowers & Wilkins loudspeaker lighting.
▷ Audio sources in the front.
▷ Rear entertainment.
Overview
Operation
1 BMW Touch Command
2 Switching on/off
3 Removing
Connecting BMW Touch Command
▷ Switch on BMW Touch Command.
The connection is established automati‐
cally.
▷ If the connection is not established auto‐
matically: "Reconnect".
Tray
The tray in the center armrest in the rear has
the following functions:
▷ Storage and locking.
▷ Recharging the battery.
Insert BMW Touch Command into the tray
with the screen facing upward to ensure
proper locking. To charge the battery, insert
BMW Touch Command with the multifunction
socket to the left.
Seite 38
At a glance BMW Touch Command
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Button and softkeys on the
BMW Touch Command
Button Function
Display BMW application, press but‐
ton twice as needed.
Softkey Function
Display list of last used applications.
Back.
Operation
Concept
1.
Press button.
The main menu of the BMW application is
displayed.
2. Swipe to the left or right to display further
menus.
3. Tap on the desired menu.
4. Adjust the settings.
Exiting the BMW application
Tap on menu item: "Apps"
Further information is displayed.
Language setting
The menu language depends on the iDrive set‐
tings.
Resetting to factory settings
BMW Touch Command can be reset to factory
settings.
All data and personal settings in the device
memory are deleted and the connection to the
vehicle is interrupted.
1.
"Settings"
2. Tap on symbol.
3. "Reset to factory settings"
Seite 39
BMW Touch Command At a glance
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
General settings
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Language
Setting the language
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Language:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the voice dialog
Voice dialog for the voice activation system,
refer to page 36.
Time
Setting the time zone
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time zone:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the time
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired hours
are displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
7. Turn the Controller until the desired mi‐
nutes are displayed.
8. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the time format
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time format:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Instrument cluster with enhanced
features: setting the clock time
display
The clock time can be displayed in analog or
digital form.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
Seite 40
At a glance General settings
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Time"
6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Automatic time setting
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are
updated automatically.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Automatic time setting"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Date
Setting the date
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired day is
displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
7. Make the settings for the month and year.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the date format
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date format:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the units of
measurement
The units of measurement for different values
can be adjusted, e.g., fuel consumption, dis‐
tances, and temperature.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Units"
4. Select the desired menu item.
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Activating/deactivating the
display of the current vehicle
position
Concept
If vehicle location has been activated, the cur‐
rent vehicle position can be displayed in the
BMW Connected app or in the Connected‐
Drive customer portal.
Activating/deactivating
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Vehicle tracking"
4. "Vehicle tracking"
Seite 41
General settings At a glance
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Activating/deactivating
popup windows
For some functions, popup windows are dis‐
played automatically on the Control Display.
Some of these popup windows can be acti‐
vated or deactivated.
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Pop-ups"
4. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Control Display
Brightness
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
7. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness settings may not be clearly visible.
Screensaver
If no settings are made via iDrive, a screensa‐
ver will be displayed after an adjustable time.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Screensaver"
6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Selecting the contents of the main
menu
For some menu items of the main menu, the
displayed contents can be selected.
1.
Press button.
2. "Contents of main menu"
3. Select the desired menu and the desired
content.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Messages
Concept
The menu centrally displays all messages ar‐
riving in the vehicle in list form.
General information
The following messages can be displayed:
▷ Traffic messages.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Communication messages, e.g., e-mail,
SMS or reminders.
▷ Service requirements messages.
Messages are additionally displayed in the sta‐
tus field.
Retrieving messages
Using iDrive:
1.
"Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.
Seite 42
At a glance General settings
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
The respective menu is opened, where the
message is displayed.
Deleting messages
All messages, except Check Control mes‐
sages, can be deleted from the list. Check
Control messages are displayed as long as
they are relevant.
Via iDrive:
1. "Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.
3.
Press button.
4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all
notifications"
Settings
The following settings can be adjusted:
▷ Select the applications, from which mes‐
sages will be permitted.
▷ Sort the messages according to date or
priority.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Notifications"
4. Select the desired setting.
Data protection
Data transfer
Concept
The vehicle offers different functions, whose
use requires a data transfer to BMW or a serv‐
ice provider. The data transfer can be deacti‐
vated for some functions.
General information
With data transfer deactivated, the respective
function cannot be used.
Only make these settings while stationary.
Activating/deactivating the data
transfer
Follow the instructions on the Control Display.
Using iDrive:
1. Switch on standby state.
2. "My Vehicle"
3. "iDrive settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. Select the desired setting.
Deleting personal data in the vehicle
Concept
Depending on the usage, the vehicle saves
personal data, such as stored radio stations.
This personal data can be permanently deleted
using iDrive.
General information
Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing data can be deleted:
▷ Driver profile settings.
▷ Stored radio stations.
▷ Stored programmable memory buttons.
▷ Travel and Onboard Computer information.
▷ Music collection.
▷ Navigation, for instance stored destina‐
tions.
▷ Phone book.
▷ Online data, for instance Favorites, cook‐
ies.
▷ Office data, for instance voice notes.
▷ Login accounts.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
to 15 minutes.
Functional requirement
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Seite 43
General settings At a glance
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Deleting data
Heed and follow the instructions on the Con‐
trol Display.
Using iDrive:
1. Switch on standby state.
2. "My Vehicle"
3. "iDrive settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. "Delete personal data"
6. "Delete personal data"
7. "OK"
8. Exit and lock the vehicle.
After 15 minutes, the deletion process is com‐
pleted.
If not all of the data was deleted, repeat the de‐
letion.
Canceling deletion
Switch on the drive-ready state to cancel dele‐
tion of the data.
Connections
Concept
Various connection types are available for us‐
ing mobile devices in the vehicle. The connec‐
tion type to select depends on the mobile de‐
vice and the desired function.
General information
The following overview shows possible func‐
tions and the suitable connection types for
them. The scope of functions depends on the
mobile device.
Function Connec‐
tion type
Making calls via the hands-free
system.
Using phone functions via iDrive.
Using the smartphone Office
functions.
Bluetooth.
Playing music from the smart‐
phone or the audio player.
Bluetooth
or USB.
Using compatible apps via iDrive. Bluetooth
or USB.
USB storage device:
Exporting and importing driver
profiles.
Performing software updates.
Exporting and importing stored
trips.
Playing music.
USB.
Playing videos from the smart‐
phone or the USB storage de‐
vice.
USB.
Using the vehicle Internet ac‐
cess.
Internet
hotspot.
Use Apple Carplay apps via
iDrive and voice operation.
Bluetooth
and WiFi.
Screen Mirroring:
Showing the smartphone display
on the Control Display.
WiFi
The following connection types require one-
time pairing with the vehicle:
▷ Bluetooth.
▷ Internet hotspot.
▷ Apple CarPlay.
▷ Screen Mirroring.
Paired devices are automatically recognized
later on and connected to the vehicle.
Seite 44
At a glance General settings
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Safety information
WARNING
Operating the integrated information
systems and communication devices while
driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to
lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident. Only use the systems or devices
when the traffic situation allows. If necessary,
stop and use the systems and devices while
the vehicle is stationary.◀
Compatible devices
General information
Information on mobile devices compatible with
the vehicle can be found at www.bmwusa.com/
bluetooth.
Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed
or deviating software versions.
Displaying the vehicle identification
number and software part number
When looking for compatible devices, you may
have to state the vehicle identification number
and the software part number. These numbers
can be displayed in the vehicle.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth® info"
6. "System information"
A software update, refer to page 51, can be
performed, if needed.
Bluetooth connection
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible device, refer to page 45, with
Bluetooth interface.
▷ The remote control or BMW display key is
in the vehicle.
▷ The device is ready for operation.
▷ Bluetooth is switched on in the vehicle, re‐
fer to page 45, and on the device.
▷ Bluetooth pre-settings may be required on
the device, for instance visibility, refer to
the owner's manual of the device.
Switching on Bluetooth
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth®"
Activating/deactivating telephone
functions
To use all supported functions of a mobile
phone, the following functions must be acti‐
vated prior to pairing the mobile phone with
the vehicle.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Office"
Activate function to transmit short
messages, e-mails, calendars, tasks,
notes, and reminders to the vehicle.
Costs can be incurred by transmitting
all data to the vehicle.
▷ "Contact images"
Activate function to show the contact
pictures.
6. Move the Controller to the left.
Seite 45
General settings At a glance
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Pairing the mobile device with the
vehicle
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
5. Select functions:
▷ "Telephone"
▷ "Bluetooth® audio"
▷ "Apps"
▷ "Apple CarPlay"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
played on the Control Display.
6. Search for Bluetooth devices in the vicinity
of the mobile device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile device display.
Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.
7. Depending on the mobile device, a control
number is displayed or the control number
must be entered.
▷ Compare the control number displayed
on the Control Display with the control
number on the display of the device.
Confirm the control number on the de‐
vice and on the Control Display.
▷ Enter and confirm the same control
number on the device and via iDrive.
The device is connected and displayed in
the device list, refer to page 50.
Frequently asked questions
All requirements are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite
that, the mobile device does not function as
expected.
In this case, the following explanations can
help:
Why could the mobile phone not be paired or
connected?
▷ There are too many Bluetooth devices
connected to the mobile phone or vehicle.
In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connec‐
tions with other devices.
Delete all known Bluetooth connections
from the device list on the mobile phone
and start a new device search.
▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode
or has only a limited remaining battery life.
Charge mobile phone.
▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is pos‐
sible that only one mobile phone can be
connected to the vehicle.
Unpair the connected mobile phone from
the vehicle and pair and connect only one
mobile phone.
Why does the mobile phone no longer react?
▷ The applications on the mobile phone do
not function anymore.
Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
▷ Too high or too low ambient temperature
for mobile phone operation.
Do not subject the mobile phone to ex‐
treme ambient temperatures.
Why can phone functions not be used via
iDrive?
▷ The mobile phone may not be properly
configured, for instance as Bluetooth audio
device.
Connect the mobile phone with the tele‐
phone or additional phone function.
Why are no or not all phone book entries dis‐
played or why are they incomplete?
▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
not yet complete.
▷ It is possible that only the phone book en‐
tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card
are transmitted.
Seite 46
At a glance General settings
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
▷ It may not be possible to display phone
book entries with special characters.
▷ It may not be possible to transmit contacts
from social networks.
▷ The number of phone book entries to be
stored is too high.
▷ Data volume of the contact too large, for
instance due to stored information such as
notes.
Reduce the data volume of the contact.
▷ A mobile phone can only be connected as
audio source or as telephone.
Configure the mobile phone and connect it
with the telephone or additional phone
function.
How can the phone connection quality be im‐
proved?
▷ Adjust the strength of the Bluetooth signal
on the mobile phone, depending on the
mobile phone.
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in
adapter or place it in the area of the center
console.
▷ Insert mobile phone into the wireless
charging tray.
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and
loudspeakers separately in the sound set‐
tings.
If all points in this list have been checked and
the required function is still not available, con‐
tact the hotline, a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
USB connection
General information
Mobile devices with a USB port are connected
to the USB interface.
▷ Mobile phones.
The snap-in adapter features a separate
USB port that is automatically connected
when a compatible mobile phone is in‐
serted.
▷ Audio devices such as MP3 players.
▷ USB storage devices.
Common file systems are supported.
FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended
formats.
The following applications are possible:
▷ Exporting and importing driver profiles, re‐
fer to page 74.
▷ Playing music files via USB audio.
▷ Playing videos via USB video.
▷ Loading of software updates, refer to
page 51.
Follow the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
▷ Protect the USB storage device against
mechanical damage.
▷ Due to the large number of USB media
available on the market, it cannot be guar‐
anteed that every device is operable on the
vehicle.
▷ Do not expose USB media to extreme envi‐
ronmental conditions, such as very high
temperatures; refer to the owner's manual
of the device.
▷ Due to the many different compression
techniques, proper playback of the media
stored on the USB storage device cannot
be guaranteed in all cases.
▷ A connected USB storage device will be
supplied with charging current via the USB
interface if the device supports this.
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the
stored data, do not charge a USB storage
device via the onboard socket, when it is
connected to the USB interface.
Seite 47
General settings At a glance
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
▷ Depending on how the USB storage device
is being used, settings may be required on
the USB storage device, refer to the own‐
er's manual of the device.
Not compatible USB media:
▷ USB hard drives.
▷ USB hubs.
▷ USB memory card readers with multiple in‐
serts.
▷ HFS-formatted USB media.
▷ Devices such as fans or lamps.
Functional requirement
Compatible device, refer to page 45, with USB
interface.
Connecting the device
Connect the USB storage device using a suita‐
ble adapter cable to a USB interface, refer to
page 248.
The USB storage device is displayed in the de‐
vice list, refer to page 50.
Internet connection
General information
Up to 8 devices can be connected with the In‐
ternet hotspot.
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible device, refer to page 45, with
WiFi interface.
▷ ConnectedDrive contract.
▷ Data contract with a service provider.
▷ WiFi activated on the device.
▷ Internet hotspot activated in the vehicle.
▷ Standby state switched on.
Activating the Internet hotspot
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Internet hotspot"
Connecting device with Internet
hotspot
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
5. "Internet hotspot"
Hotspot name and hotspot code are dis‐
played on the Control Display.
6. Search for WiFi networks on the device.
Select network name on the device.
7. Enter hotspot code on the device and con‐
nect.
The device is displayed in the device list, refer
to page 50.
With the first Internet usage via the Internet
hotspot, data volume must be purchased from
a service provider.
All devices connected via the Internet hotspot
use this data volume.
If necessary, data volume can be purchased
from the ConnectedDrive Store.
Settings
The network name and hotspot code can be
changed. In addition, the network name can be
hidden so that it cannot be found by other de‐
vices.
Seite 48
At a glance General settings
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4.
Press button.
5.
▷ "Change hotspot key"
Enter the desired hotspot code.
▷ "Change hotspot name"
Enter the desired network name.
▷ "Hide hotspot"
Activate or deactivate the function.
6. Confirm the entry of the hotspot code or
network name:
Select the symbol.
Apple CarPlay
Concept
CarPlay allows certain functions of a compati‐
ble Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice op‐
eration and iDrive.
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible iPhone, refer to page 45.
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
▷ Corresponding mobile wireless contract.
▷ Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice operation
are switched on on the iPhone.
Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the following settings:
▷ "Bluetooth®"
▷ "Apple CarPlay"
Pairing iPhone with CarPlay
Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle, refer
to page 46.
Select CarPlay as the function:
"Apple CarPlay"
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and
displayed in the device list, refer to page 50.
Operation
For more information, see the Integrated Own‐
er's Manual, Online Owner's Manual, BMW
Driver’s Guide app or, if necessary, the Own‐
er's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, and
Communication.
Frequently asked questions
All requirements are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite
that, the mobile device does not function as
expected.
In this case, the following explanations can
help:
The iPhone has already been paired with Apple
CarPlay. When a new connection is estab‐
lished, CarPlay can no longer be selected.
▷ Delete the iPhone concerned from the de‐
vice list.
▷ On the iPhone, delete the vehicle con‐
cerned from the list of stored vehicles un‐
der Bluetooth and under WiFi.
▷ Pair the iPhone as a new device.
If the steps listed have been carried out and
the required function is still not available: con‐
tact the hotline, a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Screen Mirroring
General information
Screen Mirroring enables mirroring (output‐
ting) of the smartphone display on the Control
Display.
Seite 49
General settings At a glance
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible smartphone, refer to page 45,
with Screen Mirroring interface.
▷ Screen Mirroring is switched on on the
smartphone.
▷ WiFi is switched on in the vehicle.
Switching on WiFi
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Vehicle Wi-Fi®"
Pairing a smartphone with Screen
Mirroring
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
5. "Screen Mirroring"
The WiFi name of the vehicle is displayed
on the Control Display.
6. Search for WiFi devices in the surround‐
ings of the smartphone.
The WiFi name of the vehicle appears on
the device display. Select the WiFi name of
the vehicle.
7. Confirm the connection via iDrive.
The device is connected and displayed in the
device list, refer to page 50.
Managing mobile devices
General information
▷ After one-time pairing, the devices are au‐
tomatically recognized and reconnected
when standby state is switched on.
▷ The data stored on the SIM card or in the
mobile phone are transferred to the vehicle
after recognition.
▷ For some devices, certain settings are nec‐
essary, for instance authorization; see the
owner's manual of the device.
Displaying the device list
All devices paired with or connected to the ve‐
hicle are displayed in the device list.
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
A symbol indicates, for which function a device
is used.
Symbol Function
"Telephone"
"Additional telephone"
"Bluetooth® audio"
"Apps"
"Internet hotspot"
"Apple CarPlay"
"Screen Mirroring"
Configuring the device
Functions can be activated or deactivated for
paired and connected devices.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select the desired device.
5. Select the desired setting.
If a function is assigned to a device, the func‐
tion will be deactivated where appropriate for a
Seite 50
At a glance General settings
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
device that is already connected and the de‐
vice will be disconnected.
Disconnecting the device
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Disconnect device"
The device remains paired and can be con‐
nected again, refer to page 51.
Connecting the device
A disconnected device can be reconnected.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Connect device"
The functions that were assigned to the device
before disconnecting are assigned to the de‐
vice when it is reconnected. If the device is al‐
ready connected, these functions are deacti‐
vated.
Deleting the device
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Delete device"
The device is disconnected and removed from
the device list.
Swapping the telephone and
additional phone
If two mobile phones are connected to the ve‐
hicle, the functions of the phone and additional
phone can be switched.
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Swap telephone/additional tel."
Software update
General information
The vehicle supports a large number of mobile
devices, for instance mobile phones and MP3
players. Software updates are available for
many of the supported devices. The vehicle is
maintained up-to-date via regular vehicle soft‐
ware updates.
Updates and related current information is
available at www.bmw.com/update.
Displaying the installed software
version
The software version installed in the vehicle is
displayed.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Show current version"
If an update has been carried out before, select
the desired version to display additional infor‐
mation.
Updating software via USB
The software may only be updated when the
vehicle is stationary.
Seite 51
General settings At a glance
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Using iDrive:
1. Store the file for the software update in the
main directory of a USB flash drive.
2. Connect the USB storage device to a USB
interface, refer to page 248.
3. "My Vehicle"
4. "iDrive settings"
5. "Software update"
6. "Update software"
7. "USB"
8. "Install software"
9. "OK"
10. Wait for the update to complete.
11. "Shut down system"
If necessary, switch off the engine first.
Updating software via BMW
Teleservices
Updating software via BMW Teleservices is
country-specific and may not be available.
The software is first transferred into the vehicle
and can then be installed. The software can be
installed at a time different from the time of
transfer.
The software can be transferred while driving,
and if the trip is interrupted it will resume auto‐
matically the next time the vehicle is driven. All
other functions remain available during the
transfer. Cellular network reception must be
available for the transfer to take place.
The software may only be updated when the
vehicle is stationary.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Update software"
5. "Teleservices"
6. "Load update"
The update is loaded but not installed.
7. Install or delete the update.
▷ "Install software"
The loaded update is installed.
This step can be carried out at a later
point in time.
▷ "Remove update"
The loaded update is removed.
The following steps are omitted.
8. "OK"
9. Wait for the update to complete.
10. "Shut down system"
If necessary, switch off the engine first.
Restoring the software version
The software version before the last software
update and the version before the first soft‐
ware update can be restored.
The software may only be restored when the
vehicle is stationary.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Restore software"
5.
▷ "Previous version"
The previous software version is re‐
stored.
▷ "Default software settings"
The first software version is restored.
6. "Remove software"
7. "OK"
8. Wait for restore.
9. "Shut down system"
If necessary, switch off the engine first.
Seite 52
At a glance General settings
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Integrated Owner's Manual
in the vehicle
Concept
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically
describes features and functions found in the
vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be
displayed on the Control Display.
Components of the Integrated
Owner's Manual
General information
The Integrated owner's manual consists of
four parts, which offer various levels of infor‐
mation or possible access.
Quick Reference Guide
The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐
tion on how to operate the vehicle, how to use
basic vehicle functions and what to do in case
of a breakdown. This information can also be
displayed while driving.
Search by images
Based on illustrations, image search provides
information and descriptions. This is useful,
e.g., when the terminology for a feature is not
known.
Keyword search
Search for information and descriptions by en‐
tering terms selected from the index.
Videos
The basic functions of selected systems are
explained in the videos.
Select components
1.
Press button.
2. "My Vehicle"
3. "Owner's Manual"
4. Select the desired setting.
Scrolling through the owner's manual
Turn the controller, until the next or previous
contents are displayed.
Context help - operating instructions
for the currently selected function
General information
The relevant information can be opened di‐
rectly.
Opening via iDrive
Change directly to the Options menu from the
function on the Control Display:
1. Press button.
2. "Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on
the Control Display:
"Owner's Manual"
Seite 53
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Changing between a function and the
operating instructions
To switch from a function, for instance radio, to
the Owner's Manual on the Control Display
and to alternate between the two displays:
1.
Press button.
2. "Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4.
Press button again to return to last
displayed function.
5.
Press button to return to the page of
the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To alternate continuously between the last dis‐
played function and the last displayed page of
the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4 & 5.
Opens a new display every time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The jumps into the Owner's Manual can be
stored on the programmable memory buttons,
refer to page 30, and called up directly.
Storing
1.
Select the desired entry point via iDrive:
▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "Search by pictures"
▷ "Keyword search"
▷ "Animations"
2.
Press desired button and hold for
more than 2 seconds.
Executing
Press the corresponding button.
The owner's manual is directly dis‐
played at the selected entry point.
Seite 54
At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
BMW eDRIVE
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Hybrid system
Concept
This BMW is a hybrid vehicle. In addition to the
combustion engine, the vehicle features a
high-voltage system that consists of an elec‐
tric motor and a high-voltage battery among
other things.
The hybrid system can move the vehicle purely
electrically. It can also support the combustion
engine in certain situations.
General information
The vehicle does not consume any fuel while
driving purely electrically. This enables envi‐
ronmentally friendly driving without emissions
in inner-city traffic. If the combustion engine is
used, the hybrid system support reduces fuel
consumption even further.
In addition to this, the electric motor acts like
an alternator: during braking and coasting, the
electric motor converts the vehicle's kinetic
energy into electricity. The current is stored in
the high-voltage battery and is used to drive
the electric motor.
The vehicle can be charged, refer to page 276,
via the charging socket at charging stations or
household sockets.
Overview
1 Combustion engine
2 Power electronics
3 Electric motor
4 High-voltage cables: orange
5 Auxiliary battery, combustion engine
6 High-voltage battery
7 Charging control unit
8 Charging socket
Functions while driving
Electric driving: ePOWER
Under certain conditions, refer to page 111,
the vehicle is powered only by the electric mo‐
tor.
Assistance from the electric motor
Driving off and accelerating require a lot of en‐
ergy.
To optimize acceleration and to reduce fuel
consumption, the electric motor boosts the
combustion engine, refer to page 114. To do
this, the electric motor uses the energy saved
in the high-voltage battery.
Driving with the combustion engine:
POWER
The combustion engine, refer to page 114,
provides the main drive power to move the ve‐
Seite 55
BMW eDRIVE At a glance
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
hicle. If necessary, the high-voltage battery is
charged at the same time.
The hybrid system always starts the combus‐
tion engine automatically.
Auto Start/Stop function, coasting
The Auto Start/Stop function, refer to
page 110, switches the combustion engine off
while the vehicle is moving, when braking,
when rolling to a halt, and while the vehicle is
stopped. The condition of rolling with the com‐
bustion engine switched off is referred to as
coasting. Convenience functions such as the
automatic climate control are supplied by the
high-voltage battery and can remain switched
on.
Energy recovery: CHARGE
The high-voltage battery of the hybrid system
is charged through energy recovery while driv‐
ing.
The electric motor acts as a generator and
converts the kinetic energy of the vehicle into
electric current, refer to page 114.
Charging the vehicle
The high-voltage battery of the vehicle can be
charged, refer to page 276, via the charging
socket at charging stations or household sock‐
ets.
Regular and complete charging of the high-
voltage battery reduces the fuel consumption
by using electric energy.
Climate control while parking and
charging
The hybrid system makes it possible to oper‐
ate the automatic climate control prior to driv‐
ing off and with the combustion engine
switched off.
During vehicle charging or if the high-voltage
battery is sufficiently charged, the vehicle's in‐
terior can be can be cooled or heated in ad‐
vance of the trip, refer to page 240.
The stationary climate control, refer to
page 239, can also be switched on directly.
Display
The displays of the hybrid system, refer to
page 131, provide information about the cur‐
rent state of hybrid operation and show the
system activity in a chart.
Energy-saving driving
To save energy while driving, read the follow‐
ing descriptions:
▷ Saving fuel, refer to page 268.
▷ Using the hybrid system efficiently, refer to
page 269.
▷ ECO PRO driving mode, refer to page 270.
▷ Adapting to the course of the road, refer to
page 133.
Safety of the hybrid system
Read the information on safety, refer to
page 57.
Long-term vehicle storage
Follow the instructions for vehicle storage and
for longer idle periods, refer to page 337.
Seite 56
At a glance BMW eDRIVE
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Safety of the hybrid system
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Working on the hybrid
system
General information
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that no changes be made to the vehicle, for in‐
stance the retrofitting of accessories, that will
have an effect on the vehicle’s hybrid system.
Safety information
DANGER
Improperly executed work, in particular
maintenance and repair on the high-voltage
system, can lead to electric shock. There is a
risk of injury, fire and danger to life.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that the work on the vehicle, in particular main‐
tenance and repair, be performed by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.◀
Hybrid system
Contact with water
The hybrid system is typically safe even in the
following example situations:
▷ Water in the footwell, for instance after a
rainstorm when sunroof was kept open.
▷ Vehicle is in water but only up to the al‐
lowed height.
▷ Fluid escapes in the cargo area.
Automatic deactivation
If an accident occurs, the hybrid system is
switched off automatically to prevent risk of
danger to occupants and other road users.
Read the information on What to do after an
accident, refer to page 330.
Seite 57
Safety of the hybrid system At a glance
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Controls
The information in this chapter helps you in
confidently operating your vehicle. All features
and accessories that are useful for driving and
your safety, comfort and convenience are
described here.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Opening and closing
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Remote control
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐
trols with integrated key.
Each remote control contains a replaceable
battery. Replacing the battery, refer to
page 63.
You may set the key functions depending on
the optional features and country-specific ver‐
sion. Settings, refer to page 76.
The vehicle stores personal settings for every
remote control. Driver profile, refer to
page 74.
The remote controls hold information about re‐
quired maintenance. Service data in the re‐
mote control, refer to page 322.
Safety information
WARNING
People or animals in the vehicle can lock
the doors from the inside and lock themselves
in. In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened
from the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take
the remote control with you so that the vehicle
can be opened from the outside.◀
WARNING
For some country-specific variants, un‐
locking from the inside is only possible with
special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Overview
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
Seite 60
Controls Opening and closing
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
3 Open tailgate
4 Press and hold or press three times in
quick succession: panic mode
Press briefly: headlight courtesy delay fea‐
ture
Unlocking
Press button on the remote control.
Depending on the settings, refer to page 76,
the following access points are unlocked:
▷ Driver's door.
Press the button of the remote control
again to unlock the other vehicle access
points.
▷ All doors and tailgate.
In addition, the following functions are exe‐
cuted:
▷ The settings stored in the driver profile, re‐
fer to page 74, are applied.
▷ The driver's seat is set to the last position
saved in the driver's profile. This function
must be activated in the settings, refer to
page 76.
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless
they were manually switched off. Switch
the interior lights on/off manually, refer to
page 154.
▷ Depending on the settings, the welcome
light and headlight courtesy delay feature,
refer to page 150, are switched on.
Press the remote control button again to
switch on Welcome Light Carpet for the al‐
ready unlocked vehicle.
▷ Automatically folded in exterior mirrors are
folded open. This function must be acti‐
vated in the settings, refer to page 76.
▷ The rear sliding visor of the glass sunroof
is moved into the position where it was
prior to locking.
▷ With anti-theft protection: Anti-theft pro‐
tection is switched off.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 78, is
switched off.
After opening one of the front doors, the vehi‐
cle is ready for operation, refer to page 22.
The light functions may depend on the ambi‐
ent brightness.
Convenient opening
Press and hold this button on the re‐
mote control after unlocking.
The windows and the glass sunroof are
opened, as long as the button on the remote
control is pressed.
Locking
1.
Close the driver's door.
2.
Press button on the remote control.
▷ All doors and the tailgate are locked.
▷ The rear sliding visor of the glass sunroof
is closed.
▷ The exterior mirrors are folded in. This
function must be activated in the settings,
refer to page 76.
▷ With anti-theft protection: Anti-theft pro‐
tection is switched on. This prevents the
doors from being unlocked using the lock
buttons or the door openers.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 78, is
switched on.
If the drive-ready state is still switched on
when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn
honks twice. In this case, the drive-ready state
must be switched off by means of the Start/
Stop button.
Seite 61
Opening and closing Controls
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
With Comfort Access: convenient
closing
Safety information
WARNING
With convenient closing, body parts can
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.◀
Closing
Press and hold this button on the remote
control in the area close to the vehicle af‐
ter locking.
The windows and the glass sunroof are closed,
as long as the button on the remote control is
pressed.
Switching on the interior and exterior
lights
Press button on the remote control with
the vehicle locked.
The function is not available for the first
10 seconds after locking.
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless
they were manually switched off. Switch
the interior lights on/off manually, refer to
page 154.
▷ Depending on the settings, the headlight
courtesy delay feature, refer to page 150,
is switched on. The welcome light is only
switched on when the vehicle is being un‐
locked.
The light functions may depend on the ambi‐
ent brightness.
Tailgate
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on the features and the country
version, it is also possible to have the doors
unlocked. Adjusting the settings, refer to
page 76.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
During opening, the tailgate pivots back
and up. There is a risk of property damage.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
Opening
Press and hold button on the remote
control for approx. 1 second.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
▷ Press button on the remote con‐
trol and hold for at least 3 sec‐
onds.
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote con‐
trol three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Switching on the headlight courtesy
delay feature
Press button on the remote control.
Set the duration, refer to page 150.
Seite 62
Controls Opening and closing
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Replacing the battery
1. Remove the integrated key from the re‐
mote control, refer to page 68.
2. Place the integrated key underneath the
battery compartment cover, arrow 1, and
lift the cover with a lever movement of the
integrated key, arrow 2.
3. Push battery in the direction of the arrow
using a pointed object and lift it out.
4. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the pos‐
itive side facing up.
5. Press the cover closed.
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop
or take them to a collection point.
Additional remote controls
Additional remote controls are available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Loss of the remote controls
A lost remote control can be blocked and re‐
placed by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message, refer to page 134,
is displayed.
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstan‐
ces:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replacing the battery, refer to
page 63.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity to the remote control.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with electronic devices.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a
charging process of mobile devices, for in‐
stance charging of a mobile phone.
▷ The remote control is in direct proximity of
the wireless charging tray.
Place the remote control down at a differ‐
ent location.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can be
unlocked and locked from the outside with the
integrated key, refer to page 68.
Seite 63
Opening and closing Controls
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Switching the drive-ready state on via
emergency detection of the remote
control
1. Hold the remote control with its back
against the marked area on the steering
column.
2. Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐
onds.
If the remote control is not detected, slightly
change the position of the remote control and
repeat the procedure.
BMW display key
General information
The BMW display key is supplied with an addi‐
tional mechanical key. If the display key is
used, the mechanical key should be carried
with you, for instance in the wallet.
The display key supports all functions of the
standard remote control.
In addition, the following functions are also
available:
▷ Display status of doors and windows.
▷ Display status of the alarm system.
▷ Operate stationary climate control.
▷ Adjust charging times.
▷ Call up range with available fuel and the
current battery charge state.
▷ Display charge state of the high-voltage
battery.
▷ Display service information.
Safety information
WARNING
People or animals in the vehicle can lock
the doors from the inside and lock themselves
in. In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened
from the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take
the remote control with you so that the vehicle
can be opened from the outside.◀
WARNING
For some country-specific variants, un‐
locking from the inside is only possible with
special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Seite 64
Controls Opening and closing
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Overview
1 Open tailgate
2 Unlocking
3 Press and hold or press three times in
quick succession: panic mode
Press briefly: headlight courtesy delay fea‐
ture
4 Locking
5 Park button
6 Display
7 Back
8 Switch the display on/off
9 Micro-USB charging socket
Reception range
The number of available display key functions
depends on the distance from the vehicle.
▷ When you are in close proximity to the ve‐
hicle, all functions of the display key are
available.
▷ When you are in the expanded reception
range, you can access status information
and use the stationary climate control.
▷ Outside of the reception range of the vehi‐
cle, you can display the last transmitted
status information from the vehicle.
The symbol is shown on the display if one
of the buttons is pressed outside of the recep‐
tion range.
Display
General information
The display is divided into the upper status
line, the information area, and the lower status
line.
Upper status line
The upper status line displays the following in‐
formation:
▷ Vehicle secured.
Vehicle not secured.
▷ Set time in the vehicle.
▷ Charge state of the display key bat‐
tery.
Information area
The information area can be used to access in‐
formation and perform additional functions.
If the information area contains more than one
page, then page indicators are shown beneath
the information.
The indicator for the current page has
been filled in.
Swipe to the right or left with a finger to
change between the pages.
If further information is available on a page, tap
the appropriate symbol.
To return to the original page: tap on the
symbol beneath the display.
Touch it again to display the charge state of
the high-voltage battery.
Lower status line
The lower status line indicates whether or not
the display key is within reception range, refer
to page 65.
▷ "Connected": the display key is within re‐
ception range.
▷ "Updated": the display key is not within re‐
ception range. It indicates when the last
data transfer from the vehicle took place.
Seite 65
Opening and closing Controls
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Switching on/off
The display will go out automatically after a
brief period to conserve battery power.
To hide the display manually:
Press the button on the left side of the display
key. Overview, refer to page 65.
To show the display:
1. Press the button on the left side of the dis‐
play key.
2. Then, swipe with your finger from bottom
to top to unlock the screen lock.
To switch off the display to increase the usable
battery life:
1.
Press and hold the button on the left side
of the display key for longer than 4 sec‐
onds.
2. "OK"
To switch the display on:
Press the button on the left side of the display
key.
Operating concept
Depending on the equipment, there are up to
five main menus that provide access to the
sub-menus.
Main menu Information/Function
"Security
information"
/
Door status.
Alarm system status.
After alarm triggering: date,
time, and reason for trigger‐
ing the alarm.
Window status.
Glass sunroof status.
Main menu Information/Function
"Vehicle
information"
Maintenance indicators of
Condition Based Service
CBS, refer to page 322.
Status of the roadside park‐
ing lights.
"Mobility info" Range with available fuel.
Status during charging.
"Departure
setting"
Operate stationary climate
control.
High-voltage battery: sched‐
ule charging times.
Display key battery
General information
Observe the following information:
▷ If the charge state of the display key bat‐
tery declines, the display is switched off
automatically. The battery must be re‐
charged so that the display can be
switched back on. The operability of the
standard buttons is retained until the bat‐
tery is completely discharged.
▷ Charge the battery for at least three hours
before using the display key for the first
time or if the key has not been used for an
extended period.
▷ The display key can be used while it is be‐
ing charged. If the battery is fully dis‐
charged, it may take some time before the
display key can be used again.
▷ Due to the large number of USB chargers
available on the market, it cannot be guar‐
anteed that every charger will function
properly. The charging duration depends
on the charger used.
▷ During charging, the charger and the dis‐
play key may become warm. At higher
temperatures, the display key may cause a
reduction in the charging current, and in
Seite 66
Controls Opening and closing
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
isolated cases the charging process may
be interrupted temporarily.
Charging
▷ Connect the display key via the micro-USB
charging socket to a USB port.
▷ Place the display key into the recess of the
wireless charging tray underneath the cen‐
ter armrest.
Make sure that the display is on the side of
the clamp and that the lock button points
upward.
Close the center armrest.
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
BMW display key detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstan‐
ces:
▷ The battery of the display key is dis‐
charged. Charge the battery, refer to
page 66.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the display key due to metal
objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a
charging process of mobile devices, for in‐
stance charging of a mobile phone.
Do not transport the display key together with
metal objects or electronic devices.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also
be unlocked and locked from the outside with
the mechanical key.
Switching on drive-ready state via
emergency detection of the BMW
display key
1. Hold the display key with its back against
the marked area on the steering column.
2. Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐
onds.
If the display key is not detected, slightly
change the position of the display key and re‐
peat the procedure.
Resetting the BMW display key
If the charged display key cannot be switched
on anymore or if the display does not respond
to entries anymore, the display key can be re‐
set.
Press and hold the button on the left side of
the display key for at least 20 seconds, until
something appears on the display.
Seite 67
Opening and closing Controls
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Integrated key
General information
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
without remote control using the integrated
key.
The integrated key also fits the glove compart‐
ment.
Safety information
WARNING
For some country-specific variants, un‐
locking from the inside is only possible with
special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.◀
NOTE
The door lock is permanently joined with
the door. The door handle can be moved.
When pulling the door handle with the
integrated key inserted, paint or the integrated
key can be damaged. There is a risk of damage
to property. Remove the integrated key before
pulling the outside door handle.◀
Removing
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the
integrated key, arrow 2.
Locking/unlocking via the door lock
1. Pull the door handle outward with the left
hand and hold it.
2. Guide one finger of your right hand from
the back under the cover, feel for the re‐
lease there, and press it outward.
3. Use your left thumb to push the cover to
the right.
4. Unlock or lock the door lock using the
integrated key.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked
from the inside.
Alarm system
The alarm system is not switched on if the ve‐
hicle is locked with the integrated key.
Seite 68
Controls Opening and closing
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via
the door lock.
In order to stop the alarm, unlock the vehicle
with the remote control, if necessary through
emergency detection of the remote control, re‐
fer to page 63.
Buttons for the central
locking system
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning
system and interior lights come on.
Overview
Buttons for the central locking system.
Locking
Press the button with the front doors
closed.
The vehicle is not secured against theft when
locking.
Unlocking
Press button.
Opening
▷ Press the button to unlock all the
doors.
Pull the door opener above the armrest.
▷ Front doors: pull the door handle on the
door to open the door. The other doors re‐
main locked.
▷ Back doors: pull twice on the door handle
on the door to be opened; the first time un‐
locks the door, the second time opens it.
The other doors remain locked.
Comfort Access
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐
ing the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote con‐
trol with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the
vehicle's interior.
General information
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle.
▷ Convenient closing.
▷ Opening tailgate.
▷ Opening and closing the tailgate with no-
touch activation.
Functional requirements
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle near
the doors.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
Seite 69
Opening and closing Controls
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Unlocking
Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely.
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control.
Locking
Close the driver's door.
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a
closed vehicle door with your finger for approx.
1 second without grasping the door handle.
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control.
Convenient closing
Safety information
WARNING
With convenient closing, body parts can
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.◀
Closing
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a
closed vehicle door with your finger and hold it
there without grasping the door handle.
This corresponds to pressing and holding the
button on the remote control.
In addition to locking, the windows and glass
sunroof will be closed.
Open tailgate
General information
If you open the tailgate via Comfort Access,
locked doors will not be unlocked.
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
During opening, the tailgate pivots back
and up. There is a risk of property damage.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
Seite 70
Controls Opening and closing
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Opening
Press button on the exterior of the tailgate.
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control.
Opening and closing the tailgate with
no-touch activation
Concept
The tailgate can be opened and closed with
no-touch activation using the remote control
you are carrying. Two sensors detect a for‐
ward-directed foot motion in the central rear
area and the tailgate is opened or closed.
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
If the remote control is in the sensor range, the
tailgate may open or close inadvertently if you
unintentionally move your foot or if something
else moves in the detection range.
The sensor has an approximate range of
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the vehi‐
cle.
If you open the tailgate with no-touch activa‐
tion, locked doors will not be unlocked.
Safety information
WARNING
During no-touch activation, vehicle parts
may be touched, e.g., hot exhaust system.
There is a risk of injury. When moving your
foot, make sure you have a firm stance and do
not touch the vehicle.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
During opening, the tailgate pivots back
and up. There is a risk of property damage.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
Performing the foot movement
1.
Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at
approx. one arm's length away from the
rear of the vehicle.
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the direc‐
tion of travel and immediately pull it back.
With this movement, the leg must pass
through the ranges of both sensors.
Opening
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
The tailgate is opened.
Before the opening, the hazard warning sys‐
tem flashes.
You can pause the opening operation by mov‐
ing your foot again.
Closing
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
Seite 71
Opening and closing Controls
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Before closing, the hazard warning system
flashes and an acoustic signal sounds.
You can interrupt the closing operation by
moving your foot again.
Malfunction
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstan‐
ces:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 63.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection by
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity of the remote control.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with electronic devices.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
the vehicle using the buttons of the remote
control or using the integrated key, refer to
page 68.
Tailgate
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on the features and the country
version, it is also possible to have the doors
unlocked. Adjusting the settings, refer to
page 76.
The tailgate cannot be opened if it is locked
using the switch in the glove compartment.
Separately lock the tailgate, refer to page 73.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
During opening, the tailgate pivots back
and up. There is a risk of property damage.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
Opening and closing
Opening
From the outside
▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.
With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or
have the remote control with you.
Press button on the exterior of the tailgate.
▷ Press and hold button on the re‐
mote control for approx. 1 second.
Depending on the setting, the doors may
also be unlocked. Opening with the remote
control, refer to page 62.
From the inside
Press button in the storage compart‐
ment of the driver's door.
Seite 72
Controls Opening and closing
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Interruption of the opening procedure
The opening operation is interrupted:
▷ By pressing the button used for opening
again.
▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
tailgate.
Closing
From the inside
Pull and hold the button in the driver's
door.
The remote control must be located inside the
vehicle for this function.
An acoustic signal sounds before the tailgate is
closed.
From inside the tailgate
Without Comfort Access:
Press button on the inside of the tailgate.
With Comfort Access:
▷ Press button, arrow 1, on the inside of the
tailgate.
▷ Press button, arrow 2.
The vehicle will be locked after closing the
tailgate. The driver's door must be closed
for this purpose and the remote control
must be outside of the vehicle in the area
of the tailgate.
Interruption of the closing procedure
The closing operation is interrupted:
▷ By pressing the button used for closing
again/releasing the button used for closing.
▷ If the vehicle starts off with a jerky move‐
ment.
Malfunction
In the event of an electrical malfunction, oper‐
ate the unlocked tailgate manually with a slow
and smooth motion.
Locking separately
General information
The switch in the glove compartment decou‐
ples the tailgate from the central locking sys‐
tem, so it can no longer be opened.
If the glove compartment is locked with the
integrated key, the remote control can be
handed over without the integrated key, for in‐
stance to a valet parking service. It is then no
longer possible for objects to be removed from
the cargo area even with the remote control.
Seite 73
Opening and closing Controls
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Securing
▷ Tailgate secured, arrow 1.
▷ Tailgate not secured, ar‐
row 2.
Slide the switch into the desired position.
Trunk emergency unlocking
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.
The tailgate unlocks.
Automatic Soft Closing
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed while operat‐
ing the doors. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the doors is
clear during opening and closing.◀
Closing
To close the doors, push lightly.
Closing occurs automatically.
Driver profile
Concept
In the driver profiles, individual settings for
several drivers can be stored and called up
again when required.
General information
There are three driver profiles with which per‐
sonal vehicle settings can be stored. Every re‐
mote control has one of these driver profiles
assigned.
If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐
trol, the assigned personal driver profile will be
activated. All settings stored in the driver pro‐
file are automatically applied.
If several drivers use their own remote control,
the vehicle will adjust the personal settings
during unlocking. These settings are also re‐
stored, if the vehicle has been used in the
meantime by a person with a different remote
control.
Changes to the settings are automatically
stored in the driver profile currently activated.
If another driver profile is selected via iDrive,
the settings stored in it will be applied auto‐
matically. The new driver profile is assigned to
the remote control currently used.
There is an additional guest profile available
that is not assigned to any remote control. It
can be used to apply settings in the vehicle
without changing the personal driver profiles.
Functional requirements
For the system to be able to identify the driver
profile associated to a particular driver, the de‐
tected remote control must be clearly allo‐
cated to the driver.
This is the case when:
▷ The driver is only carrying his or her own
remote control.
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle.
▷ The driver gets into the vehicle through the
driver's door.
Active driver profile
After switching on the Control Display, the
name of the active driver profile is displayed.
Select driver profile, refer to page 75.
Seite 74
Controls Opening and closing
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
As soon as the engine is started or any key is
pressed, the last selected display is shown on
the Control Display.
To exit the welcome screen via iDrive:
"OK"
Settings
The settings for the following systems and
functions are stored in the active driver profile.
The scope of storable settings depends on
country and equipment.
▷ Unlocking and locking.
▷ Lights.
▷ Climate control.
▷ Radio.
▷ Instrument cluster.
▷ Programmable memory buttons.
▷ Volumes, tone.
▷ Control Display.
▷ Navigation.
▷ TV.
▷ PDC Park Distance Control.
▷ Rearview camera.
▷ Panorama View.
▷ Head-up Display.
▷ Driving Dynamics Control.
▷ Seat position, exterior mirror position,
steering wheel position.
Both the positions saved via the seat mem‐
ory and the last position set are saved.
▷ Intelligent Safety.
▷ Night vision.
Profile management
Selecting a driver profile
Regardless of the remote control in use, a dif‐
ferent driver profile may be activated. This al‐
lows you to call up personal vehicle settings,
even if you did not unlock the vehicle with your
own remote control.
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
4. "OK"
▷ All settings stored in the called-up driver
profile are automatically applied.
▷ The called-up driver profile is assigned to
the remote control being used at the time.
▷ If the driver profile is already assigned to a
different remote control, this driver profile
will apply to both remote controls.
Guest profile
The guest profile is for individual settings that
are stored in none of the three personal driver
profiles.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Drive off (guest)"
4. "OK"
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not
assigned to the current remote control.
Renaming a driver profile
A personal name can be assigned to the active
driver profile to avoid confusion between the
driver profiles.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this sym‐
bol can be renamed.
4. "Change driver profile name"
Seite 75
Opening and closing Controls
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
5. Enter profile name.
6. Select the symbol.
Resetting a driver profile
The settings of the active driver profile are re‐
set to their factory settings.
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this sym‐
bol can be reset.
4. "Reset driver profile"
5. "OK"
Exporting driver profiles
Most settings of the active driver profile can be
exported.
Exporting is helpful when storing and retrieving
personal settings, for instance before deliver‐
ing the vehicle to a workshop. The stored
driver profiles can be taken into another vehi‐
cle.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this sym‐
bol can be exported.
4. "Export driver profile"
5. Select a storage device for exporting the
driver profile.
▷ "USB device"
Select USB storage device, as needed,
refer to page 47.
▷ Online
Via the BMW ConnectedDrive cus‐
tomer portal.
Importing driver profiles
The existing settings of the active driver profile
are overwritten with the settings of the im‐
ported driver profile.
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select the driver profile to be overwritten.
The driver profile marked with this sym‐
bol can be overwritten.
4. "Import driver profile"
5. Select a storage device for importing the
driver profile.
▷ USB storage device: "USB device"
Select USB storage device as needed.
▷ Online.
6. Select the driver profile to be imported.
System limits
A clear assignment between the remote con‐
trol and driver may not be possible in the fol‐
lowing cases, for example.
▷ The passenger unlocks the vehicle with his
or her own remote control, but another
person is driving.
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort
Access and has multiple remote controls
with him or her.
▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not
locked and unlocked.
▷ Multiple remote controls are located out‐
side of the vehicle.
Settings
General information
Depending on the equipment and country-
specific variant of your vehicle, different open‐
ing and closing settings are available.
Seite 76
Controls Opening and closing
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
These settings are stored for the driver profile,
refer to page 74, currently used.
Unlocking
Doors
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Driver's door" or "All doors"
5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door is unlocked.
Pressing again unlocks the entire vehi‐
cle.
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Tailgate
Depending on optional features and country
version, this setting is not offered in some
cases.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Tailgate" or "Tailgate and
door(s)"
5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Tailgate"
The tailgate is opened.
▷ "Tailgate and door(s)"
The tailgate is opened and the doors
are unlocked.
Adjusting the last seat, mirror, and
steering wheel position
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The setting can be made for the driver
profile marked with this symbol.
4. "Last seat position automatic"
When the vehicle is unlocked, the driver's seat
and exterior mirrors resume their last set posi‐
tions. When the drive-ready state is switched
on, the steering wheel is moved to its last set
position.
The most recent position is independent of the
positions saved via the seat memory.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐
mation signals.
▷ "Flash for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by two flashes,
locking by one.
▷ With alarm system:
"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by two honks of
the horn, locking by one.
Automatic locking
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Select desired setting:
▷ "Lock automatically"
Seite 77
Opening and closing Controls
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if no door is
opened after unlocking.
▷ "Lock after starting to drive"
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive off.
Automatic unlocking
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Unlock at end of trip"
After drive-ready state is switched off by
pressing the Start/Stop button, the locked
vehicle is automatically unlocked.
Folding mirrors automatically
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Fold mirrors in when locked"
Locking the vehicle folds in the exterior
mirrors automatically. Unlocking the vehi‐
cle automatically folds out the exterior mir‐
rors.
Establishing idle state after opening
the front doors
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Turn off after door opening"
Opening the front doors establishes the
idle state, refer to page 21.
Alarm system
General information
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system reacts to the following changes:
▷ Opening a door, the hood or the tailgate.
▷ Movements in the car's interior.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐
tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing
the vehicle.
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
▷ Improper use of the socket for OBD On‐
board Diagnosis.
The alarm system signals these changes visu‐
ally and acoustically:
▷ Acoustic alarm.
Depending on local regulations, the acous‐
tic alarm may be suppressed.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐
tem.
▷ By flashing the daytime running lights.
Switching on/off
When you unlock or lock the vehicle, either
with the remote control or with Comfort Ac‐
cess, the alarm system is switched on and off
at the same time.
Opening the doors with the alarm
system switched on
The alarm system is triggered when a door is
opened if the door was unlocked using the
integrated key in the door lock.
Switching off the alarm, refer to page 80.
Opening the tailgate with the alarm
system switched on
The tailgate can be opened even when the
alarm system is switched on.
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and
monitored again provided the doors are
Seite 78
Controls Opening and closing
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
locked. The hazard warning system flashes
once.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
▷ Press button on the remote con‐
trol and hold for at least 3 sec‐
onds.
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote con‐
trol three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Indicator light on the interior mirror
▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The alarm system is switched on.
▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 sec‐
onds, then it flashes briefly every 2 sec‐
onds:
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate
are not correctly closed. Correctly closed
access points are secured.
When the still open access points are
closed, interior motion sensor and tilt alarm
sensor will be switched on.
▷ The indicator light goes out after unlock‐
ing:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking
until drive-ready state is switched on, but
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehi‐
cle is towed.
Interior motion sensor
The windows and the glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor can trigger an alarm, although no unauthor‐
ized action occurred.
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehi‐
cles, at sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle.
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion
sensor can be switched off in such situations.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle
is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor are turned off until the vehicle is locked
again.
Seite 79
Opening and closing Controls
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote con‐
trol, if needed, through emergency detec‐
tion of the remote control, refer to page 63.
▷ With Comfort Access: if you are carrying
the remote control on your person, grasp
the driver side or front passenger side door
handle completely.
Power windows
Safety information
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of
injury or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
Overview
Power windows
Safety switch
Functional requirements
The windows can be operated under the fol‐
lowing conditions.
▷ Standby state is established.
▷ Drive-ready state is established.
▷ The remote control is in the car's interior.
Opening
▷ Press the switch to the resistance
point.
The window opens while the switch is be‐
ing held.
▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the motion.
Convenient opening via the remote control, re‐
fer to page 61.
Closing
▷ Pull the switch to the resistance
point.
The window closes while the switch is be‐
ing held.
▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window closes automatically if the
door is closed. Pulling again stops the mo‐
tion.
Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 69.
Jam protection system
General information
If closing force exceeds a specific threshold as
a window closes, closing is interrupted.
The window opens slightly.
Safety information
WARNING
Accessories on the windows such as an‐
tennas can impact jam protection. There is a
risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the
area of movement of the windows.◀
Seite 80
Controls Opening and closing
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Closing without the jam protection
system
In case of danger from the outside or if ice
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐
lows:
1.
Pull the switch past the resistance
point and hold it there.
The window closes with limited jam pro‐
tection . If the closing force exceeds a spe‐
cific threshold, closing is interrupted.
2.
Pull the switch past the resistance
point again within approx. 4 seconds and
hold it there.
The window closes without jam protec‐
tion .
Safety switch
Concept
With the safety switch, it is possible to block
particular functions in the rear. This makes
sense, for instance if children or animals are
carried in the rear.
General information
The following functions can be blocked using
the safety switch:
▷ Opening and closing of the rear windows
using the switches in the rear.
▷ Operation of the roller sunblind in the rear
window using the switches in the rear.
▷ Operation of the roller sunblinds in the side
windows using the switches in the rear.
▷ Adjustment of the power rear seats.
▷ Operation of the rear sliding visor using the
switches in the rear.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
safety function is switched off automatically.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED lights up if the safety func‐
tion is switched on.
Rear window roller sunblind
General information
The safety switch, refer to page 81, in the driv‐
er's door can be used to prevent children from
operating the roller sunblind using the
switches in the rear, for instance.
Overview
Driver's door
Button for the roller sunblind.
Rear doors
Button for the roller sunblind.
Seite 81
Opening and closing Controls
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Operation
Press the button to open the closed
roller sunblind or to close the open
roller sunblind.
If the button is pressed again during the move‐
ment, the roller sunblind is moved in the oppo‐
site direction.
Hold the button down to operate the roller sun‐
blinds on the rear window and on the side win‐
dows at the same time.
BMW Touch Command
The roller sunblind can also be operated using
BMW Touch Command.
System limits
If you are no longer able to move the roller sun‐
blind after having activated it consecutively a
number of times, the overheating protection
mechanism is active. The system is blocked
for a limited time to prevent overheating. Let
the system cool.
The roller sunblind cannot be moved at low in‐
terior temperatures.
Roller sunblinds, rear side
windows
General information
The safety switch, refer to page 81, in the driv‐
er's door can be used to prevent children, for
instance from operating the roller sunblinds
using the switches in the rear.
Overview
Buttons for the roller sunblinds.
Operation
Press the button to open the closed
roller sunblind or to close the open
roller sunblind.
If the button is pressed again during the move‐
ment, the roller sunblind is moved in the oppo‐
site direction.
BMW Touch Command
The roller sunblinds can also be operated us‐
ing BMW Touch Command.
System limits
If you are no longer able to move the roller sun‐
blinds after having activated them consecu‐
tively a number of times, the overheating pro‐
tection mechanism is active. The system is
blocked for a limited time to prevent overheat‐
ing. Let the system cool.
The roller sunblinds cannot be moved at low
interior temperatures.
Glass sunroof
General information
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be
operated together or separately using the
same switch.
Seite 82
Controls Opening and closing
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
The rear sliding visor is operated using sepa‐
rate buttons.
The glass sunroof is ready for operation when
standby state is switched on.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐
ing.◀
Overview
1 Open/close the glass sunroof/sliding visor.
Depending on the vehicle equipment:
open/close the glass sunroof/front sliding
visor.
2 Depending on the vehicle equipment:
close the rear sliding visor.
3 Depending on the vehicle equipment: open
the rear sliding visor.
Functional requirements
The windows can be operated under the fol‐
lowing conditions.
▷ Standby state is established.
▷ Drive-ready state is established.
▷ The remote control is in the car's interior.
Lifting/closing glass sunroof
Push switch briefly upward.
▷ The closed glass sunroof
tilts and the sliding visor
opens slightly.
▷ The opened glass sunroof
closes until it is in the tilted
position. The sliding visor
does not move.
▷ The tilted glass sunroof closes.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sliding visor separately
▷ Press the switch in the de‐
sired direction to the resist‐
ance point and hold it there.
The sliding visor opens
while the switch is being
held. If the sliding visor is al‐
ready fully open, the glass
sunroof opens.
The glass sunroof closes
while the switch is being
held. If the glass sunroof is
already closed or in the tilted
position, the sliding visor
closes.
▷ Press the switch in the desired direction
past the resistance point.
The sliding visor opens automatically. If the
sliding visor is already fully open, the glass
sunroof opens automatically.
The glass sunroof closes automatically. If
the glass sunroof is already closed or in the
tilted position, the sliding visor closes au‐
tomatically.
Pressing the switch upward stops the mo‐
tion.
Seite 83
Opening and closing Controls
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sliding visor together
Briefly press the switch twice in
succession in the desired direc‐
tion past the resistance point.
The glass sunroof and sliding vi‐
sor move together. Pressing the
switch upward stops the motion.
Convenient opening via the remote control, re‐
fer to page 61.
Closing by means of Comfort Access, refer to
page 69.
Comfort position
If the glass sunroof is not completely opened
automatically, the comfort position has been
attained. In this position the wind noises in the
interior are the least.
If desired, continue the movement by pressing
the switch.
With panoramic glass sunroof:
opening/closing the rear sliding visor
On the roofliner control panel
Press button to open the rear sliding
visor.
Press button again to stop the movement.
Press button to close the sliding visor.
Press button again to stop the move‐
ment.
On the control panel in the rear doors
The rear sliding visor cannot be used via the
buttons in the rear if the safety function, refer
to page 81, is switched on.
Press the button to open the closed
sliding visor or to close the open slid‐
ing visor.
Press button again to stop the movement.
When the button is pressed again, the sliding
visor will move in the opposite direction.
BMW Touch Command
The front and rear sliding visor can also be op‐
erated using BMW Touch Command.
Actions during unlocking/locking
If the vehicle is locked from the outside, the
rear sliding visor is automatically closed.
During unlocking, the sliding visor is automati‐
cally moved into the position, where it was
prior to locking.
Jam protection system
General information
If the closing force exceeds a certain value
when closing the glass sunroof, the closing op‐
eration is interrupted once the roof reaches the
half-open position, or it is stopped when clos‐
ing from the tilted position.
The glass sunroof opens slightly.
Closing from the open position
without jam protection
If there is an external danger, proceed as fol‐
lows:
1.
Push the switch forward past the resist‐
ance point and hold.
The glass sunroof closes with limited jam
protection . If the closing force exceeds a
specific threshold, closing is interrupted.
2. Push the switch forward again past the re‐
sistance point and hold until the glass sun‐
roof closes without jam protection . Make
sure that the closing area is clear.
Seite 84
Controls Opening and closing
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Closing from the raised position
without jam protection
If there is an external danger,
push the switch forward past the
resistance point and hold it.
The glass sunroof closes without jam protec‐
tion .
Initializing after a power interruption
General information
After a power failure during the opening or
closing process, the glass sunroof can only be
operated to a limited extent.
The system can be initialized under the follow‐
ing conditions.
▷ The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi‐
tion.
▷ The drive-ready state is established.
▷ The external temperature is above
41 ℉/5 ℃.
During initialization, the glass sunroof closes
without jam protection.
Make sure that the closing area is clear.
Initializing the system
Press the switch up and hold it
until the initialization is com‐
plete:
Initialization begins within
15 seconds and is completed
when the glass sunroof and sliding visor are
completely closed.
Seite 85
Opening and closing Controls
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Settings
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Sitting safely
An ideal seating position that meets the needs
of the occupants can make a vital contribution
to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
In the event of an accident, the correct seating
position plays an important role. Follow the in‐
formation in the following chapters:
▷ Seats, refer to page 86.
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 91.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 92.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 157.
Front seats
General information
The seat adjustment for the driver's seat is
stored for the driver profile currently used.
When the vehicle is unlocked via the remote
control, the position is automatically retrieved
if the function, refer to page 77, is activated for
this purpose.
The current seat position can be stored using
the memory function, refer to page 98.
Safety information
WARNING
Seat adjustments while driving can lead
to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle
control could be lost. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Only adjust the seat on the driver's side
when the vehicle is stationary.◀
WARNING
With a backrest inclined too far to the
rear, the efficacy of safety gear, including
safety belts can no longer be ensured. There is
a risk of sliding under the safety belt in an acci‐
dent. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Adjust the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust
the backrest so that it is in the most upright
position as possible and do not adjust again
while driving.◀
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
Overview
1 Thigh support
2 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
3 Upper backrest
4 Backrest width
Seite 86
Controls Settings
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
5 Lumbar support
6 Backrest tilt, head restraint
Thigh support
Push switch forward or backward.
Forward/backward
Push switch forward or backward.
Height
Push switch up or down.
Seat tilt
Move switch up or down.
Upper backrest
Concept
The upper backrest supports the back in the
shoulder area. A correct setting leads to a re‐
laxed seating position and reduces strain on
the shoulder muscles.
Settings
▷ Press the front section of the button:
The upper backrest is inclined forward.
▷ Press the rear section of the button:
The upper backrest is inclined backward.
Backrest width
General information
You can change the backrest width by adjust‐
ing the side wings of the backrest.
Seite 87
Settings Controls
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Settings
▷ Press the front section of
the button:
The backrest width de‐
creases.
▷ Press the rear section of the
button:
The backrest width in‐
creases.
Functional limitations
It may not be possible to adjust the backrest
width at very high and very low temperatures.
Lumbar support
Concept
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐
gion of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
Settings
▷ Press the front/rear section
of the button:
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the button:
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Functional limitations
It may not be possible to adjust the lumbar
support at very high and very low tempera‐
tures.
Backrest tilt
Move switch forward or backward.
Gentleman function
Concept
The front passenger seat can be adjusted with
the switches of the driver's seat, e.g., to in‐
crease the legroom in the rear.
Overview
Gentleman function
Switching on
1. Press button. The LED lights up.
2. Adjust the front passenger seat at the driv‐
er's seat.
If needed, store the memory position, refer
to page 98, for the front passenger seat.
Switching off
Press button and hold until LED goes
out.
Seite 88
Controls Settings
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
The function deactivates itself automatically
after some time.
BMW Touch Command
The front passenger seat can also be operated
using BMW Touch Command.
Rear seats
General information
The seat adjustment switches are located on
the center armrest of the rear seats.
If the safety switch, refer to page 81, is
pressed, the seats cannot be adjusted.
Safety information
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when folding
down the center armrest in the rear. There is a
risk of injury. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the center armrest is clear during fold‐
ing down.◀
Overview
1 Resetting to standard position
2 Head restraint, upper backrest
3 Lumbar support
4 Folding the footrest out/in
5 Forward/backward, seat tilt
6 Backrest tilt
7 Adjust front passenger seat
Resetting to standard position
Press button to reset to standard po‐
sition.
The process is canceled if the button is
pressed again.
Upper backrest
Concept
The upper backrest supports the back in the
shoulder area. A correct setting leads to a re‐
laxed seating position and reduces strain on
the shoulder muscles.
Settings
Push switch forward or backward.
Lumbar support
Concept
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐
gion of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
Seite 89
Settings Controls
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Settings
▷ Press the front/rear section
of the button:
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the button:
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Folding the footrest out/in
General information
The distance between the front passenger
seat and the rear seat must be sufficiently
large to unfold the footrest on the backrest of
the front passenger seat.
Settings
Press the upper or lower section
of the button.
Forward/backward
Push switch forward or backward.
Seat tilt
Move switch up or down.
Backrest tilt
Move switch forward or backward.
Adjusting the front passenger seat
from the rear
Concept
The front passenger seat can be operated
from the rear, e.g., to increase the legroom in
the rear.
General information
The switch for adjusting the upper backrest,
refer to page 89, can be used to set the angle
of the screen in the rear on the passenger side.
Seite 90
Controls Settings
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Settings
1.
Press button.
2. Adjust the passenger seat, e.g., forward/
back.
3.
Press the button to deactivate the
function.
The function deactivates itself automatically
after some time.
BMW Touch Command
The rear seats can also be operated via BMW
Touch Command.
Safety belts
Number of safety belts and safety belt
buckles
The vehicle is fitted with four or five safety
belts to ensure occupants' safety. However,
they can only offer protection when adjusted
correctly.
The two outer safety belt buckles of the rear
seats are intended for the persons sitting on
the left and right.
The center safety belt buckle of the rear seats
is intended for the person sitting in the middle.
General information
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by the occupants before driving off. The
airbags supplement the safety belts as an ad‐
ditional safety device. The airbags are not a
substitute for safety belts.
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point
will be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐
ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
Safety information
WARNING
If the safety belt is used to buckle more
than one person, the efficacy of safety gear, in‐
cluding safety belts can no longer be ensured.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do
not allow more than one person to wear a sin‐
gle safety belt. Infants and children are not al‐
lowed on an occupant's lap, but must be trans‐
ported and secured in designated child
restraint systems.◀
WARNING
The efficacy of safety gear, including
safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly
fastened safety belt can cause additional inju‐
ries, for instance in the event of an accident or
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There
is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure
that all occupants are wearing safety belts cor‐
rectly.◀
WARNING
The protective effect of the safety belts
may not be fully functional or fail in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ The safety belts or safety belt buckles are
damaged, soiled, or changed in any other
way.
▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were
modified.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
the event of an accident. There is a risk of inju‐
ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety
belts, safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt
retractors or belt anchors and keep them
clean. Have the safety belts checked after an
Seite 91
Settings Controls
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
accident at the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.◀
Correct use of safety belts
▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to
your body over your lap and shoulders.
▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips
over your lap. The safety belt may not
press on your stomach.
▷ Do not rub the safety belt against sharp
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or
fragile objects.
▷ Avoid thick clothing.
▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up‐
ward around your upper body.
Buckling the safety belt
1.
Slowly guide the safety belt out of the
holder when fastening it.
2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt
buckle. The safety belt buckle must en‐
gage audibly.
When the safety belt is fastened, the driver's
and passenger's belt straps are automatically
tightened once after driving away.
Unbuckling the safety belt
1.
Hold the safety belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the safety belt
buckle.
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up
mechanism.
Rear belt guide
When fastening the safety belts on the rear
seats, make sure that the belt guide loop is
closed.
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat
and front passenger seat
Display
The indicator light lights up and a sig‐
nal sounds. Make sure that the safety
belts are positioned correctly. The
safety belt reminder can also be activated if
objects are placed on the front passenger seat.
Safety mode
In critical situations, for instance during an
emergency stop, the front safety belts tighten
automatically.
If the situation passes without an accident oc‐
curring, the belt tension relaxes.
If the belt tension does not loosen automati‐
cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the safety
belt using the red button in the safety belt
buckle. Fasten the safety belt before continu‐
ing on your trip.
Front head restraints
General information
The current head restraint position can be
stored using the memory function, refer to
page 98.
Seite 92
Controls Settings
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Safety information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a risk of injury.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head re‐
straints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
ports the back of the head at as close to
eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back of
the head. If necessary, adjust the distance
by adjusting the tilt of the backrest.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear
when moving the head restraint.◀
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.◀
Active head restraint
In the event of a rear-end collision with a cer‐
tain severity, the active head restraint automat‐
ically reduces the distance from the head.
Have the active head restraint checked and if
necessary replaced in the case of damage or if
it was exposed to an accident.
Adjusting the height
Push switch up or down.
If the vehicle is equipped with Executive
Lounge Seating: the height of the head re‐
straint on the front passenger side cannot be
adjusted.
Adjusting the distance: manual head
restraints
▷ Back: press the button and push the head
restraint toward the rear.
▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the
front.
Adjusting the distance: electrical head
restraints
The head restraint is automatically reposi‐
tioned when the upper backrest is adjusted.
Seite 93
Settings Controls
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Adjusting the side extensions
Fold the side extensions on the head restraint
forward for increased lateral support in the
resting position.
Removing
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Rear head restraints
Safety information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a risk of injury.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head re‐
straints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
ports the back of the head at as close to
eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back of
the head. If necessary, adjust the distance
by adjusting the tilt of the backrest.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear
when moving the head restraint.◀
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.◀
Folding down the middle head
restraint
To improve the view to the rear, the center
head restraint can be folded to the rear. Only
push the head restraint down if no one will be
sitting in the center seat.
▷ To the rear: press the button, arrow 1, and
fold the head restraint backward.
▷ To the front: fold head restraint forward un‐
til the head restraint engages.
Seite 94
Controls Settings
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Adjusting the height: manual head
restraints
The height of the outer head restraints can be
adjusted.
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
Adjusting the height: electrical head
restraints
General information
The height adjustment of the head restraint is
deactivated when the safety switch for the rear
windows, refer to page 81, has been pressed.
Switches in the vehicle
Push the switch in the center armrest up or
down.
Adjusting the side extensions
Fold the side extensions on the head restraint
forward for increased lateral support in the
resting position.
Cushions for the head restraints in the
rear
Only use the pillow when the vehicle is
switched off.
1.
Pull the upper tab through the loop on the
top of the head restraint.
2. Close both pushbuttons.
Seite 95
Settings Controls
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
3. The head restraint folds into the topmost
position.
4. Close the pushbutton on the lower tab and
the pushbutton on the bottom of the head
restraint.
Removing
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the front passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror.
The mirror setting is stored for the driver pro‐
file currently in use. When the vehicle is un‐
locked via the remote control, the position is
automatically retrieved if the function, refer to
page 77, is activated for this purpose.
The current exterior mirror position can be
stored using the memory function, refer to
page 98.
Safety information
WARNING
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. The distance to the traffic
behind could be incorrectly estimated, for in‐
stance while changing lanes. There is a risk of
an accident. Estimate the distance to the traffic
behind by looking over your shoulder.◀
Overview
1 Settings
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out
Adjusting electrically
Press button.
The selected mirror moves along with
the button movement.
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the switch.
Malfunction
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the
mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror
glass.
Folding in and out
NOTE
Depending on the vehicle width, the ve‐
hicle can be damaged in vehicle washes. There
is a risk of property damage. Before washing,
fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.◀
Press button.
Folding is only possible up to a speed of ap‐
prox. 15 mph/20 km/h.
Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the
following situations:
Seite 96
Controls Settings
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
▷ In vehicle washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever drive-ready state is switched on.
Automatic dimming feature
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐
matically dimmed. Photocells in the car's inte‐
rior mirror, refer to page 97, are used to con‐
trol this.
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior
mirror
Concept
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the front passenger side is tilted downward.
This improves your view of the curb and other
low-lying obstacles when parking, for instance.
Activating
1. Slide the switch to the driver's side
mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger's
side mirror position.
Interior mirror
General information
The interior mirror is dimmed automatically.
Photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Overview
Functional requirements
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
Rear vanity mirror
Folding down
Press the vanity mirror.
The vanity mirror folds down. The angle can be
adjusted by hand.
Folding up
Press the vanity mirror up.
Steering wheel
Safety information
WARNING
Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move‐
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a
Seite 97
Settings Controls
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
risk of an accident. Adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is stationary only.◀
Electric steering wheel adjustment
General information
The steering wheel setting is stored for the
driver profile currently in use. When the drive-
ready state is switched on, the position is auto‐
matically retrieved if the function, refer to
page 77, is activated for this purpose.
The current steering wheel position can be
stored using the memory function, refer to
page 98.
Settings
Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating position
by pressing the switch.
Assistance getting in and out
The steering wheel temporarily moves into the
highest position to make it easier to enter and
exit the vehicle.
Heated steering wheel
Overview
Heated steering wheel
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is lit when the heated steer‐
ing wheel is switched on.
If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes
after an intermediate stop, the heated steering
wheel activates automatically if the function
was switched on at the end of the last trip.
Memory function
Concept
The following settings can be stored and, if
necessary, retrieved using the memory func‐
tion:
▷ Seat position.
▷ Exterior mirror position.
▷ Steering wheel position.
▷ Height of the Head-up Display.
General information
Two memory locations with different settings
can be set for each driver profile, refer to
page 74.
The following settings are not stored:
Seite 98
Controls Settings
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
▷ Backrest width.
▷ Lumbar support.
▷ Footrest.
Safety information
WARNING
Using the memory function while driving
can lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.
There is a risk of an accident. Only retrieve the
memory function when the vehicle is station‐
ary.◀
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
Overview
Front
The memory buttons are located on the front
doors.
Rear
The memory buttons are located on the rear
doors.
Storing
1.
Set the desired position.
2.
Press button. The writing on the
button lights up.
3. Press desired button 1 or 2 while the LED
is lit. A signal sounds.
Calling up settings
The stored position is called up automatically.
Press selected button 1 or 2.
The procedure stops when a switch for setting
the seat is pressed or one of the memory but‐
tons is pressed again.
While driving, the seat position adjustment on
the driver's side is interrupted after a short
time.
BMW Touch Command
The memory function can also be operated on
the front passenger seat and in the rear via
BMW Touch Command.
Massage function
Concept
Depending on the program, the massage func‐
tion ensures relaxed muscles and better blood
circulation and can avoid fatigue.
Seite 99
Settings Controls
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
General information
Eight different massage programs can be se‐
lected:
▷ Pelvis activation.
▷ Upper body activation.
▷ Full body activation.
▷ Back massage.
▷ Shoulder massage.
▷ Lumbar massage.
▷ Upper body training.
▷ Full body training.
Overview
Front
Massage function
Rear
Massage function
Switching on
Press button once for each intensity
level.
The maximum intensity level is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
Switching off
Press and hold the button, until the
LEDs go out.
Adjusting the massage program
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Seat comfort"
4. Select desired seat.
5. "Seat massage"
6. Select the desired setting.
BMW Touch Command
Operation of the massage function is also pos‐
sible via BMW Touch Command.
Executive Lounge Seating
Concept
The Executive Lounge Seating function offers
maximum legroom and increased traveling
comfort to the rear passenger on the passeng‐
er's side.
General information
The following settings are applied automati‐
cally on system activation:
▷ The front passenger seat moves forward
and adjusts the height, if necessary.
▷ Backrest and head restraint of the front
passenger seat are inclined forward.
Seite 100
Controls Settings
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
▷ The tilt of the screen in the rear is adjusted
to the backrest incline of the front passen‐
ger seat.
▷ The footrest on the backrest of the front
passenger seat folds out.
▷ The backrest of the rear seat inclines to the
rear.
The adjusted end position can be manually ad‐
justed, refer to page 89, and if required stored
using the memory function, refer to page 98.
Safety information
WARNING
If Executive Lounge Seating is activated,
the view on the exterior mirror on the front pas‐
senger side can be obstructed. There is a risk
of an accident. Adjust the front passenger seat
such that the view on the exterior mirror is not
obstructed.◀
Overview
Executive Lounge Seating
Switching on
Press button.
Resetting to standard position
Press button to reset to standard po‐
sition.
The process is canceled if the button is
pressed again.
Vitality program
Concept
Different muscles can be trained using the vi‐
tality program in the rear. Active movements
help in preventing signs of fatigue.
General information
A calibration sequence is performed after each
start of the vitality program. Here, the intensity
of the exercises is set individually.
Videos on the respective screens in the rear
show which motions should be executed. A
display provides information about the remain‐
ing duration of each exercise.
Color bars indicate, whether an exercise is exe‐
cuted correctly:
▷ Green: exercise is performed correctly.
▷ Gray: the pressure is too weak.
▷ Red: the pressure is too strong.
The goal of the exercises is to keep the bar
display in the green area as long as possible.
Every exercise is evaluated by awarding stars.
Seite 101
Settings Controls
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Switching on
On the screens in the rear:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Seat comfort"
4. "BMW Vitality Program"
Switching off
On the screens in the rear:
1. Press left arrow button on the remote con‐
trol in the rear.
2. "Stop"
BMW Touch Command
The vitality program can also be operated us‐
ing BMW Touch Command.
Seat and armrest heating
General information
The system heats seats and armrests as
needed. Seat heating can also be used without
armrest heating.
Overview
Front
Seat and armrest heating
Rear
Seat and armrest heating
Switching on
Press button once for each tempera‐
ture level.
Highest level if three bars are shown on the cli‐
mate control display.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes after a stop, seat and armrest heating is
activated automatically with the temperature
selected last.
When ECO PRO, refer to page 270, is acti‐
vated, the heater output is reduced.
Switching off
Press button and hold until bar display
on the climate control display goes
out.
Seat heating distribution
The heating action in the seat cushion and the
seat backrest can be distributed in different
ways.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Seat and armrest heating"
Seite 102
Controls Settings
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
5. Select the desired seat, if needed.
6. Press the Controller and turn it to set the
seat heating distribution.
Switching armrest heating on/off
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Seat and armrest heating"
5. Select desired seat.
6. "Heat armrests together with seat"
Active seat ventilation
Concept
The seat cushion and backrest surfaces are
cooled by means of integrated fans.
The ventilation cools the seat, e.g., if the vehi‐
cle interior is overheated or for continuous
cooling at high temperatures.
Overview
Front
Active seat ventilation
Rear
Active seat ventilation
Switching on
Press button once for each ventilation
level.
Highest level if three bars are shown on the cli‐
mate control display.
The ventilation switches back by one level af‐
ter a short time.
Switching off
Press button and hold until bar display
on the climate control display goes
out.
Seite 103
Settings Controls
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
The right place for children
Safety information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Always transport children in the rear
seat
General information
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the rear seat.
Transport children younger than 13 years of
age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the rear
seat in suitable child restraint systems de‐
signed for the age, weight and size of the child.
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
system can no longer be used due to their age,
weight and size.
Safety information
WARNING
The safety belt cannot be fastened cor‐
rectly on children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm
without suitable additional child restraint sys‐
tems. The efficacy of safety gear, including
safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly
fastened safety belt can cause additional inju‐
ries, for instance in the event of an accident or
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There
is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Secure chil‐
dren shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable
child restraint systems.◀
Children on the front passenger seat
General information
Before using a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, ensure that the front,
knee, and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated. Automatic deactivation of
front-seat passenger airbags, refer to
page 159.
Safety information
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
injure a child in a child restraint system when
the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
Seite 104
Controls Transporting children safely
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Installing child restraint
systems
General information
Pay attention to the information, operating and
safety information of the child restraint system
manufacturer when selecting, installing and
using child restraint systems.
Safety information
WARNING
The protective effect of damaged child
restraint systems or of child restraint systems
exposed to an accident and their fastening
systems can be limited or lost. A child can
e.g.,not sufficiently restrained, for instance in
the event of an accident or braking and evasive
maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger
to life. Have damaged child restraint systems
or of child restraint systems exposed to an ac‐
cident and their fastening systems checked
and possibly replaced by the dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
injure a child in a child restraint system when
the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
After installing a child restraint system in the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags
automatically, refer to page 159.
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go and, if possible, bring it up to medium
height. This seat position and height ensures
the best possible position for the belt and of‐
fers optimal protection in the event of an acci‐
dent.
If the upper anchor of the safety belt is located
in front of the belt guide of the child seat, move
the front passenger seat carefully forward until
the best possible belt guide position is
reached.
Backrest width
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
child restraint system in the front passenger
seat, open the backrest width completely. Do
not change the backrest width again and do
not call up a memory position.
Seite 105
Transporting children safely Controls
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Child seat security
The safety belts in the rear and the front pas‐
senger safety belt can be permanently locked
to fasten child restraint systems.
Locking the safety belt
1.
Pull out the belt strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
safety belt.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull
it tight against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1.
Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
General information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐
dren.
Pay attention to the information, operating and
safety information of the child restraint system
manufacturer when selecting, installing and
using LATCH child restraint fixing systems.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
General information
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child
is restrained by the internal harnesses.
Safety information
WARNING
If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐
tems are not correctly engaged, the protective
effect of the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐
tem can be limited. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that the lower an‐
chors are securely engaged and that the
LATCH child restraint fixing system fits se‐
curely against the backrest.◀
Position
Symbol Meaning
The corresponding symbol
shows the mounts for the
lower LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower an‐
chors are marked with a pair,
2, of LATCH symbols.
For vehicles equipped with a
middle seat:
It is not recommended to use
the inner lower anchors of
standard outer LATCH posi‐
tions to fasten a child restraint
system on the middle seat.
Use the vehicle safety belt in‐
stead for the middle seat.
Before installing LATCH child
restraint fixing systems
Pull the safety belt away from the area of the
child restraint system.
Seite 106
Controls Transporting children safely
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Without comfort rear seats: assembly
of LATCH child restraint fixing
systems
1. Install child restraint system, see manufac‐
turer's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
With comfort rear seats: assembly of
LATCH child restraint fixing systems
1. Before mounting, adjust the seats to their
basic position, refer to page 89.
2. For better accessibility, tilt the backrest
back slightly.
3. Install child restraint system, see manufac‐
turer's information.
4. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
5. After mounting, move the backrest back up
slightly so that the child restraint system
rests lightly against the backrest.
Child restraint systems with tether
strap
Safety information
WARNING
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly
used for the child restraint system, the protec‐
tive effect can be reduced. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the upper retaining strap is
not guided across sharp edges and without
twisting to the upper retaining strap.◀
WARNING
If the rear backrest is not locked, the pro‐
tective effect of the child restraint system is
limited or there is none. In particular situations,
for instance braking maneuvers or in case of an
accident, the rear backrest can fold forward.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make
sure that the rear backrests are locked.◀
NOTE
The mounting points for the upper re‐
taining straps of child restraint systems are
only provided for these retaining straps. When
other objects are mounted, the anchors can be
damaged. There is a risk of property damage.
Only mount child restraint systems to the up‐
per retaining straps.◀
Anchors
The respective symbol shows the an‐
chor for the upper retaining strap.
Seats with an upper top tether are
marked with this symbol. It can be found on
the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf.
Routing the retaining strap
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Anchor
5 Rear window shelf
6 Seat backrest
7 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the anchor
1.
Open the anchor cover.
2. Raise the head restraint.
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the supports of the head restraint.
Seite 107
Transporting children safely Controls
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Guide it over the head restraint of the mid‐
dle seat.
4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
the anchor.
5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down.
6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.
Locking the doors and
windows in the rear
General information
In certain situations it may be advisable to se‐
cure the rear doors and windows, for instance
when transporting children.
Doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.
The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for the rear
Press button on the driver's door.
This locks various functions so that they can‐
not be operated from the rear. Safety switch,
refer to page 81.
Seite 108
Controls Transporting children safely
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Start/Stop button
Concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches drive-ready state on or
off, refer to page 21.
Drive-ready state is switched on
when you depress the brake
pedal while pressing the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches
drive-ready state back off and standby state,
refer to page 21, is switched back on.
Drive-ready state cannot be switched on, as
long as the charging cable is connected, refer
to page 278.
Drive-ready state
Concept
The following are the different drive-ready
state variants:
▷ Electric drive-ready state, refer to
page 110.
The vehicle is powered by the electric mo‐
tor.
▷ Starting the combustion engine, refer to
page 110.
The vehicle is powered by the combustion
engine.
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain pollutants which are colorless and odor‐
less. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and
ensure sufficient ventilation.◀
WARNING
When driving in electric mode, pedes‐
trians and other traffic might pay less attention
to the vehicle due to the lack of engine noise.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
Seite 109
Driving Controls
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Switching on drive-ready state
1.
Close the driver's door.
2. Depress brake pedal.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the
instrument cluster illuminate for a varied
length of time depending on the duration
of the system check.
Depending on the prerequisite, the electric
drive-ready state or a combustion engine start
is possible.
Electric drive-ready state
General information
The vehicle is ready for driving without starting
the combustion engine.
Functional requirements
The electric drive-ready state is possible, if the
prerequisites for electric driving, refer to
page 112, are fulfilled.
Display in the instrument cluster
When the drive-ready state is
switched on, READY is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Starting the combustion engine
Functional requirements
The combustion engine is started under the
following conditions when the drive-ready
state is switched on, refer to page 110:
▷ The temperature of the hybrid system is
too high or too low.
▷ The high-voltage battery has an insuffi‐
cient charge.
Driving away
1.
Switch on drive-ready state.
2. Engage selector lever position D, M/S or R.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Drive away.
Switching off drive-ready state
After stopping the vehicle:
1.
Engage selector lever position P.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
3. Set the parking brake.
After parking the vehicle, you may hear noises
due to operation of the hybrid system, such as
for cooling of the high-voltage battery.
Auto Start/Stop function
Concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the combustion en‐
gine when conditions for electric driving have
been met. The standby state remains on.
Seite 110
Controls Driving
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
General information
READY is displayed in the instrument cluster. If
necessary, the combustion engine starts auto‐
matically.
The combustion engine is also stopped during
the trip when rolling without acceleration or
braking. This driving condition, in which the ve‐
hicle is traveling without power and energy re‐
covery is not active, is referred to as coasting,
refer to page 113.
The combustion engine is not switched off au‐
tomatically in the following situations:
▷ The combustion engine is not at operating
temperature.
▷ The transmission selector lever is in posi‐
tion M/S.
▷ High-voltage battery is heavily discharged
or vehicle electrical system is heavily bur‐
dened.
▷ High stress of the automatic climate con‐
trol in the heating or cooling phase.
▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked.
▷ The vehicle is being optimized for the cur‐
rent driving style, e.g., during the break-in
period or after a service appointment.
▷ The hybrid system is malfunctioning.
Safety mode
An automatically stopped combustion engine
does not start independently:
▷ With the driver's door open, if neither the
brake pedal nor the accelerator pedal is de‐
pressed, and the driver's safety belt is not
fastened.
▷ When the hood is unlocked.
The indicator lights come on. The combustion
engine can only be started via the Start/Stop
button.
Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle
can be switched off permanently, for instance
when leaving it.
1. Press the Start/Stop button.
▷ The standby state is activated.
▷ The Auto Start/Stop function is deacti‐
vated.
▷ Selector lever position P is engaged
automatically.
2. Set the parking brake.
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer
switches off the combustion engine automati‐
cally in the event of a malfunction. A message
is displayed. It is possible to continue driving.
Have the system checked.
Electric driving: ePOWER
General information
While driving electrically with ePOWER, the ve‐
hicle is powered by the electric motor. The
system runs automatically.
Depending on the charge state of the high-
voltage battery, maximum speed, the vehicle's
capacity to accelerate, and range can vary.
For electrical driving, certain conditions, refer
to page 112, must be satisfied.
Displays of the hybrid system, refer to
page 131.
Safety information
WARNING
When driving in electric mode, pedes‐
trians and other traffic might pay less attention
to the vehicle due to the lack of engine noise.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
Seite 111
Driving Controls
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
Functional requirements
▷ State of charge and temperature of the
high-voltage battery is sufficient.
▷ Selector lever position D or R engaged.
▷ The accelerator pedal is only slightly de‐
pressed.
▷ The possible maximum speed for electric
driving is not exceeded.
▷ COMFORT or ECO PRO driving mode is
selected.
eDRIVE button
General information
Using the eDRIVE button, the characteristics
of the hybrid system can be adjusted.
The different hybrid modes can be manually
activated in the following sequence:
▷ Auto eDRIVE, refer to page 112
▷ MAX eDrive, refer to page 112
▷ BATTERY CONTROL, refer to page 113
Different system-related maximum speeds ap‐
ply to the different settings. The respectively
possible speed range is indicated by a blue
marking in the speedometer.
Overview
eDRIVE button
Auto eDRIVE
General information
Auto eDRIVE is activated by default when the
vehicle is started via the Start/Stop button.
In Auto eDRIVE, the vehicle is driven in hybrid
mode corresponding to the various driving sit‐
uations, i.e. the drive combines combustion
engine and electric motor. The respectively
most effective drive type is preferred.
The symbol is displayed while
driving electrically in
AUTO eDRIVE.
MAX eDRIVE
General information
The vehicle is driven exclusively
electrically.
If necessary, the maximum speed that applies
to MAX eDRIVE may be deliberately exceeded
with the aid of kickdown, refer to page 124.
The combustion engine is automatically
started and the system switches to AUTO
eDRIVE mode. Automatic starting of the en‐
gine while driving, refer to page 114.
Activating MAX eDRIVE
Press button repeatedly until MAX
eDRIVE is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
When pressing the button, the current eDRIVE
setting is graphically displayed on the Control
Display.
Seite 112
Controls Driving
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
BATTERY CONTROL
General information
A certain charge state of the
high-voltage battery can be
maintained with BATTERY
CONTROL. This charge state
can be adjusted. The electric
range can be conserved in this way for a later
point in the trip, for instance.
If the current charge state is too low, the bat‐
tery is charged during the trip. This charging
process increases the average fuel consump‐
tion.
Activating BATTERY CONTROL
Press the button repeatedly until
BATTERY CONTROL is displayed in
the instrument cluster.
The BATTERY CONTROL sym‐
bol is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
When pressing the button, the current eDRIVE
setting is graphically displayed on the Control
Display.
Adjusting the charge state
The charge state can be set in various ways.
Using the eDRIVE button:
1.
Press the eDRIVE button repeatedly until
BATTERY CONTROL is displayed in the
instrument cluster and on the Control Dis‐
play.
2. Select "Set target value" on the Control
Display.
3. "Target value:": set the desired value.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "BATTERY CONTROL"
4. "Target value:"
5. Set the desired value.
The charge state to be conserved is displayed
as a percentage value on the Control Display.
A marking is set in the instrument cluster for
the adjusted value in the charge state indicator
of the high-voltage battery, refer to page 131.
Auto Start/Stop function, coasting
Concept
The combustion engine is automatically stop‐
ped and disengaged from the drivetrain. This
driving condition of rolling is referred to as
coasting.
After coasting, the combustion engine or elec‐
tric motor provides the necessary drive power
automatically again, depending on the hybrid
mode.
Functional requirements
Coasting is possible under the following condi‐
tions:
▷ The high-voltage battery is sufficiently
charged.
▷ Transmission position D is engaged.
▷ The drive system is at operating tempera‐
ture.
▷ In ECO PRO: mode, when coasting, with‐
out operating the brake, at speeds below
100 mph, approx. 160 km/h.
Acoustic pedestrian protection
Concept
Depending on the country-specific version, the
system generates a continuous driving noise
at standstill with the drive-ready state acti‐
vated and during electric driving up to approx.
20 mph/30 km/h.
A speaker system broadcasts the noise to the
surroundings.
Seite 113
Driving Controls
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
As a result, other traffic participants, e.g., pe‐
destrians or cyclists, can better perceive the
vehicle.
Driving with the combustion
engine: POWER
Concept
The combustion engine provides the main
drive power to move the vehicle. If necessary,
the high-voltage battery is charged at the
same time.
Functional requirements
Automatic starting while driving
The combustion engine is automatically
started under the following conditions while
driving:
▷ During intense accelerations or on uphill
grades.
▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal beyond
the resistance point at the full throttle posi‐
tion, kickdown.
▷ The high-voltage battery has an insuffi‐
cient charge.
▷ Selector lever position M/S is engaged.
▷ Adapting to the course of the road when
destination guidance is activated.
▷ System-related requirement for hybrid
components.
Automatic switching off while driving
When reducing speed, the combustion engine
is switched off when the conditions for electric
driving, refer to page 112, are met.
Assistance from the electric
motor
Concept
The combustion engine provides the main
drive power to move the vehicle.
The electric motor provides assistance as
needed with additional propulsive power.
eASSIST
During normal vehicle operation, the electric
motor assists the combustion engine, depend‐
ing on the situation.
eBOOST
Accelerating quickly, such as when passing,
requires the maximum available power from
the electric motor. To do this, apply extra force
to the accelerator pedal.
Energy recovery: CHARGE
Concept
The hybrid system makes it possible to con‐
vert kinetic energy into electrical power when
braking and coasting. This recovered energy
charges the high-voltage battery. If necessary,
this stored electrical energy is output to the
electric motor.
General information
Depending on the settings of the Driving Dy‐
namics Control, refer to page 126, the high-
voltage battery is charged at different speeds
and the vehicle decelerated differently while
coasting.
Functional requirements
The following conditions must be met to re‐
cover kinetic energy:
▷ The vehicle is moving.
▷ Selector lever position D, M/S is set.
Seite 114
Controls Driving
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
▷ The high-voltage battery is not fully
charged.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Energy recovery displays in the instrument
cluster, refer to page 132.
Parking brake
Concept
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi‐
cle from rolling when it is parked.
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Overview
Parking brake
Setting
With a stationary vehicle
Pull the switch.
The LED lights up.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster illuminates red. The parking
brake is set.
While driving
To use as emergency brake while driving:
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes
hard while the switch is being pulled.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster illuminates red, a signal sounds,
and the brake lights illuminate.
A Check Control message is displayed.
If the vehicle is slowed down to a speed of ap‐
prox. 2 mph/3 km/h the parking brake is set.
Seite 115
Driving Controls
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Releasing
Releasing manually
1. Switch on drive-ready state.
2.
Press the switch while stepping on
the brake pedal or selector lever position P
is set.
The LED and indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released.
Automatic release
The parking brake is released automatically
when you drive away.
The LED and indicator light go out.
Automatic Hold
Concept
This system assists the driver by automatically
setting and releasing the brake, such as when
moving in stop-and-go traffic.
The vehicle is automatically held in place when
it is stationary.
On inclines, the system prevents the vehicle
from rolling backward when driving off.
General information
Under the following conditions, the parking
brake is automatically engaged:
▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.
▷ The driver's door is opened while the vehi‐
cle is stationary.
▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a stand‐
still using the parking brake.
Display
The indicator light changes from green
to red.
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
NOTE
If the vehicle is stationary, Automatic
Hold engages the parking brake. It prevents
the vehicle from rolling in a vehicle wash.
There is a risk of property damage. Deactivate
Automatic Hold prior to entering the vehicle
wash.◀
Seite 116
Controls Driving
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Overview
Automatic Hold
Establishing function readiness of
Automatic Hold
1.
Switch on drive-ready state.
2.
Press button.
The LED lights up.
The indicator light lights up green.
Automatic Hold is functional.
After every new vehicle start, the last
selected setting is active.
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle
Function readiness is established and the driv‐
er's door is closed.
After stepping on the brake pedal, e.g., when
stopping at a traffic light, the vehicle is auto‐
matically secured against rolling.
The indicator lamp lights up green.
Driving away
Step on the accelerator pedal to drive off.
The brake is released automatically and the in‐
dicator light is no longer illuminated.
Activating the parking brake
automatically
The parking brake is automatically set if drive-
ready state is switched off while the vehicle is
being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle
is exited.
The indicator light changes from green
to red.
The parking brake is not set automatically, if
the drive-ready state is switched off, while the
vehicle is coasting to a halt. Automatic Hold is
deactivated.
Switching function readiness off
Press button.
The LED goes out.
The indicator lamp goes out.
Automatic Hold is switched off.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
press additionally on the brake pedal, when
switching off.
Malfunction
In the event of a failure or malfunction of the
parking brake:
Secure the vehicle against rolling away, e.g.,
with a wheel chock, after existing the vehicle.
After a power failure
To reestablish parking brake functionality after
a power failure:
1.
Switch on standby state.
2.
Pull the switch while stepping on the
brake pedal or selector lever position P is
set and then push.
This process may take a few seconds. Any
sounds associated with this are normal.
Seite 117
Driving Controls
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
The indicator light is no longer illumi‐
nated as soon as the parking brake is
ready for operation again.
Turn signal, high beams,
headlight flasher
Turn signal
Turn signal in exterior mirror
When driving and during operation of the turn
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold
in the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights
on the exterior mirror are easy to see.
Using turn signals
Press the lever past the resistance point.
Triple turn signal activation
Lightly tap the lever up or down.
The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "One-touch turn signal"
6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
High beams, headlight flasher
Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Washer/wiper system
General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry,
as this may damage the wiper blades or cause
them to become worn more quickly.
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is
a risk of injury or risk of property damage.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.◀
NOTE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor can overheat when switching on. There
Seite 118
Controls Driving
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the
windshield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
Switching on
Press the lever up until the desired position is
reached.
▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0.
▷ Rain sensor, position 1.
▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2.
▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3.
When travel is interrupted with the wiper sys‐
tem switched on: when travel continues, the
wipers resume at their previous speed.
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the lever down.
▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it
reaches its standard position.
▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the
standard position.
The lever automatically returns to its initial
position when released.
Rain sensor
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, di‐
rectly in front of the interior mirror.
Safety information
NOTE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in vehicle
washes. There is a risk of property damage.
Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.◀
Activating/deactivating
Press the lever up once from its standard posi‐
tion, arrow 1.
Wiping is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
Seite 119
Driving Controls
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the sensitivity
of the rain sensor.
Upward: high rain sensor sensitivity.
Downward: low rains sensor sensitivity.
Windshield and headlight
washer system
Safety information
WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win‐
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
view. There is a risk of an accident. Only use
the washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot
freeze. Use antifreeze, if needed.◀
NOTE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
the wash pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not use
the washer system when the washer fluid res‐
ervoir is empty.◀
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
In addition, the headlights are cleaned at regu‐
lar intervals when the vehicle's lights are
switched on.
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐
cally heated while standby state is switched
on.
Fold-away position of the wipers
Concept
The wipers can be folded away from the wind‐
shield in the fold-away position.
General information
Important, e.g., when changing the wiper
blades or when folding out under frosty condi‐
tions.
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is
a risk of injury or risk of property damage.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.◀
Seite 120
Controls Driving
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
NOTE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor can overheat when switching on. There
is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the
windshield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
Folding away the wipers
1. Switch on standby state.
2. Press and hold the wiper level down, until
the wipers stop in a close to vertical posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the
windshield.
Folding down the wipers
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
1.
Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐
shield.
2. Switch on standby state and press and
hold the wiper lever down again.
3. Wipers return to their resting position and
are ready again for operation.
Washer fluid
General information
All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐
ervoir.
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield
washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield
washer concentrate containing antifreeze can
be used.
Recommended minimum fill quantity:
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Safety information
WARNING
Some antifreeze agents can contain
harmful substances and are flammable. There
is a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Observe the
instructions on the containers. Keep antifreeze
away from ignition sources. Do not refill oper‐
ating materials into different bottles. Store op‐
erating materials out of reach of children.
United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer
fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐
tainer.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concen‐
trate or the equivalent is recommended.◀
WARNING
Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on
contact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of
injury or risk of property damage. Only add
washer fluid when the engine is cooled down.
Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res‐
ervoir.◀
NOTE
Silicon-containing additives in the
washer fluid for the water-repelling effect on
the windows can lead to damage to the wash‐
ing system. There is a risk of property damage.
Seite 121
Driving Controls
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Do not add silicon-containing additives to the
washer fluid.◀
NOTE
Mixing different windshield washer con‐
centrates or antifreeze can damage the wash‐
ing system. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Do not mix different windshield washer
concentrates or antifreeze. Follow the informa‐
tion and mixing ratios provided on the contain‐
ers.◀
Overview
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en‐
gine compartment.
Malfunction
The use of undiluted windshield washer con‐
centrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead
to incorrect readings at temperatures below
+5 ℉/-15 ℃.
Steptronic transmission
Concept
The Steptronic transmission combines the
functions of an automatic transmission with
the possibility of manual shifting, if needed.
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
Selector lever positions
Drive mode D
Selector lever position for normal vehicle oper‐
ation. All gears for forward travel are activated
automatically.
Reverse R
Engage selector lever position R only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Neutral N
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without
power, for instance in vehicle washes, refer to
page 123, in selector lever position N.
Parking position P
Selector level position, for instance for parking
the vehicle. The transmission blocks the drive
wheels in selector lever position P.
Engage selector lever position P only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐
cally in the following situations:
▷ After drive-ready state is switched off and
selector lever position R or D is engaged.
Seite 122
Controls Driving
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
▷ If, with the vehicle stationary and the selec‐
tor lever in position D or R, the driver's
safety belt unbuckled, the driver's door is
opened, and the brake pedal is not de‐
pressed.
Engaging selector lever positions
General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the
brake pedal until you are ready to start.
Functional requirements
Only when the drive-ready state is switched on
and the brake pedal is depressed is it possible
to change from selector lever position P to an‐
other selector lever position.
Engaging selector lever position D, N,
R
A selector lever lock prevents the following
faulty operation:
▷ Unintentional shifting into selector lever
position R.
▷ Unintentional shifting from selector lever
position P into another selector lever posi‐
tion.
1. Press and hold the button to release the
selector lever lock.
2. With the driver's safety belt fastened,
briefly push the selector lever in the de‐
sired direction, past a resistance point, if
needed. The selector lever automatically
returns to the center position when re‐
leased.
Engaging selector lever position P
Press button P.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle
General information
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without
its own power for a short distance, for instance
in a vehicle wash, or be pushed.
Engaging selector lever position N
1.
Switch on drive-ready state while pressing
on the brake pedal.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. If necessary, switch off Automatic Hold, re‐
fer to page 116.
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5. Touch the selector lever lock and engage
selector lever position N.
6. Switch off drive-ready state.
Seite 123
Driving Controls
123
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
In this way, standby state remains
switched on, and a Check Control mes‐
sage is displayed.
The vehicle may roll.
NOTE
Selector lever position P is automatically
engaged when standby state is switched off.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not
switch standby state off in vehicle washes.◀
Irrespective of standby state, the selector lever
position P is automatically engaged after ap‐
prox. 35 minutes.
If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to
change the selector lever position.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if
needed, refer to page 125.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance.
Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the re‐
sistance point at the full throttle position.
Sport program M/S
Concept
The shifting points and shifting times in the
Sport program are designed for a sportier driv‐
ing style. The transmission, for instance shifts
up later and the shifting times are shorter.
Activating the sport program
Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐
tor lever position D.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, for instance S1.
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐
vated.
eDRIVE electric driving and the Auto Start
Stop function are deactivated. Coasting to a
standstill and braking phases are used more
often to recover energy. Depending on the
driving situation, the high-voltage battery is
charged at different speeds. Fuel consumption
can increase.
Ending the Sport program
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Manual mode M/S
Concept
Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual
mode.
Activating manual mode
1.
Press the selector lever to the left out of
selector lever position D, arrow 1.
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it
backward, arrows 2.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, for instance M1.
Seite 124
Controls Driving
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Shifting
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐
wards.
The transmission continues shifting automati‐
cally in certain situations, for instance when
speed limits are reached.
Ending the manual mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles
Concept
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
General information
Shifting
The vehicle only shifts at suitable engine and
road speeds.
Short-term manual mode
In selector lever position D, actuating a shift
paddle switches into manual mode tempora‐
rily.
After conservative driving in manual mode
without acceleration or shifting via the shift
paddles for a certain amount of time, the trans‐
mission switches back to automatic mode.
It is possible to switch into automatic mode as
follows:
▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle.
▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift
paddle, briefly pull the left shift paddle.
Continuous manual mode
In selector lever position S, actuating a shift
paddle switches into manual mode perma‐
nently.
Shifting
▷ To shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle.
▷ To shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.
▷ The lowest possible gear can be selected
by pulling and holding the left shift paddle.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selector lever position is
displayed, for example P.
Electronic unlocking of the
transmission lock
General information
Electronically unlock the transmission lock to
maneuver vehicle from a danger area.
Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the
parking brake to prevent the vehicle from roll‐
ing away.
Seite 125
Driving Controls
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Engaging selector lever position N
1. Press and hold down brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. Hold the Start/
Stop button pressed.
3. With your free hand, press the button on
the selector lever, arrow 1, and press the
selector lever into selector lever position N
and hold, arrow N, until selector lever posi‐
tion N is displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter.
A Check Control message is displayed.
4. Release Start/Stop button and selector
lever.
5. Release brake.
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area
and secure it against moving on its own.
For additional information, see the chapter on
tow-starting and towing, refer to page 332.
Driving Dynamics Control
Concept
The Driving Dynamics Control influences the
driving dynamics properties of the vehicle. The
vehicle can be adjusted depending on the sit‐
uation using various driving modes.
General information
The following systems are affected, for in‐
stance:
▷ Engine characteristics.
▷ Steptronic transmission.
▷ Dynamic Damping Control.
▷ Air suspension.
▷ Integral Active Steering.
▷ Display in the instrument cluster.
▷ Cruise control.
▷ Backrest width for comfort seats.
When drive-ready state is switched on, the
COMFORT driving mode is selected automati‐
cally.
Overview
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selected driving mode is
displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter.
Driving modes
Button Driving
mode
Configuration
SPORT INDIVIDUAL
COMFORT PLUS
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
ADAPTIVE
Seite 126
Controls Driving
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Driving modes in detail
COMFORT
Concept
Balanced tuning between dynamic and con‐
sumption-optimized driving.
Switching on
Press button repeatedly until COM‐
FORT is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
COMFORT PLUS
Concept
Particularly comfortable tuning for optimum
traveling comfort.
Switching on
Press button repeatedly until COM‐
FORT PLUS is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
SPORT
Concept
Dynamic tuning for higher agility.
General information
The high-voltage battery is increasingly
charged through energy recovery.
Switching on
Press button repeatedly until SPORT
is displayed in the instrument cluster.
SPORT INDIVIDUAL
Concept
Individual settings can be adjusted in the
SPORT INDIVIDUAL driving mode.
Configuration
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Driving Experience Control"
4. "Configure SPORT INDIVIDUAL"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Reset SPORT INDIVIDUAL to the standard
settings:
"Reset to SPORT STANDARD".
ECO PRO
Concept
Consumption-optimized tuning.
General information
Reducing the energy recovery of the high-volt‐
age battery optimizes consumption. The vehi‐
cle is operated more frequently in the coasting
driving condition.
Switching on
Press button repeatedly until ECO
PRO is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
Concept
Individual settings can be adjusted in the ECO
PRO INDIVIDUAL driving mode.
Configuration
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Driving Experience Control"
Seite 127
Driving Controls
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
4. "Configure ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard
settings:
"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD".
ADAPTIVE
Concept
Comfort-oriented driving mode, whose tuning
is automatically adjusted to the driving situa‐
tion and driving style.
If the navigation system is active, upcoming
road sections are considered.
Switching on
Press button. ADAPTIVE is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
INDIVIDUAL configuration
General information
The individual configuration of the driving
mode is stored for the active driver profile. The
last set configuration is activated directly when
the driving mode is called up again.
Activating configuration of the driving
mode
Press button for the desired driving mode sev‐
eral times.
Seite 128
Controls Driving
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Displays
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Instrument cluster
Concept
The instrument cluster is a variable display.
When you change to a different program via
Driving Dynamics Control, the display adapts
to the respective program.
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the dis‐
play change can be deactivated via iDrive.
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster
may differ from the way they are shown in this
Owner's Manual.
Overview
1 Fuel gauge 138
Instrument cluster with enhanced features:
range 138
2 Speedometer
3 Time 138
External temperature 138
Driver assistance system displays
Service requirements 139
4 Tachometer 138
Displays of the hybrid system 131
Selection lists 142
ECO PRO displays 270
Navigation display.
5 High-voltage battery charge indica‐
tor 131
6 Transmission display 122
Status, Driving Dynamics Control 126
7 Messages, for instance Check Control
Onboard Computer 142
Charging screen 130
8 Driver assistance system displays
Speed Limit Info 140
9 Reset miles 143
Adjusting the view
Concept
Depending on the equipment, the instrument
cluster can be set to three different operating
modes in addition to the driving mode.
Settings
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
Seite 129
Displays Controls
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
4. "Instrument panel"
5. Select the desired setting.
▷ "STANDARD": all displays on the in‐
strument cluster are active.
▷ "REDUCED" all displays on the instru‐
ment cluster are reduced to the essen‐
tial.
▷ "INDIVIDUAL": all displays on the in‐
strument cluster are active. Individual
displays can be individually configured.
Configuring INDIVIDUAL
▷ "Driving mode display": when the driving
mode is switched into ECO PRO or
SPORT, the instrument cluster automati‐
cally switches into the respective view.
▷ "Speed limit exceeded": if the speed rec‐
ognized by Speed Limit Info is exceeded,
the exceeded range is marked red in the
speedometer.
▷ Instrument cluster with enhanced features:
"Magnifier function": the current speed is
shown enlarged in the speedometer.
Charging screen
1 Charge state 282
2 Range for electric driving 282
3 Charging status 282
4 Timer, departure time 283
5 Stationary climate control 283
6 Maximum electrical range 282
Seite 130
Controls Displays
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
7 End of charging time 282 Departure time with timer 283
Displays of the hybrid
system
Displays in the instrument cluster
General information
The following functions of the hybrid system
are displayed:
▷ High-voltage battery charge indicator, refer
to page 131.
▷ Drive-ready state: READY, refer to
page 131.
▷ Electric driving: ePOWER, refer to
page 131.
▷ Energy recovery: CHARGE, refer to
page 132.
▷ Acceleration boost: eBOOST, refer to
page 132.
▷ Electric driving: MAX eDRIVE, refer to
page 132.
▷ Electric driving: AUTO eDRIVE, refer to
page 132.
▷ BATTERY CONTROL, refer to page 132.
The display depends on the system's operat‐
ing condition.
High-voltage battery charge indicator
Concept
Indicates the current charge state of the high-
voltage battery as a percentage.
Safety information
WARNING
Even when it is indicated that the high-
voltage battery is discharged, the high-voltage
system is always still under high voltage. There
is a risk of fire or a risk of injury. Do not touch
or change live parts, e.g., orange high-voltage
cables, even when the batteries are dis‐
charged.◀
Display
Instrument cluster with enhanced features
▷ Electric range, arrow 1.
▷ Adjusted charge state of the BATTERY
CONTROL function, refer to page 113, ar‐
row 2.
▷ Current charge state, arrow 3.
Drive-ready state: READY
READY indicates drive-ready
state. For additional information,
see Drive-ready state, refer to
page 109.
Electric driving: ePOWER
In ePOWER mode, the range for electric driv‐
ing is colored blue, arrow 1. The range high‐
Seite 131
Displays Controls
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
lighted in blue can vary depending on the driv‐
ing situation and eDRIVE mode.
A pointer indicates the power outputted by the
hybrid drive in a scale, arrow 2.
Instrument cluster with enhanced features:
In SPORT driving mode, the engine speed of
the combustion engine is displayed instead of
the output of the hybrid drive.
If the pointer is outside the range highlighted in
blue, the combustion engine is switched on,
arrow 3.
For further information, please refer to electric
driving: ePOWER, refer to page 111.
Energy recovery: CHARGE
Energy recovery during coasting and braking is
indicated as CHARGE in the instrument cluster
depending on the driving mode, see arrow.
The high-voltage battery is charged. If the
high-voltage battery is completely charged, no
energy can be recovered.
For further information, please refer to Energy
recovery CHARGE, refer to page 114.
Acceleration boost: eBOOST
If the electric motor supports the combustion
engine, e.g., during rapid acceleration,
eBOOST, refer to page 114, is displayed. De‐
pending on the available charge state of the
high-voltage battery, there could be more or
less eBOOST available. If the charge state of
the high-voltage battery is low, eBOOST may
not be available.
Electric driving: MAX eDRIVE
The display becomes active af‐
ter MAX eDRIVE, refer to
page 112, is activated via the
eDRIVE button.
Electric driving: AUTO eDRIVE
The display becomes active
while driving electrically after
AUTO eDRIVE, refer to
page 112, is activated via the
eDRIVE button.
BATTERY CONTROL
The display becomes active af‐
ter BATTERY CONTROL, refer
to page 113, is activated via the
eDRIVE button.
The available electric range is conserved for a
later point in the trip.
Seite 132
Controls Displays
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Indications on the Control Display
Overview
The symbols are shown on the Control Dis‐
play.
Symbol Meaning
Adapting to the course of the road.
Current energy flow.
Fuel consumption history.
Adapting to the course of the road
Concept
When the navigation system destination guid‐
ance is active, hybrid operation adapts to spe‐
cific route sections.
Use of the hybrid system is optional.
Situations which are already underway and sit‐
uations ahead are detected, indicated on the
Control Display, and the hybrid drive is
adapted and prepared for them.
Functional requirements
▷ Selector lever position D engaged.
▷ AUTO eDRIVE hybrid mode is activated.
Displaying the adaptation to the course of
the road
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "eDRIVE"
4. Select the symbol.
Current vehicle state
General information
The following are displayed:
▷ Active components of the hybrid system.
▷ Direction of the energy flows:
Orange: energy flow of the combustion en‐
gine.
Blue: energy flow of the hybrid system.
▷ Vehicle states:
▷ ePOWER.
▷ POWER.
▷ eASSIST.
▷ eBOOST.
▷ CHARGE.
▷ Coasting.
▷ Charging.
▷ System requirements of the hybrid system,
e.g., drive system not yet warmed up to
operating temperature.
▷ Driving requirement, e.g., transmission se‐
lector lever in the M/S position.
Displaying the current vehicle state
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "eDRIVE"
4. Select the symbol.
Fuel consumption history
Concept
The fuel consumption history displays the use
of the hybrid system in a chart. The route for
determining the fuel consumption values can
be adjusted.
Seite 133
Displays Controls
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Displaying fuel consumption history
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "eDRIVE"
4. Select the symbol.
Adjusting the route length
1.
Press button.
2. "Scaling:"
3. Select the desired setting.
Resetting fuel consumption history
1. Press button.
2. "Reset consumption history"
The fuel consumption values are reset.
The odometer for electric driving will be reset
during next refueling.
Display
▷ Current average fuel consumption, ar‐
row 1.
▷ Bar display for the average fuel consump‐
tion for the set route length, arrow 2.
▷ Odometer for electric driving, arrow 3.
The average fuel consumption of the combus‐
tion engine is indicated using a line and a value
above the bar display. The indicated value is
identical to the average fuel consumption in
the Onboard Computer and can be reset via
the Onboard Computer.
Check Control
Concept
The Check Control system monitors functions
in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions
in the monitored systems.
General information
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lights and
SMS text messages in the instrument cluster
and, if applicable, in the Head-up Display.
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and
an SMS text message may appear on the Con‐
trol Display.
Indicator/warning lights
Concept
Indicator/warning lights in the instrument clus‐
ter display the status of some functions in the
vehicle and indicate when a malfunction is
present in the monitored systems.
General information
The indicator and warning lights can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when
drive-ready state is switched on.
Red lights
Safety belt reminder
Indicator lamp flashes or is illuminated:
safety belt on the driver or passenger
side is not buckled. The safety belt re‐
minder can also be activated if objects are
placed on the front passenger seat.
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
correctly.
Seite 134
Controls Displays
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Airbag system
Airbag system and belt tensioner are
not working.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Parking brake
The parking brake is set.
Release the parking brake, refer to
page 116.
Brake system
Braking system impaired. Continue to
drive moderately.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Yellow lights
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
Braking force boost may not be work‐
ing. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the lon‐
ger braking distance into account.
Have the system immediately checked
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
The indicator light flashes: DSC con‐
trols the drive and braking forces. The
vehicle is stabilized. Reduce speed and
adapt driving style to the driving circumstan‐
ces.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐
tioned.
Have the system immediately checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control, refer to
page 188.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction
Control is activated
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deac‐
tivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol is activated.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control, refer to
page 188, and DTC Dynamic Traction Control,
refer to page 189.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of
tire inflation pressure in a tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cau‐
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma‐
neuvers.
Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 307.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The indicator light illuminates.
The Tire Pressure Monitor reports a
low tire inflation pressure or a flat tire.
Follow the information in the Check Control
message.
The indicator light flashes and then illuminates
continuously.
No flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can
be detected.
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: after leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.
Reset the system again.
▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop as needed.
Seite 135
Displays Controls
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 302.
Steering system
Steering system may not be working.
Have the system checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Emissions
▷ The warning light lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
firing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
riod can seriously damage emission con‐
trol components, in particular the catalytic
converter.
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to
page 323.
Acoustic pedestrian protection inactive
Acoustic pedestrian protection deacti‐
vated or possibly not working.
Have the system checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Green lights
Turn signal
Turn signal switched on.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
light indicates that a turn signal bulb
has failed.
Turn signal, refer to page 118.
Parking lights, headlight
Parking lights or headlights are
switched on.
Parking light/low beams, automatic
headlight control, refer to page 149.
Lane departure warning
The indicator light lights up: the system
is activated At least one lane marking
was detected and warnings can be is‐
sued.
Lane departure warning, refer to page 175.
Front fog lights
Front fog lights are switched on.
Front fog lights, refer to page 153.
High-beam Assistant
High-beam Assistant is switched on.
High beams are switched on and off
automatically depending on the traffic
situation.
High-beam Assistant, refer to page 151.
Automatic Hold
Automatic Hold is activated. The vehi‐
cle is automatically held in place when
it is stationary.
Automatic Hold, refer to page 116.
Seite 136
Controls Displays
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Blue lights
High beams
High beams are switched on.
High beams, refer to page 118.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press and hold button on signal lever.
Continuous display
Some Check Control messages are displayed
continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐
function is eliminated. If several malfunctions
occur at once, the messages are displayed
consecutively.
These messages can be hidden for approx.
8 seconds. After this time, they are displayed
again automatically.
Temporary display
Other Check Control messages are hidden au‐
tomatically after approx. 20 seconds. These
Check Control messages are stored and can
be displayed again later.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the SMS text message.
Display
Check Control
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or is stored.
SMS text messages
SMS text messages in combination with a
symbol in the instrument cluster explain a
Check Control message and the meaning of
the indicator and warning lights.
Supplementary SMS text messages
Additional information, such as the reason for
an error or malfunction or the required action,
can be called up via Check Control.
With urgent messages the added text will be
automatically displayed on the Control Display.
Further help
Depending on the Check Control message,
further help can be selected.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the desired text message.
5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Call BMW Accident Assistance"
Contact BMW Roadside Assistance.
▷ "Service request"
Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop.
▷ "BMW Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Display additional information about
the Check Control message in the
Integrated Owner's Manual.
Seite 137
Displays Controls
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Messages after trip completion
Special messages displayed while driving are
displayed again after drive-ready state is
switched off.
Fuel gauge
Instrument cluster with enhanced
features
An arrow beside the fuel pump
symbol shows which side of the
vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.
The current range of the com‐
bustion engine is displayed as
numerical value.
Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to
vary.
Information on refueling, refer to page 286.
The yellow indicator light illuminates,
once the fuel reserve is reached.
Instrument cluster with
enhanced features:
tachometer
General information
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to
protect the engine.
The tachometer is available in the SPORT driv‐
ing mode.
External temperature
WARNING
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a risk of icy roads, e.g., on bridges
or shady sections of road. There is a risk of an
accident. Adjust your driving style to the
weather conditions at low temperatures.◀
If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a
signal sounds.
A Check Control message is displayed.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Time
The time is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Setting the time and time format, refer to
page 40.
Range
Concept
The range indicates the distance that can still
be covered with the current fuel level and the
electric energy of the high-voltage battery.
General information
The range can be displayed as range for elec‐
tric driving or as total range. The total range
considers the capacity of the fuel tank as well
as the electric energy in the high-voltage bat‐
tery. If the requirements for electric driving are
not met, the total range considers the content
of the fuel tank only.
The electric range can abruptly reduce or in‐
crease based on the following factors:
▷ Automatic climate control settings.
▷ Driving style.
▷ Traffic conditions.
▷ Program change via Driving Dynamics
Control.
▷ Climate and terrain conditions.
With a low remaining range, a Check Control
message is briefly displayed. With a dynamic
driving style, for instance taking curves ag‐
gressively, the engine function is not always
ensured.
Seite 138
Controls Displays
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
As soon as a respectively low fuel tank filling
level is reached, MAX eDRIVE is automatically
selected to protect the combustion engine if
the requirements for electric driving are met.
The Steptronic Sport program is not available.
You may continue driving with reduced per‐
formance and exclusively with electric motor
power.
Safety information
NOTE
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of property
damage. Refuel promptly.◀
Instrument cluster with enhanced
features: range display, combustion
engine
The current range is displayed
as numerical value next to the
fuel gauge.
Range display, electric motor
Instrument cluster with enhanced features:
The electric range is continuously displayed in
the charge state indicator of the high-voltage
battery, refer to page 131.
The display indicates that the
electric drive is currently not
available.
Total range display
Instrument cluster with en‐
hanced features:
The total range can be displayed
via the Onboard Computer in
the instrument cluster, refer to
page 142.
Service requirements
Concept
The function displays the service requirements
and the corresponding maintenance scopes.
General information
After switching on drive-ready state, the in‐
strument cluster briefly displays available driv‐
ing distance or time to the next scheduled
maintenance.
A service advisor can read out the current
service requirements from your remote con‐
trol.
Some information on service requirements can
also be shown on the BMW display key.
Display
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
tion.
Seite 139
Displays Controls
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Symbols
Sym‐
bols
Description
No service is currently required.
The deadline for scheduled mainte‐
nance or a legally mandated inspec‐
tion is approaching.
The service deadline has already
passed.
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the required vehicle inspec‐
tions.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
set correctly.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
6. Select the desired setting.
7. Confirm.
The entered date is stored.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the service status or legally
mandated vehicle inspections is automatically
transmitted to your dealer’s service center be‐
fore a service due date.
You can check when your dealer’s service cen‐
ter was notified.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Teleservice Call"
Gear shift indicator
Concept
The system recommends the most fuel effi‐
cient gear for the current driving situation.
General information
The gear shift indicator is active in the manual
mode of the Steptronic transmission.
Steptronic transmission: displaying
Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the
engaged gear is displayed.
Example Description
Fuel efficient gear is set.
Shift into fuel efficient gear.
Speed Limit Info
Speed Limit Info
Concept
Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum
permitted speed in the instrument cluster.
General information
The camera in the area of the interior mirror
detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as
well as variable overhead sign posts.
Traffic signs with extra symbols are considered
and compared with the vehicle's onboard data.
The traffic sign will then be either displayed or
ignored depending on the situation.
The system takes into account the information
stored in the navigation system and also dis‐
Seite 140
Controls Displays
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
plays speed limits present on routes without
signs.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traf‐
fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐
just driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.◀
Overview
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Displaying Speed Limit Info
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, Speed
Limit Info is displayed via the operating mode
of the instrument cluster or via iDrive.
Display via operating mode of the
instrument cluster
The Speed Limit Info displays are shown or
hidden via the operating mode of the instru‐
ment cluster.
The Speed Limit Info is displayed in the follow‐
ing operating modes: "STANDARD" or
"INDIVIDUAL"
Speed Limit Info is not displayed in the follow‐
ing operating mode: "REDUCED"
Adjusting the operating mode of the instru‐
ment cluster, refer to page 129.
Display via iDrive
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Road signs"
Display
General information
Speed Limit Info is displayed in the instrument
cluster and, if applicable, in the Head-up Dis‐
play.
Speed Limit Info
Current speed limit.
Speed Limit Info not available.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and
may provide incorrect information in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ When signs are fully or partially concealed
by objects, stickers or paint.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong
reflections.
Seite 141
Displays Controls
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a
sticker, etc.
▷ If the camera has overheated and been
temporarily switched off due to excessively
high temperatures.
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
▷ If the speed limits or road data stored in the
navigation system are incorrect.
▷ If the speed limits vary with the time of day
and the day of the week.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation,
such as due to changes in road routing.
▷ In case of electronic traffic signs.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with traffic
signs applied to them.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ When signs that are valid for a parallel road
are detected.
▷ In the presence of country-specific signs
and road configurations.
Selection lists
General information
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
following can be displayed or operated using
the buttons and the thumbwheel on the steer‐
ing wheel as well as the displays in the instru‐
ment cluster and the Head-up Display:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Redial phone feature.
Activating a list and adjusting the
setting
On the right side of the steering wheel, turn
the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding
list.
1.
Turn the thumbwheel and select the de‐
sired setting.
2. Press the thumbwheel.
Display
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the list in the instrument cluster can differ from
the illustration shown.
Onboard Computer in the
instrument cluster
Concept
The Onboard Computer displays different ve‐
hicle data in the instrument cluster, such as
average values.
Seite 142
Controls Displays
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Calling up information
Press and hold button on signal lever.
Information is displayed in the Info Display of
the instrument cluster. Pressing the button re‐
peatedly displays additional information.
Information at a glance
The following information can be displayed on
the Onboard Computer:
▷ Miles and trip miles.
▷ Time of arrival and distance to destination.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Instrument cluster with enhanced features:
Bar display for total range.
▷ Fuel consumption display.
▷ Average fuel consumption and average
speed.
▷ Engine temperature display.
Adjusting information for Onboard
Computer
For some information of the Onboard Com‐
puter, it is possible to set whether it can be
called up in the instrument cluster.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Onboard info"
6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Information in detail
Odometer and trip odometer
Displaying/resetting miles
Press the button.
▷ Press the knob briefly to dis‐
play the trip miles.
When the drive-ready state
is switched off, miles and
trip miles are displayed.
▷ Keep the knob pressed down to reset the
trip miles.
Display
▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.
Time of arrival and distance to
destination
General information
The estimated time of arrival and the distance
remaining to the destination are displayed if a
destination is entered in the navigation system
before the trip is started.
Seite 143
Displays Controls
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Display
▷ Time of arrival, arrow 1.
▷ Distance to destination, arrow 2.
Instrument cluster with enhanced
features: total range
Concept
The total range can be shown in the form of a
bar display in the Onboard Computer.
Display
▷ Current total range, arrow.
Fuel consumption display
General information
The average fuel consumption values can be
shown in the form of a bar display in the On‐
board Computer. The odometer for electric
driving will be reset during next refueling.
The electric consumption values are displayed
in MAX eDRIVE.
Display
▷ Odometer for electric driving, arrow 1.
▷ Average fuel consumption, arrow 2.
▷ Current fuel consumption, arrow 3.
Average speed and average fuel
consumption
General information
Average speed and average fuel consumption
are calculated for the distance traveled since
the last reset in the Onboard Computer.
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
engine manually stopped are not included in
the calculation of the average speed.
Resetting average values
Press and hold button on turn signal lever.
Seite 144
Controls Displays
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Display
▷ Average speed, arrow 1.
▷ Average fuel consumption, arrow 2.
Engine temperature display
General information
Displays the current engine temperature,
based on a combination of coolant and engine
oil temperature. As soon as the optimum oper‐
ating temperature has been attained, the indi‐
cator is in the center position.
If the engine oil or coolant, and thus the en‐
gine, become too hot, a Check Control mes‐
sage is displayed too.
Check the coolant level, refer to page 320.
Display
Onboard Computer on the
Control Display
Concept
The Onboard Computer displays different ve‐
hicle data on the Control Display, such as aver‐
age values.
General information
Two types of Onboard Computers are availa‐
ble on the Control Display:
▷ "Onboard info": average values, such as
the fuel consumption, are displayed. The
values can be reset individually.
▷ "Trip computer": the values deliver an
overview of a certain distance and can be
reset as often as necessary.
Calling up the Onboard Computer or
trip computer
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Resetting the Onboard Computer
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info"
4. "Consumption" or "Speed"
5. "OK"
Resetting the trip computer
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Trip computer"
4. Move the controller to the left, if needed.
Seite 145
Displays Controls
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
▷ "Reset": all values are reset.
▷ "Automatic reset": all values are
reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle
has come to a standstill.
Sport displays
General information
On the Control Display, the current values for
performance and torque can be displayed if
the vehicle is appropriately equipped.
Displays
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "Sport displays"
Speed warning
Concept
A speed limit can be set that when reached will
cause a warning to be issued.
General information
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
exceeds the set speed limit again, after it has
dropped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the
speed warning
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Warning at:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired speed
is displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
Activating/deactivating the speed
warning
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Speed warning"
5. Press the controller.
Setting your current speed as the
speed warning
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Select current speed"
5. Press the controller.
Vehicle status
General information
The status can be displayed and actions per‐
formed for several systems.
Opening the vehicle status
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
Information at a glance
▷ "Flat Tire Monitor": Status of the Flat
Tire Monitor, refer to page 307.
▷ "Tire Pressure Monitor": Status of the
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 302.
▷ Resetting the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer
to page 303.
▷ "Engine oil level": Electronic engine
oil level check, refer to page 316.
Seite 146
Controls Displays
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
▷ "Check Control": Check Control mes‐
sages are stored in the background and
can be displayed on the Control Display.
Displaying stored Check Control mes‐
sages, refer to page 137.
▷ "Service required": Displaying serv‐
ice requirements, refer to page 139.
▷ "Teleservice Call": service request.
Head-up Display
Concept
This system projects important information
into the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed.
The driver can get information without averting
his or her eyes from the road.
General information
Read the information for cleaning the Head-up
Display, refer to page 337.
Overview
Switching on/off
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Head-Up Display"
Display
Overview
The following information is displayed on the
Head-up Display:
▷ Speed.
▷ Navigation system.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Selection list in the instrument cluster.
▷ Driver assistance systems.
Some of this information is only displayed
briefly as needed.
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
View
Three different views are available for the
Head-up Display:
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. Select the desired setting.
▷ "STANDARD": all displays in the Head-
up Display are active.
▷ "REDUCED": the displays in the Head-
up Display are reduced to the mini‐
mum.
Seite 147
Displays Controls
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
▷ "INDIVIDUAL": all displays in the Head-
up Display are active. Individual dis‐
plays, e.g., Check Control messages,
can be individually configured.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient brightness.
The basic setting can be adjusted.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Brightness"
6. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
7. Press the controller.
When the low beams are activated, the bright‐
ness of the Head-up Display can be addition‐
ally influenced using the instrument lighting.
Adjusting the height
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Height"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired height
is reached.
7. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
The height of the Head-up Display can also be
stored using the memory function, refer to
page 98.
Setting the rotation
The screen of the Head-up Display can be ro‐
tated around its own axis.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Rotation"
6. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
7. Press the controller.
Visibility of the display
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
Display is influenced by the following factors:
▷ Certain sitting positions.
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐
play.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷ Wet roads.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, have the basic set‐
tings checked by a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
The shape of the windshield makes it possible
to display a precise image.
A film in the windshield prevents double im‐
ages from being generated.
For this reason, it is strongly suggested to
have the special windshield replaced by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop, if necessary.
Seite 148
Controls Displays
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Lights
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Overview
Switches in the vehicle
The light switch element is located next to the
steering wheel.
Symbol Function
Front fog lights.
Night Vision, refer to page 171.
Lights off.
Daytime running lights.
Parking lights.
Symbol Function
Automatic headlight control.
Adaptive light functions.
Low beams.
Instrument lighting.
Right roadside parking light.
Left roadside parking light.
Parking lights, cornering
lights and roadside parking
lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
If the driver's door is opened when the drive-
ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting
is automatically switched off.
Parking lights
Position of switch:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe‐
riods; otherwise, they might drain the battery
and it would then be impossible to switch on
drive-ready state.
Low beams
Position of switch:
The low beams illuminate when drive-ready
state is switched on.
Seite 149
Lights Controls
149
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Roadside parking lights
When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided road‐
side parking light can be switched on.
Button Function
Right roadside parking light on/off
Left roadside parking light on/off
Welcome lights and
headlight courtesy delay
feature
Welcome lights
General information
Depending on the equipment, the exterior
lighting of the vehicle can be set individually.
Activating/deactivating
Position of switch: ,
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. Select the desired setting.
▷ "Welcome lights"
Individual light functions are switched
on for a limited time.
▷ "Door handle lighting"
Door handles and the ground in front of
the doors are illuminated for a limited
time.
▷ "LED light carpet"
The area next to the vehicle is illumi‐
nated for a limited time.
Headlight courtesy delay feature.
General information
The low beams stay lit for a particular time if
the high beams are switched on after standby
state is switched on.
Setting the duration
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "Pathway lighting"
6. Select the desired setting.
Automatic headlight control
Concept
The low beams are switched on and off auto‐
matically depending on the ambient bright‐
ness, for instance in tunnels, in twilight or if
there is precipitation.
General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
Activating
Position of switch:
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is
illuminated when the low beams are switched
on.
System limits
The automatic headlight control cannot serve
as a substitute for your personal judgment of
lighting conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks un‐
Seite 150
Controls Lights
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
der these conditions, you should always switch
on the lights manually.
Daytime running lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
The daytime running lights light up when
drive-ready state is switched on. After drive-
ready state is switched off, the parking lights
light up in position .
Activating/deactivating
In some countries, daytime running lights are
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐
vate the daytime running lights.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Adaptive Light Control
Concept
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlight
control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
tion of the road surface.
General information
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the light from the headlight follows
the course of the road.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐
tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐
er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
Depending on the equipment version, Adap‐
tive Light Control consists of one or several
systems:
▷ Cornering light, refer to page 151.
Activating
Position of switch:
Adaptive Headlight Control is active when
drive-ready state is switched on.
Cornering light
In tight curves, for instance on mountainous
roads or when turning, an additional, cornering
light is switched on that lights up the inside of
the curve when the vehicle is moving below a
certain speed.
The cornering light is automatically switched
on depending on the steering angle or the use
of turn signals.
When driving in reverse, the cornering lights
may be automatically switched on regardless
of the steering angle.
Adaptive headlight range
control
The adaptive headlight range control compen‐
sates for acceleration and braking operations
in order not to blind the oncoming traffic and to
achieve optimum illumination of the roadway.
High-beam Assistant
Concept
The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic
participants early on and automatically
switches the high beams on or off depending
on the traffic situation.
General information
The high-beam Assistant ensures that the high
beams are switched on, whenever the traffic
Seite 151
Lights Controls
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
situation allows. In the low speed range, the
high beams are not switched on by the system.
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
adequate illumination, for instance in towns
and cities.
The high beams can be switched on and off at
any time as usual.
Activating/deactivating
Position of switch:
Press and hold button on signal lever.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the low
beams are switched on.
The headlights are automatically switched be‐
tween low beams and high beams.
The blue indicator light in the instru‐
ment cluster lights up when the system
switches on the high beams.
The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when
manually switching the high beams on and off,
refer to page 118.
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press
the button on the turn signal lever.
Sensitivity of the high-beam Assistant
General information
The sensitivity of the high-beam Assistant can
be adjusted.
Safety information
WARNING
If adjustments have been made or the
sensitivity has been modified, oncoming traffic
may be dazzled. There is a risk of an accident.
If adjustments have been made and the sensi‐
tivity has been modified, make sure that on‐
coming traffic is not dazzled. Switch off the
high beams manually if required.◀
Adjusting the sensitivity
Pull the turn signal lever for approxi‐
mately 10 seconds. The system responds
more sensitively.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Resetting the sensitivity
Pull the turn signal lever again for ap‐
prox. 10 seconds. The sensitivity of the high-
beam Assistant is reset to the factory settings.
System limits
The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver's personal judgment of
when to use the high beams. In situation that
require this, therefore switch off manually.
The system is not fully functional in the follow‐
ing situations, and driver intervention may be
necessary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders
and wagons; when driving close to train or
ship traffic; or at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐
sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐
coming traffic on highways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres‐
ence of highly reflective signs.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
Seite 152
Controls Lights
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Laser high beams
Concept
The range of the high beams is increased and
ensures an even better illumination of the road.
General information
When the high beams are switched-on, start‐
ing with a speed of approx. 37 mph/60 km/h,
the laser high beams in the headlight are auto‐
matically switched on in addition to the LED
high beams.
Depending on the country variant, further in‐
formation can be obtained from the laser label
on the headlight.
Safety information
The label is in the headlight and is visible from
the outside.
Fog lights
Front fog lights
Concept
The front fog lights work alongside the low
beams to illuminate a wider area of the road‐
way.
Functional requirement
The low beams must be switched on before
switching on the front fog lights.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The green indicator light lights up if
the front fog lights are switched on.
If the automatic headlight control, refer to
page 150, is activated, the low beams will
come on automatically when you switch on the
front fog lights.
When the high beams or headlight flasher are
activated, the front fog lights are not switched
on.
Instrument lighting
Functional requirement
The parking lights or low beams must be
switched on to adjust the brightness.
Settings
Adjust the brightness with the
thumbwheel.
Interior lights
General information
Depending on the equipment version, interior
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, ambient
lighting, and speaker lighting are automatically
controlled.
Seite 153
Lights Controls
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
Interior lights
Reading lights
Switching the interior lights on/off
Press button.
To switch off permanently: press the button
and hold for approx. 3 seconds.
The interior lights in the rear of the vehicle can
be switched on and off independently. The
button is located in the rear roofliner.
Switching the reading lights on/off
Press button.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
reading lights are located next to the interior
lights in the front and rear.
Ambient light
General information
Depending on the equipment version, lighting
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's in‐
terior.
If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive,
it will not be switched on when the vehicle is
unlocked.
Switching on/off
The ambient light is switched on when the ve‐
hicle is unlocked, and switched off when the
vehicle is locked.
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Ambient lighting"
The selected setting is stored for the driver
profile currently used.
Selecting color scheme
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Color"
6. Select the desired setting.
Setting the brightness
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Brightness"
6. Select the desired setting.
Dimmed while driving
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Dimmed for night driving"
Seite 154
Controls Lights
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Some lights of the interior lighting are dimmed
when the vehicle is driven in the dark.
The selected setting is stored for the driver
profile currently used.
Panoramic glass sunroof, lighting
If the panoramic glass sunroof is opened or the
sliding visor closed, lighting of the respective
area is switched off.
BMW Touch Command
The ambient light can also be operated using
BMW Touch Command.
Bowers & Wilkins Diamond Surround
Sound System
General information
Some speakers in the vehicle are illuminated.
Brightness can be individually set.
If the speakers are muted, speaker lighting will
be switched off.
Switching on/off
The speaker lighting is switched on when the
vehicle is unlocked, and switched off when the
vehicle is locked.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Bowers & Wilkins"
The selected setting is stored for the driver
profile currently used.
Setting the brightness
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Brightness"
6. Select the desired setting.
BMW Touch Command
The operation of the Bowers & Wilkins Dia‐
mond Surround Sound System is also possible
using BMW Touch Command.
Ambient highlight
General information
The ambient highlight illuminates the door pil‐
lars in the rear.
When opening a rear door, the brightness of
the ambient highlight of the respective door
pillar is reduced. After the rear door is closed,
the ambient highlight is illuminated again in the
previously adjusted brightness.
Switching on/off automatically
The ambient highlight is switched on when the
vehicle is unlocked, and switched off when the
vehicle is locked.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Accent lighting in rear"
The selected setting is stored for the driver
profile currently used.
Switching on/off manually
The ambient highlight is fitted with a touch
sensor. The ambient highlight is switched on
or off with a brief touch of the chrome bar.
Seite 155
Lights Controls
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Adjusting the brightness via iDrive
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Brightness"
The last brightness set is displayed.
6. Select the desired setting.
The selected setting is stored for the driver
profile currently used.
Adjusting the brightness via touch
sensor
The ambient highlight is fitted with a touch
sensor. The brightness is changed with a long
touch of the chrome bar.
BMW Touch Command
The ambient highlight can also be operated
using BMW Touch Command.
Seite 156
Controls Lights
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Safety
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Head airbag
4 Side airbag
5 Knee airbag
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and the
front passenger by responding to frontal im‐
pacts in which safety belts alone would not
provide adequate protection.
Side airbag
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.
Head airbag
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
the head.
Seite 157
Safety Controls
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Ejection Mitigation
The head airbag system is designed as an
ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce
the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants
through side windows during rollovers or side
impact events.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
impact.
Protective action
General information
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end
collisions.
Information on optimum effect of the
airbags
WARNING
If the seat position is incorrect or the de‐
ployment area of the airbags is impaired, the
airbag system cannot provide protection as in‐
tended and may cause additional injuries due
to triggering. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐
ger to life. Follow the information on achieving
the optimum protective effect of the airbag
system.◀
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep
the risk of injury to your hands or arms as
low as possible when the airbag is trig‐
gered.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐
ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and
legs in the floor area and does not support
them on the dashboard.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag.
▷ There should be no additional persons, an‐
imals or objects between an airbag and a
person.
▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front
passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐
tach adhesive labels or coverings and do
not attach brackets or cables, for instance
for GPS devices or mobile phones.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, do not cover them or
modify them in any way.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not specifically suited for seats
with integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
jackets, over the backrests.
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
This also applies to steering wheel covers,
the dashboard, and the seats.
▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
Even when you follow all instructions very
closely, injury from contact with the airbags
cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary
hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐
ties may affect the air bag system; contact
BMW Customer Relations for further informa‐
tion.
Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
Seite 158
Controls Safety
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Functional readiness of the airbag
system
Safety information
WARNING
Individual components can be hot after
triggering of the airbag system. There is a risk
of injury. Do not touch individual compo‐
nents.◀
WARNING
Improperly executed work can lead to
failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering
of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc‐
tion, the airbag system might not trigger as in‐
tended despite the accident severity. There is
a risk of injuries or danger to life. Have the air‐
bag system checked, repaired, dismantled and
scrapped by a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.◀
Display in the instrument cluster
When drive-ready state is switched on,
the warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up briefly and thereby in‐
dicates the function readiness of the entire air‐
bag system and the belt tensioners.
Malfunction
▷ Warning light does not come on
when drive-ready state is switched
on.
▷ The warning light lights up continuously.
Have the system checked.
Automatic deactivation of the front-
seat passenger airbags
Concept
The system reads if the front passenger seat is
occupied by measuring the human body's re‐
sistance.
Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas‐
senger's side are either activated or deacti‐
vated.
General information
Before transporting a child on the front pas‐
senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐
structions for children on the front passenger
seat, see Children.
Safety information
WARNING
To ensure the front-seat passenger air‐
bag function, the system must be able to de‐
tect whether a person is sitting in the front
passenger seat. The entire seat cushion area
must be used for this purpose. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the
front passenger keeps his or her feet in the
floor area.◀
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults,
the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐
tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case,
the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger
airbags lights up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
and the indicator lamp goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To enable correct recognition of the occupied
seat cushion
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
or other items to the front passenger seat
unless they are specifically determined to
be safe for use on the front passenger
seat.
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
passenger seat if a child restraint system is
to be installed on it.
Seite 159
Safety Controls
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
Indicator lamp for the front-seat
passenger airbags
The indicator lamp for the front-seat passen‐
ger airbag in the roofliner indicates the operat‐
ing state of the front-seat passenger airbag.
The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei‐
ther activated or deactivated.
After drive-ready state is switched on, the
lamp briefly lights up and then indicates
whether the airbags are either activated or de‐
activated.
▷ The indicator lamp lights up
when a child is properly
seated in a child restraint fix‐
ing system or when the seat
is empty. The airbags on the
front passenger side are not
activated.
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
e.g., a correctly seated person of sufficient
size is detected on the seat. The airbags
on the front passenger side are activated.
Detected child restraint systems
The system generally detects children seated
in a child restraint system, particularly in child
restraint systems required by NHTSA at the
point in time when the vehicle was manufac‐
tured. After installing a child restraint system,
make sure that the indicator light for the front-
seat passenger airbags lights up. This indi‐
cates that the child restraint system has been
detected and the front-seat passenger airbags
are not activated.
Strength of the driver's and front-seat
passenger airbag
The explosive power that activates driver's/
front-seat passenger airbags very much de‐
pends on the positions of the driver's/front
passenger seat.
To maintain the accuracy of this function over
the long term, calibrate the front seats as soon
as a respective message appears on the Con‐
trol Display.
Calibrating the front seats
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
A corresponding message appears on the
Control Display.
1.
Press the switch and move the respective
seat all the way forward, until it stops.
2. Press the switch forward again. The seat
still moves forward slightly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when
the message on the Control Display disap‐
pears.
If the message continues to be displayed, re‐
peat the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a re‐
peat calibration, have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Intelligent Safety
Concept
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of
the driver assistance system.
General information
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, In‐
telligent Safety consists of one or more sys‐
tems that can help prevent an imminent colli‐
sion.
Seite 160
Controls Safety
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
▷ Approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function, refer to page 162.
▷ Evasion assistance, refer to page 166.
▷ Person warning with City light braking
function, refer to page 168.
▷ Night Vision with pedestrian and animal
detection, refer to page 171.
▷ Lane departure warning, refer to
page 175.
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to
page 178.
▷ Side collision warning, refer to page 181.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traf‐
fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐
just driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.◀
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from personal responsibility. Due to system
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may
not be output or they may be output too late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traf‐
fic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated.
There is a risk of an accident. Switch all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/
towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety
Switching on/off
Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems activate according to the
last setting.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intel‐
ligent Safety systems are switched
off.
Button does not light up: all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched
off.
Press button:
The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched
off, all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The indi‐
vidual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a set‐
Seite 161
Safety Controls
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
ting is changed on the menu, all settings of the
menu are activated.
Press button repeatedly. The follow‐
ing settings are switched between:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for
the sub-functions, for instance setting for
warning time.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on according to the individual
settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in‐
dividually switched off.
Press and hold this button:
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Approach control warning
with light braking function
Concept
The system can help prevent accidents. If an
accident cannot be prevented, the system will
help reduce the collision speed.
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐
ently, if needed.
General information
The system is controlled using a camera.
If the vehicle is equipped with a radar sensor,
the approach control warning is additionally
controlled via the cruise control radar sensor.
Intersection warning when equipped with a ra‐
dar sensor: in addition, a warning is issued at
intersections and junctions if a risk of collision
with crossing traffic is detected.
The approach control warning is available even
if cruise control has been deactivated.
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle
intentionally, the approach control warning and
braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys‐
tem reactions.
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
possible risk of collision with vehicles at
speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of
warnings may vary with the current driving sit‐
uation.
Detection range
Objects that the system can detect are taken
into account.
Intersection warning: the system is also able to
detect vehicles crossing your direction of
travel when these vehicles enter into the de‐
tection range of the system.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traf‐
fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐
just driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.◀
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from personal responsibility. Due to system
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may
not be output or they may be output too late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traf‐
Seite 162
Controls Safety
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
fic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated.
There is a risk of an accident. Switch all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/
towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
With Active Cruise Control: radar
sensor
The radar sensor is located in the lower area of
the front bumper.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐
structed.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button.
The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched
off, all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The indi‐
vidual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a set‐
ting is changed on the menu, all settings of the
menu are activated.
Press button repeatedly.
The following settings are switched
between:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for
the subfunctions.
Seite 163
Safety Controls
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on according to the individual
settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in‐
dividually switched off.
Press and hold this button.
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intel‐
ligent Safety systems are switched
off.
Button does not light up: all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched
off.
Setting the warning time
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Frontal Collision Warn."
5. Select the desired setting.
The selected time is stored for the driver pro‐
file currently used.
Warning with braking function
Display
A warning symbol appears in the instrument
cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision
with a detected vehicle is imminent.
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning.
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
ver, if necessary.
Crossing traffic warning
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning when
vehicles cross your direction of
travel.
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
ver, if necessary.
Prewarning
This warning is issued, for instance when there
is the impending danger of a collision or the
distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
If a prewarning is issued, intervene in the situa‐
tion yourself.
Acute warning with braking function
Acute warning is displayed in case of the immi‐
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
proaches another object at a high differential
speed.
If an acute warning is issued, intervene in the
situation yourself. If necessary, the system
provides assistance, such as with an automatic
braking intervention, in a possible risk of colli‐
sion.
Acute warnings can also be triggered without
previous forewarning.
Brake intervention, City light braking
function
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used when the brake is actuated.
Seite 164
Controls Safety
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Prerequisite is sufficiently quick and hard step‐
ping on the brake pedal.
The system can additionally assist possibly
with automatic braking intervention if there is a
risk of a collision.
At low speeds the vehicle can be decelerated
to a complete stop.
The braking intervention takes place up to ap‐
prox. 50 mph/80 km/h.
The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐
hicle stability has not been restricted, for in‐
stance by deactivating the DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Follow the
limitations of the detection range and func‐
tional restrictions.
With radar sensor and Active Cruise
Control: braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used when the brake is actuated.
Prerequisite is sufficiently quick and hard step‐
ping on the brake pedal.
The system can assist with automatic braking
intervention if there is a risk of a collision.
The braking intervention can bring the vehicle
to a complete stop.
The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐
hicle stability has not been restricted, for in‐
stance by deactivating the DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control.
At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h,
the braking intervention occurs as a brief brak‐
ing pressure. No automatic delay occurs.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Cross-traffic warning: brake intervention is not
performed in the event of cross traffic.
Object detection can be restricted. Follow the
limitations of the detection range and func‐
tional restrictions.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or
risk of damage to property. Follow the informa‐
tion regarding the system limits and actively
intervene, if needed.◀
Upper speed limit
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
temporarily. As soon as the speed drops back
down below this value, the system once again
responds according to the setting.
Intersection warning: the vehicle responds to
crossing traffic if its own speed is below ap‐
prox. 40 mph/65 km/h.
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
The following situations may not be detected,
for instance:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
▷ Intersection warning: crossing vehicles if
their speed is higher than your own speed.
Seite 165
Safety Controls
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, for instance DSC
OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield is dirty or covered in the area of
the interior mirror.
▷ If the camera has overheated and been
temporarily switched off due to excessively
high temperatures.
▷ Depending on the equipment: if the radar
sensors are dirty or covered.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, for instance from
the sun low in the sky.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are,
for example the warning time, the more warn‐
ings are displayed. Therefore, there may also
be an excess of premature or unjustified warn‐
ings and reactions.
Evasion assistance
Concept
The system supports the driver in making eva‐
sive maneuvers in certain situations, such as
when obstacles suddenly appear.
General information
The system issues a warning and intervenes to
support the driver if a lateral evasive maneuver
is possible. Sensors monitor and detect the
clearance around the vehicle. If the system
identifies space alongside the vehicle, it sup‐
ports an evasive maneuver begun by the driver
by safely providing targeted steering support.
Detection range
Objects that the system can detect are taken
into account.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traf‐
fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐
just driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.◀
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from personal responsibility. Due to system
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may
not be output or they may be output too late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traf‐
fic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
Overview
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the bumpers.
Seite 166
Controls Safety
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Front center bumper.
Front side bumper.
Rear bumper.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the ra‐
dar sensors clean and unobstructed.
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Functional requirements
▷ Approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function, refer to page 162, is switched
on.
▷ Sensors detect sufficient clearance around
the vehicle.
Switching on/off
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Warning with evasion support
Display in the instrument cluster
A warning symbol appears in the instrument
cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision
with a detected vehicle is imminent.
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning.
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
ver, if necessary.
Seite 167
Safety Controls
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Acute warning with evasion support
Acute warning is displayed in case of the immi‐
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
proaches another object at a high differential
speed.
If an acute warning is issued, intervene in the
situation yourself. If there is a risk of collision,
the driver's evasive maneuvers are supported
by the system.
Acute warnings can also be triggered without
previous forewarning.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or
risk of damage to property. Follow the informa‐
tion regarding the system limits and actively
intervene, if needed.◀
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
E.g., the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, for instance DSC
OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield is dirty or covered in the area of
the interior mirror.
▷ If the camera has overheated and been
temporarily switched off due to excessively
high temperatures.
▷ Depending on the equipment: if the radar
sensors are dirty or covered.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, for instance from
the sun low in the sky.
Person warning with City
light braking function
Concept
The system can help prevent accidents with
pedestrians.
When driving at city speeds, the system will is‐
sue a warning if there is imminent risk of a col‐
lision with pedestrians, and support with a
braking function.
General information
The system is active at speeds of approx.
3 mph/5 km/h up to approx. 40 mph/65 km/h.
The system reacts to people who are within
the detection range of the system.
The camera in the area of the interior mirror
controls the system.
Seite 168
Controls Safety
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Detection range
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
ided into two areas:
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left of the central area.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐
cated within the central area. A warning is is‐
sued about pedestrians who are located within
the extended area only if they are moving in
the direction of the central area.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traf‐
fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐
just driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.◀
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from personal responsibility. Due to system
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may
not be output or they may be output too late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traf‐
fic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated.
There is a risk of an accident. Switch all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/
towing.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Seite 169
Safety Controls
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Switching on/off manually
Press button.
The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched
off, all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The indi‐
vidual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a set‐
ting is changed on the menu, all settings of the
menu are activated.
Press button repeatedly.
The following settings are switched
between:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for
the subfunctions.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on according to the individual
settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in‐
dividually switched off.
Press and hold this button.
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intel‐
ligent Safety systems are switched
off.
Button does not light up: all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched
off.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐
nal sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an
evasive maneuver.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used when the brake is actuated.
Prerequisite for the brake booster is suffi‐
ciently quick and hard stepping on the brake
pedal.
The system can additionally assist with braking
intervention if there is a risk of a collision.
At low speeds the vehicle can be decelerated
to a complete stop.
The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐
hicle stability has not been restricted, for in‐
stance by deactivating the DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Follow the
limitations of the detection range and func‐
tional restrictions.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or
risk of damage to property. Follow the informa‐
Seite 170
Controls Safety
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
tion regarding the system limits and actively
intervene, if needed.◀
Detection range
The detection potential of the camera is lim‐
ited.
Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐
sued late.
The following situations may not be detected,
e.g.:
▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of the viewing angle or contour.
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield is dirty or covered in the area of
the interior mirror.
▷ If the camera has overheated and been
temporarily switched off due to excessively
high temperatures.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, for instance from
the sun low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside.
Night Vision with pedestrian
and animal detection
Concept
Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec‐
tion is a night vision system.
An infrared camera scans the area in front of
the vehicle and issues a warning if it detects
pedestrians and animals on the street. The
system detects warm objects that are similar in
shape to human beings or animals. If neces‐
sary, the thermal image can be displayed on
the Control Display.
General information
Thermal image
The image shows the heat radiated by objects
in the field of view of the camera.
Warm objects have a light appearance and
cold objects a dark appearance.
The ability to detect an object depends on the
temperature difference between the object
and the background and on the level of heat
radiation emitted by the object. Objects that
are similar in temperature to the environment
or that radiate very little heat are difficult to de‐
tect.
For safety reasons, when driving at speeds
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambi‐
ent light, the image is only displayed when the
low beams are switched on.
A still image is displayed at regular intervals for
a fraction of a second.
Seite 171
Safety Controls
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Pedestrian and animal detection
Object detection and warning only functions in
darkness.
Objects whose form is similar to people with
sufficient heat radiation are detected.
In addition, the system also detects animals
above a certain minimum size, for instance
deer.
Display on the Control Display with thermal im‐
age activated:
▷ People detected by the system: in light
yellow.
▷ Animals detected by the system: in dark
yellow.
Range of object detection, with good ambient
conditions:
▷ Pedestrian detection: up to approx.
330 ft/100 m
▷ Detection of large animals: up to approx.
490 ft/150 m
▷ Detection of medium animals: up to ap‐
prox. 230 ft/70 m
Environmental influences can limit the availa‐
bility of object detection.
If the vehicle systems detect that the vehicle is
located in a residential area, the animal detec‐
tion is temporarily switched off.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traf‐
fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐
just driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.◀
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from personal responsibility. Due to system
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may
not be output or they may be output too late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traf‐
fic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety
Seite 172
Controls Safety
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Thermal image
Camera
The camera is automatically heated when the
external temperatures are low.
When the vehicle lighting is switched on, the
camera objective is cleaned at regular intervals
when the windshield washer system, refer to
page 120, is activated.
Switching on
Switching on automatically
When it is dark outside, the system is automat‐
ically active after every driving off.
Switching on the thermal image
The thermal image from the Night Vision cam‐
era can be displayed on the Control Display in
addition to the warning function. This function
has no effect on object detection.
Press button.
The image from the camera is displayed on the
Control Display.
Adjusting the thermal image
Brightness and contrast can be adjusted, when
the thermal image is switched on.
Via iDrive:
1.
Select brightness or contrast.
▷ "Brightness".
▷ "Contrast".
2. Set the desired value.
Warning function
Display
Symbol Meaning
Person warning.
Animal warning.
Symbol lights up red. Prewarning.
Symbol flashes red and a
signal sounds.
Acute warning.
The displayed symbol may vary and shows the
side of the road on which the person or animal
was detected.
Warning of people or animals in
danger
If a collision with a person or an animal de‐
tected in this way is imminent, a warning sym‐
bol appears on the instrument cluster and in
the Head-up Display.
Although both the shape and the heat radiation
are analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruled
out.
Seite 173
Safety Controls
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Warning area in front of the vehicle
The warning area for the person warning con‐
sists of two parts:
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left of the central area.
With animal warnings, no distinction is made
between the central or expanded area.
The entire area moves along with the vehicle in
the direction of the steering angle and changes
with the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed
increases, the area becomes, for instance lon‐
ger and wider.
Prewarning
Prewarning for persons is displayed when a
person is detected in the central area immedi‐
ately in front of the vehicle as well as on the left
or right side in the extended area.
Prewarning for animals is displayed when an
animal is detected in the front of the vehicle.
If a prewarning is issued, intervene by braking
or making an evasive maneuver.
Acute warning
Acute warning is displayed if a person or an
animal is detected in direct proximity in front of
the vehicle.
If an acute warning is issued, brake or make an
evasive maneuver immediately.
Display in the Head-up Display
The warning is displayed simultaneously in the
Head-up Display and on the instrument clus‐
ter.
System limits
Basic limits
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in
tight curves.
▷ If the camera is soiled or damaged.
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ At very high external temperatures.
Limits of pedestrian and animal
detection
In some situations, it may occur that pedes‐
trians are detected as animals or animals as
pedestrians.
Small animals are not detected by the object
detection function, even if they are clearly visi‐
ble in the image.
Limited detection, e.g., in the following circum‐
stances:
▷ People or animals who are fully or partially
covered, especially when their heads are
covered.
▷ People who are not in an upright position,
e.g., lying down.
▷ Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g.,
recumbent bicycles).
▷ After physical damage to the system, e.g.,
after an accident.
No display on the rear screen
The image from Night Vision cannot be dis‐
played on the rear screen.
Seite 174
Controls Safety
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Lane departure warning
Concept
The lane departure warning alerts when the
vehicle on roads with lane markings is about to
leave the lane.
General information
This camera-based system warns starting at a
minimum speed.
The minimum speed is country-specific and is
displayed in the menu for the Intelligent Safety
systems.
Warnings are issued by means of a steering
wheel vibration. The severity of the steering
wheel vibration can be adjusted. The time of
the warning may vary depending on the cur‐
rent driving situation.
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
Vehicles with side collision warning: if in the
speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h a lane
marking is crossed, the system intervenes with
a brief active steering intervention in addition
to vibrating. The system thus helps keep the
vehicle in the lane.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess road and traffic
safety. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate. Do not jerk the steering wheel in response
to a warning.◀
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from personal responsibility. Due to system
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may
not be output or they may be output too late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traf‐
fic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
Functional requirements
The camera must detect the lane markings for
the lane departure warning to be active.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The lane departure warning activates automat‐
ically after departure if the function was
switched on at the end of the last trip.
Seite 175
Safety Controls
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Switching on/off manually
Press button.
The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched
off, all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The indi‐
vidual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a set‐
ting is changed on the menu, all settings of the
menu are activated.
Press button repeatedly.
The following settings are switched
between:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for
the subfunctions.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on according to the individual
settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in‐
dividually switched off.
Press and hold this button.
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intel‐
ligent Safety systems are switched
off.
Button does not light up: all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched
off.
Setting the warning frequency
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Lane Departure Warn."
5. Select the desired setting.
▷ "Always": the system issues a warning
whenever a hazardous situation is de‐
tected.
▷ "Reduced": some warnings are sup‐
pressed depending on the situation,
for instance during passing without a
turn signal or when purposely driving
over lane markings in curves.
▷ "Off": no warnings are issued.
The selected setting is stored for the driver
profile currently used.
Setting the force of the steering wheel
vibration
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Steering wheel vibration"
4. Select the desired setting.
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety
systems and stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Vehicles with side collision warning:
switching steering intervention on/off
The steering intervention can be switched on
and off separately for Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion and lane departure warning.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Steering intervention"
Seite 176
Controls Safety
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
The selected setting is stored for the driver
profile currently used.
Display in the instrument cluster
The system illuminates green: at least
one lane marking was detected and
warnings can be issued.
Warning function
If you leave the lane
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel vibrates in
accordance with the steering wheel vibration
setting.
If the turn signal is set before changing the
lane, a warning is not issued.
With side collision warning
If in the speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h
a lane marking is crossed, the system inter‐
venes with a brief active steering intervention
in addition to vibrating. The steering interven‐
tion helps keep the vehicle in the lane. The
steering intervention can be noticed on the
steering wheel and can be manually overridden
at any time.
End of warning
The warning is canceled in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
▷ When returning to your own lane.
▷ When braking hard.
▷ When using the turn signal.
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter‐
venes.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or
risk of damage to property. Follow the informa‐
tion regarding the system limits and actively
intervene, if needed.◀
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐
ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane
markings such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
ice, dirt or water.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by
objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, for instance from
the sun low in the sky.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield is dirty or covered in the area of
the interior mirror.
▷ If the camera has overheated and been
temporarily switched off due to excessively
high temperatures.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
A Check Control message is displayed when
the system is not fully functional.
Seite 177
Safety Controls
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Active Blind Spot Detection
Concept
Active Blind Spot Detection detects vehicles in
the blind spot or vehicles approaching from
behind in the adjacent lane. A warning is is‐
sued in various gradations in these situations.
General information
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the area behind and next to the vehicle when
traveling faster than a minimum speed.
The minimum speed is shown in the menu for
the Intelligent Safety systems.
The system indicates whether there are vehi‐
cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching
from behind in the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
The light in the exterior mirror lights up dim‐
med.
Before you change lanes after setting the turn
signal, the system issues a warning in the sit‐
uations described above.
The light in the exterior mirror flashes and the
steering wheel vibrates.
Vehicles with side collision warning: at speeds
between 45 mph/70 km/h and
130 mph/210 km/h, the system can intervene
with a brief active steering intervention and
help to return the vehicle into the lane.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traf‐
fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐
just driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.◀
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from personal responsibility. Due to system
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may
not be output or they may be output too late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traf‐
fic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety
Seite 178
Controls Safety
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the rear
bumper.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the ra‐
dar sensors clean and unobstructed.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The Active Blind Spot Detection is automati‐
cally activated after departure if the function
was switched on at the end of the last trip.
Switching on/off manually
Press button.
The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched
off, all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The indi‐
vidual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a set‐
ting is changed on the menu, all settings of the
menu are activated.
Press button repeatedly.
The following settings are switched
between:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for
the subfunctions.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on according to the individual
settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in‐
dividually switched off.
Press and hold this button.
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intel‐
ligent Safety systems are switched
off.
Button does not light up: all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched
off.
Setting the warning time
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Blind Spot Detection"
5. Select the desired setting.
"Off": With this setting, no warning is out‐
put.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the force of the steering wheel
vibration
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Steering wheel vibration"
4. Select the desired setting.
Seite 179
Safety Controls
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety
systems and stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Vehicles with side collision warning:
switching steering intervention on/off
The steering intervention can be switched on
and off separately for Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion and lane departure warning.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Steering intervention"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Warning function
Light in the exterior mirror
Prewarning
The dimmed light in the exterior mirror indi‐
cates when there are vehicles in the blind spot
or approaching from behind.
Acute warning
If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the
critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly
and the light in the exterior mirror flashes
brightly.
The warning stops when the turn signal is
switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the
critical zone.
With side collision warning
If at speeds between 45 mph/70 km/h and
130 mph/210 km/h the vibrating steering
wheel is ignored and the lane marking crossed,
the system intervenes with a brief active steer‐
ing intervention. The steering intervention
helps return the vehicle into the lane. The
steering intervention can be noticed on the
steering wheel and can be manually overridden
at any time.
Flashing of the light
A flashing of the light during vehicle unlocking
serves as system self-test.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or
risk of damage to property. Follow the informa‐
tion regarding the system limits and actively
intervene, if needed.◀
Upper speed limit
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
temporarily.
If the vehicle speed falls below approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system once again re‐
sponds according to the setting.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered,
for instance by stickers.
Seite 180
Controls Safety
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
▷ If cargo protrudes.
For vehicles with side collision warning, the
steering intervention can be limited, for in‐
stance in the following situation:
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐
ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane
markings such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
ice, dirt or water.
▷ When the lane markings are not white.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by
objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, for instance from
the sun low in the sky.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield is dirty or covered in the area of
the interior mirror.
▷ If the camera has overheated and been
temporarily switched off due to excessively
high temperatures.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
A Check Control message is displayed when
the system is not fully functional.
Displaying warnings
Depending on the selected warning settings,
for instance warning time, more warnings can
be displayed. However, there may also be an
excess of premature warnings of critical situa‐
tions.
Side collision warning
Concept
The system helps to avoid imminent side colli‐
sions.
General information
Four radar sensors in the bumpers monitor the
area next to the vehicle in the speed range
from approx. 45 mph/70 km/h to ap‐
prox. 130 mph/210 km/h.
The front camera determines the lane marking
positions.
If, for instance another vehicle is detected next
to the vehicle and if there is a risk of collision
with this vehicle, the system helps avoid the
collision via steering intervention.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traf‐
fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐
just driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.◀
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from personal responsibility. Due to system
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may
not be output or they may be output too late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traf‐
Seite 181
Safety Controls
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
fic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
Functional requirements
The camera must detect the lane markings for
the side collision warning with steering inter‐
vention to be active.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the bumpers.
Front bumper.
Rear bumper.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the ra‐
dar sensors clean and unobstructed.
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The side collision warning activates automati‐
cally after departure if the function was
switched on at the end of the last trip.
Switching on/off manually
Press button.
The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched
off, all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
Seite 182
Controls Safety
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
tems can be individually configured. The indi‐
vidual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a set‐
ting is changed on the menu, all settings of the
menu are activated.
Press button repeatedly.
The following settings are switched
between:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for
the subfunctions.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on according to the individual
settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in‐
dividually switched off.
Press and hold this button.
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intel‐
ligent Safety systems are switched
off.
Button does not light up: all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched
off.
Warning function
Light in the exterior mirror
If there is a risk of collision
If there is a risk of collision, the light in the ex‐
terior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vi‐
brates. An active steering intervention takes
place to prevent collisions and maintain the ve‐
hicle within its own lane. The steering interven‐
tion can be noticed on the steering wheel and
can be manually overridden at any time.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or
risk of damage to property. Follow the informa‐
tion regarding the system limits and actively
intervene, if needed.◀
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered,
for instance by stickers.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
Seite 183
Safety Controls
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐
ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane
markings such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
ice, dirt or water.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by
objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, for instance from
the sun low in the sky.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield is dirty or covered in the area of
the interior mirror.
▷ If the camera has overheated and been
temporarily switched off due to excessively
high temperatures.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
A Check Control message is displayed when
the system is not fully functional.
Rear collision prevention
Concept
The system reacts to vehicles approaching
from behind.
General information
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the area behind the vehicle.
If a vehicle approaches from the rear at a cer‐
tain speed, the system responds as follows:
▷ Active Protection, refer to page 185: if a
collision seems to be unavoidable, Pre‐
Crash functions are triggered.
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
The system is deactivated in the following sit‐
uations:
▷ When driving in reverse.
▷ If the trailer power socket is in use, e.g.,
during operation with trailer or bicycle rack.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traf‐
fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐
just driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.◀
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from personal responsibility. Due to system
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may
not be output or they may be output too late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traf‐
Seite 184
Controls Safety
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
fic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
Overview
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the rear
bumper.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the ra‐
dar sensors clean and unobstructed.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ When the approaching vehicle approaches
slowly.
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered,
for instance by stickers.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
Brake force display
Concept
Additional brake lamps indicate emergency
braking to the traffic behind. This can reduce
the risk of a rear-end collision.
General information
▷ During normal brake application, the outer
brake lights light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
brake lights additionally light up.
Active Protection
Concept
Active Protection prepares occupants and the
vehicle for a possible accident in critical driving
or collision situations.
General information
Active Protection consists of various PreCrash
functions, which can vary depending on the
equipment.
The system is used to detect certain critical
driving situations that might lead to an acci‐
dent. This includes the following critical driving
situations:
▷ Emergency stop.
▷ Severe understeering.
▷ Severe oversteering.
Certain functions of several systems can -
within the system limits - lead to Active Pro‐
tection triggering:
▷ Approach control warning with braking
function: automatic brake intervention.
▷ Approach control warning with braking
function: brake booster.
Seite 185
Safety Controls
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
▷ Night Vision with pedestrian and animal
detection: brake booster.
▷ Rear collision prevention: detection of im‐
minent rear collisions.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility. Due to the system limits,
critical situation could not be detected reliably
or in time. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.◀
Function
When the safety belt is fastened, the driver's
and passenger's belt straps are automatically
tightened once after driving away.
In accident-critical situations, the following in‐
dividual functions become active as needed:
▷ Automatic pretensioning of the front safety
belts.
▷ Automatic window closing up to a narrow
gap.
▷ Automatic closing of the glass sunroof, in‐
cluding sliding visor.
▷ Automatic closing of the panoramic glass
sunroof, including sliding visor.
▷ For vehicles equipped with comfort seats
in the front: automatic positioning of the
backrest for the front passenger seat.
▷ For vehicles equipped with comfort rear
seats: automatic positioning of the back‐
rests for the rear passenger seats.
After a critical driving situation without an acci‐
dent, the front safety belts are loosened again.
If the belt tension does not loosen automati‐
cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the safety
belt using the red button in the buckle. Fasten
the safety belt before continuing on your trip.
All other systems can be restored to the de‐
sired setting.
PostCrash – iBrake
Concept
In the event of an accident, the system can
bring the vehicle to a halt automatically without
intervention by the driver in certain situations.
This can reduce the risk of a further collision
and the consequences thereof.
At standstill
After coming to a halt, the brake is released
automatically.
Harder vehicle braking
It can be necessary to bring the vehicle in cer‐
tain situations to a halt quicker.
To do this, for a short time the braking pres‐
sure applied when stepping on the brake pedal
must be higher than the braking pressure ach‐
ieved by the automatic braking function. This
interrupts automatic braking.
Interrupting automatic braking
It can be necessary to interrupt automatic
braking in certain situations, for instance for an
evasive maneuver.
Interrupt automatic braking:
▷ By pressing the brake pedal.
▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal.
Alertness assistant
Concept
The system can detect decreasing alertness or
fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous
trips, e.g., on highways. In this situation, it is
recommended that the driver takes a break.
Seite 186
Controls Safety
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess one's physical
state. An increasing lack of alertness or fatigue
may not be detected or not be detected in
time. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure
that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust driv‐
ing style to traffic conditions.◀
Function
The system is switched on each time drive-
ready state is switched on.
After travel has begun, the system monitors
certain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that
decreasing alertness or fatigue can be de‐
tected.
This procedure takes the following criteria into
account:
▷ Personal driving style, for instance steering
behavior.
▷ Driving conditions, for instance length of
trip.
Starting at approx. 43 mph/70 km/h, the sys‐
tem is active and can also display a recom‐
mendation to take a break.
Break recommendation
Switching on/off, adjusting
The alertness assistant is active automatically
with each switching on of drive-ready state and
can thus display a break recommendation.
The break recommendation can also be
switched on or off and adjusted via iDrive.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Driver attention control"
4. Select the desired setting.
▷ "Off": no break recommendation is
made.
▷ "Standard": the break recommendation
is made with a defined value.
▷ "Sensitive": the break recommendation
is issued earlier.
Display
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a
message is displayed in the Control Display
with the recommendation to take a break.
During the display, the following settings can
be selected:
▷ "Do not ask again"
▷ "Places to stop"
▷ "Remind me later"
The break recommendation is repeated af‐
ter 20 minutes.
After a break, another recommendation to take
a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
mately 45 minutes.
System limits
The function may be limited in the following
situations, e.g., and will either output an incor‐
rect warning or no warning at all:
▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.
▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
▷ In active driving situations, such as when
changing lanes frequently.
▷ When the road surface is poor.
▷ In the event of strong side winds.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after
parking the vehicle, e.g., in the case of a break
during longer trips on highways.
Seite 187
Safety Controls
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Anti-lock Braking System
ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking.
The vehicle maintains its steering power even
during full brake applications, thus increasing
active safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, the system
automatically produces the greatest possible
braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐
tance to a minimum during emergency stop.
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided
by the Antilock Brake System ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the emergency stop.
Adaptive brake assistant
In combination with Active Cruise Control, this
system ensures that the brakes respond even
more rapidly when braking in critical situations.
Drive-off assistant
Concept
This system supports driving off on inclines.
Driving away
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐
out delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
After the accelerator pedal is depressed, the
vehicle is held until it is driven off.
Depending on the vehicle loading, the vehicle
may roll back slightly.
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
Concept
Within the physical limits, the system helps to
keep the vehicle on a steady course by reduc‐
ing engine speed and by braking the individual
wheels.
General information
DSC detects the following unstable driving
conditions, for instance:
▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.
▷ Loss of traction of the front wheels, which
can lead to understeering.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐
Seite 188
Controls Driving stability control systems
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
not independently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
When driving with roof load, e.g., with
roof-mounted luggage rack, driving safety may
not be ensured in driving-critical situations due
to the elevated center of gravity. There is a risk
of accidents or risk of property damage. Do not
deactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC
when driving with roof load.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
DSC OFF
Deactivating/activating DSC
General information
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is
reduced during acceleration and when driving
in curves.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
Hold the button down until DSC OFF
is displayed in the instrument cluster
and the DSC OFF indicator lamp is illuminated.
Activating DSC
Press button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
lamp go out.
Display
In the instrument cluster
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is
deactivated.
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
trols the drive and braking forces.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has
malfunctioned.
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control
Concept
DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stability
Control where forward momentum is opti‐
mized.
The system ensures maximum headway on
special road conditions or loose road surfaces,
for instance unplowed snowy roads, but with
somewhat limited driving stability.
General information
When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐
mum traction. Driving stability is limited during
acceleration and when driving in curves.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC in
the following situations:
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
Seite 189
Driving stability control systems Controls
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or
driving off from loose ground.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
DSC OFF
Activating/deactivating DTC
Activating DTC
Press button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC
OFF lights up.
Deactivating DTC
Press button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐
tor lamp go out.
Display
Display in the instrument cluster
If DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator lamp lights up: DTC is
activated.
Automatic program change
The system automatically switches to "DSC
ON" in the following situations:
▷ If Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go
function ACC is activated.
▷ On a braking intervention by the Intelligent
Safety systems.
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
xDrive
Concept
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of the ve‐
hicle. The interaction of xDrive and DSC Dy‐
namic Stability Control further optimizes trac‐
tion and driving dynamics. xDrive variably
distributes the driving forces to the front and
rear axles as demanded by the driving situation
and road surface.
Integral Active Steering
Concept
Integral Active Steering is a combination of Ac‐
tive Steering and rear axle steering.
The variable steering ratio amplifies the steer‐
ing angle when maneuvering, thus making the
steering more direct. The rear axle steering
acts to increase maneuverability at low speeds
by turning the rear wheels slightly in the oppo‐
site direction to the front wheels.
At higher speeds, the rear wheels are turned in
the same direction as the front wheels. This re‐
sults in, for instance better directional stability
and a more harmonious change of direction.
In critical driving situations, the Integral Active
Steering can stabilize the vehicle through pur‐
poseful steering of the rear wheels before the
driver intervenes, for instance in case of over‐
steering.
Seite 190
Controls Driving stability control systems
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
General information
The system offers several different tunings.
Driving mode Integral Active Steering
COMFORT
ECO PRO
comfortable, for optimal
travel comfort
SPORT dynamic, for greater agility
The different tunings are assigned to the dif‐
ferent driving modes of the Driving Dynamics
Control, refer to page 126.
Using snow chains
When snow chains are in use, refer to
page 302, rear wheel steering is deactivated.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, the steering
wheel must be turned further, while the vehicle
responds more sensitively to steering wheel
movements in the higher speed range.
The stability-enhancing intervention may be
deactivated.
Proceed cautiously and drive defensively.
Have the system checked by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Seite 191
Driving stability control systems Controls
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Driver assistance systems
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Cruise control
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed. The
system accelerates and brakes automatically
as needed.
General information
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise
control characteristic can change in certain
ranges. For instance, the acceleration in ECO
PRO driving mode is more gentle.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐
not independently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
The use of the system can lead to an in‐
creased risk of accidents in the following situa‐
tions, for instance:
▷ On winding roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet
conditions, or on a loose road surface.
There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to
property. Only use the system if driving at con‐
stant speed is possible.◀
WARNING
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
justed or called up by mistake. There is a risk
of an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Cruise control on/off, refer to
page 192.
Pause cruise control, refer to
page 192.
Continue cruise control with the last
setting, refer to page 194.
Store speed, refer to page 193.
Rocker switch: adjust speed, refer to
page 193.
Switching cruise control on/off
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
Seite 192
Controls Driver assistance systems
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
light up and the mark in the speedometer is set
to the current speed.
Cruise control is active. The current speed is
maintained and stored as desired speed.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on,
if necessary.
Switching off
Press button on the steering wheel.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Pausing cruise control
Interrupting manually
When active, press the button.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations, for example:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐
gaged.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated
or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deacti‐
vated.
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter‐
venes.
Setting the speed
Maintaining and storing the speed
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
The stored speed is displayed, refer to
page 194, in the speedometer and briefly in
the instrument cluster.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on,
if necessary.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a
button.
Press button.
Changing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
Seite 193
Driver assistance systems Controls
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the resistance point, the desired speed in‐
creases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the resistance point, the desired
speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/
10 km/h.
The maximum adjustable speed depends
on the vehicle and the set hybrid system
characteristic, refer to page 112.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐
ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐
celerates the vehicle without requiring
pressure on the accelerator pedal.
After the rocker switch is released, the ve‐
hicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
switch beyond the resistance point causes
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
Continuing cruise control
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐
tentional braking or accelerating may occur.
Press button with the system inter‐
rupted.
Cruise control is continued with the saved val‐
ues.
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Display in the speedometer
▷ Green marking: system is
active, the marking indicates
the desired speed.
▷ Orange/white marking: sys‐
tem is interrupted, the mark‐
ing indicates the stored
speed.
▷ No marking: system is switched off.
Indicator lamp
▷ Indicator lamp green: system is ac‐
tive.
▷ Gray indicator lamp: the system has
been interrupted.
▷ No indicator lamp: system is switched off.
Status display
The selected desired speed is hidden
after a brief time.
Displays in the Head-up Display
Some system information can also be dis‐
played in the Head-up Display.
The symbol is displayed when the set
desired speed is reached.
System limits
The desired speed is also maintained downhill.
The speed may not be maintained on uphill
grades if the engine power is insufficient.
In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may ex‐
ceed or drop below the set desired speed in
some situations, for instance on downhill or
uphill grades.
Seite 194
Controls Driver assistance systems
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Active Cruise Control with
Stop & Go function ACC
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed and a dis‐
tance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using
the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed on
clear roads. For this purpose, the vehicle ac‐
celerates or brakes automatically.
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system
adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the
set distance to the vehicle ahead is main‐
tained. The speed is adjusted as far as the
given situation allows.
General information
A radar sensor is located in the front bumper
and a camera on the interior mirror to detect
vehicles driving ahead of you.
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise
control characteristic can change in certain
ranges. For instance, the acceleration in ECO
PRO driving mode is more gentle.
The distance can be adjusted in several steps.
For safety reasons, it depends on the respec‐
tive speed.
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and
then proceeds to drive again within a brief pe‐
riod, the system is able to detect this within the
given system limits.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐
not independently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
chock.◀
WARNING
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
justed or called up by mistake. There is a risk
of an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
Risk of accident due to too high speed
differences to other vehicles, for instance in
the following situations:
▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving
vehicle.
▷ Suddenly swerving vehicle onto the own
lane.
▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.◀
Seite 195
Driver assistance systems Controls
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Cruise control on/off, refer to
page 197.
Store/maintain, refer to page 197,
speed.
Pause, refer to page 197, cruise
control.
Continue, refer to page 198, cruise
control with the last setting.
Without steering and lane control
assistant:
Increase, refer to page 198, dis‐
tance.
Without steering and lane control
assistant:
Reduce, refer to page 198, dis‐
tance.
With steering and lane control assis‐
tant:
Adjust, refer to page 198, distance.
Rocker switch:
Set, refer to page 197, speed.
With steering and lane control assis‐
tant:
Steering and lane control assistant
incl. Traffic Jam Assist on/off, refer
to page 201.
Radar sensor
The radar sensor is located in the front
bumper.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐
structed.
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Area of application
The system is best used on well-constructed
roads.
The minimum speed that can be set is
20 mph/30 km/h.
The maximum adjustable speed amounts to
115 mph/180 km/h when driving with the com‐
bustion engine.
The maximum adjustable speed amounts to
75 mph/120 km/h when driving with the elec‐
tric motor.
The system can also be activated when sta‐
tionary.
Seite 196
Controls Driver assistance systems
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
light up and the mark in the speedometer is set
to the current speed.
Cruise control is active. The current speed is
maintained and stored as desired speed.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on,
if necessary.
Switching off
To switch off the system while standing, step
on brake pedal at the same time.
Press button on the steering wheel.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Interrupting manually
When active, press the button on the
steering wheel.
If interrupting the system while stationary,
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐
gaged.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated
or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deacti‐
vated.
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter‐
venes.
▷ If the safety belt is unbuckled and the driv‐
er's door is opened while the vehicle is
standing still.
▷ If the system has not detected objects for
an extended period, for instance on a road
with very little traffic without curb or
shoulder markings.
▷ If the detection range of the radar is im‐
paired, for instance by dirt or heavy fog.
▷ After a longer stationary period when the
vehicle has been braked to a stop by the
system.
Setting the speed
Maintaining and storing the speed
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
The stored speed is displayed, refer to
page 198, in the speedometer and briefly in
the instrument cluster.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on,
if necessary.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a
button.
Press button.
Seite 197
Driver assistance systems Controls
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Changing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the resistance point, the desired speed in‐
creases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the resistance point, the desired
speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/
10 km/h.
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
action.
Adjusting distance
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility. Due to the system limits,
braking can be late. There is a risk of accidents
or risk of damage to property. Be aware to the
traffic situation at all times. Adjust the distance
to the traffic and weather conditions and main‐
tain the prescribed safety distance, possibly by
braking.◀
Without steering and lane control
assistant: reducing distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐
tance, refer to page 199.
Without steering and lane control
assistant: increasing distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐
tance, refer to page 199.
With steering and lane control
assistant: adjusting distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
Continuing cruise control
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐
tentional braking or accelerating may occur.
Press button with the system inter‐
rupted.
Cruise control is continued with the saved val‐
ues.
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Display in the speedometer
▷ Green marking: system is
active, the marking indicates
the desired speed.
▷ Orange/white marking: sys‐
tem is interrupted, the mark‐
ing indicates the stored
speed.
Seite 198
Controls Driver assistance systems
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
▷ No marking: system is switched off.
Status display
The selected desired speed is hidden
after a brief time.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
Selected distance to the vehicle ahead of you
is shown.
Symbol Description
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
Distance 4
This value is set automatically
after the system is switched
on.
System interrupted.
No distance control display, as
the accelerator pedal is being
pressed.
Detected vehicle
Symbol Description
Green symbol:
A vehicle has been detected
ahead of you. The system
maintains the set distance to
the vehicle in front.
As soon as the detected vehicle drives off, the
vehicle symbol in the distance indicator will
move away.
To accelerate, activate ACC by briefly stepping
on the accelerator pedal or pressing the rocker
switch.
Indicator/warning lights
Symbol Description
Vehicle symbol flashes:
The conditions are not ade‐
quate for the system to work.
The system was deactivated
but applies the brakes until you
actively resume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal.
The vehicle symbol and dis‐
tance bars flash red and an
acoustic signal sounds:
Brake and make an evasive
maneuver, if necessary.
Displays in the Head-up Display
Desired speed
Some system information can also be dis‐
played in the Head-up Display.
The symbol is displayed when the set
desired speed is reached.
Seite 199
Driver assistance systems Controls
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Distance information
The symbol is displayed when the dis‐
tance from the vehicle traveling ahead
is too short.
The distance information is active in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ Active Cruise Control switched off.
▷ Display in the Head-up Display selected,
refer to page 147.
▷ Distance too short.
▷ Speed greater than approx.
40 mph/70 km/h.
System limits
Detection range
The detection capacity of the system and the
automatic braking capacity are limited.
Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not
be detected.
Deceleration
The system also does not decelerate in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving
road users.
▷ For red traffic lights.
▷ For cross traffic.
▷ For oncoming traffic.
Swerving vehicles
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected
until it is completely within the same lane as
your vehicle.
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
tance. It may not be possible to restore the se‐
lected distance in certain situations, including
if you are driving significantly faster than vehi‐
cles driving ahead of you, for instance when
rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehicle
driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the
system requests that the driver intervene by
braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if
needed.
Cornering
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐
not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive
into a curve at an appropriate speed.
The system has a limited detection range. Sit‐
uations can arise in tight curves where a vehi‐
Seite 200
Controls Driver assistance systems
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
cle driving ahead will not be detected or will be
detected very late.
When you approach a curve the system may
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to
the bend of the curve. If the system deceler‐
ates you may compensate it by briefly acceler‐
ating. After releasing the accelerator pedal the
system is reactivated and controls speed inde‐
pendently.
Driving away
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off
automatically; for example:
▷ On steep inclines.
▷ From bumps in the road.
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under un‐
favorable weather or light conditions:
▷ Poorer vehicle recognition.
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that
are already recognized.
Examples of unfavorable weather or light con‐
ditions:
▷ Wet conditions.
▷ Snowfall.
▷ Slush.
▷ Fog.
▷ Glare.
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for
instance by braking, steering or evading.
Engine power
The desired speed is also maintained downhill.
The speed may not be maintained on uphill
grades if the engine power is insufficient.
In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may in‐
tentionally exceed or drop below the set de‐
sired speed in some situations, for instance on
downhill or uphill grades.
Malfunction
The system cannot be activated if the radar
sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be
caused by damage incurred, e.g., during park‐
ing.
A Check Control message is displayed if the
system fails.
Have the system checked by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
The function for detecting and responding
when approaching stationary vehicles may be
limited in the following situations:
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If the camera is malfunctioning or dirty. A
Check Control message is displayed.
Steering and lane control
assistant
Concept
The system assists the driver in keeping the
vehicle within the lane. For this purpose, the
system executes supporting steering move‐
ments, for instance when driving in a curve.
Seite 201
Driver assistance systems Controls
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
General information
The system determines the position of the
lane markings and the vehicle driving ahead
using five radar sensors and a camera.
Depending on the speed, the system orients it‐
self according to the lane markings or vehicles
in front.
Sensors on the steering wheel detect whether
the steering wheel is being touched.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐
not independently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
Overview
Button on the steering wheel
Button Function
Switch steering and lane control as‐
sistant incl. Traffic Jam Assist on/off,
refer to page 203.
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the bumpers.
Front center bumper.
Front side bumper.
Rear bumper.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the ra‐
dar sensors clean and unobstructed.
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Functional requirements
The following functional requirements must be
met for the system:
▷ Speed below 130 mph/210 km/h.
Seite 202
Controls Driver assistance systems
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
▷ Sufficient lane width.
▷ Above approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane
marking on both sides is detected.
▷ Below approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane
marking on both sides or a vehicle driving
ahead is detected.
▷ Hands on the steering wheel rim.
▷ Wide curves.
▷ Drive in the center of the lane.
▷ Turn signal not actuated.
▷ Camera calibration immediately after vehi‐
cle delivery is completed.
Switching on/off
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
Steering wheel symbol lights up gray.
The system is on standby and does not
manipulate steering.
System activates automatically as soon as all
function conditions are fulfilled, refer to
page 202.
Steering wheel symbol lights up green.
The system is active.
With the system switched on, the person
warning with City braking function and the side
collision warning are active.
Switching off
Press button on the steering wheel.
The indicator goes out.
The system does not perform supportive
steering wheel movements.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ At a speed above 130 mph/210 km/h.
▷ When the steering wheel is released.
▷ When you manipulate steering.
▷ When you leave your own lane.
▷ When the turn signal is on.
▷ When the lane is too narrow.
▷ If for a particular time no lane marking is
detected and there is no vehicle driving in
front.
Steering wheel symbol lights up gray.
The system is on standby and does not
manipulate steering.
System activates automatically as soon as all
function conditions are fulfilled, refer to
page 202.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Symbol Description
Gray steering wheel symbol:
The system is on standby.
Green steering wheel symbol:
The system is activated.
Yellow steering wheel symbol,
flashing:
The system is about to crash.
Green steering wheel symbol
and lane marking:
The system supports the driver
in keeping the vehicle within
the lane.
Seite 203
Driver assistance systems Controls
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Symbol Description
Green steering wheel symbol,
gray lane marking:
No lane marking detected or
vehicle outside of lane mark‐
ing.
Outside of the lane marking,
steering support continues to‐
ward the center of the lane.
If a lane marking is not de‐
tected, the vehicle follows the
vehicle ahead.
Yellow steering wheel symbol:
The hands are not grasping the
steering wheel. The system is
still active.
Red steering wheel symbol
and a signal sounds, if applica‐
ble:
The hands are not grasping the
steering wheel. System inter‐
rupted.
The system does not perform
supportive steering wheel
movements.
The system reduces the speed
depending on the equipment
configuration.
Displays in the Head-up Display
All system information can also be displayed in
the Head-up Display.
System limits
General information
The system cannot be activated or meaning‐
fully used in certain situations.
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or
risk of damage to property. Follow the informa‐
tion regarding the system limits and actively
intervene, if needed.◀
Hands on the steering wheel
The sensors cannot detect hand-steering
wheel contact in the following situations:
▷ Driving with gloves.
▷ Protective covers on the steering wheel.
Narrow lanes
When driving within narrow lanes, the system
cannot be activated or effectively used, for in‐
stance in the following situations:
▷ In construction areas.
▷ In rescue lanes.
▷ Within city limits.
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under un‐
favorable weather or light conditions:
▷ Poorer vehicle recognition.
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that
are already recognized.
Examples of unfavorable weather or light con‐
ditions:
▷ Wet conditions.
▷ Snowfall.
▷ Slush.
▷ Fog.
▷ Glare.
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for
instance by braking, steering or evading.
Seite 204
Controls Driver assistance systems
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
PDC Park Distance Control
Concept
PDC is a support when parking. Objects that
you are approaching slowly in front of or be‐
hind the vehicle are indicated with:
▷ Signal tones.
▷ Visual display.
With parking assistant: obstacles on the side of
the vehicle that are detected by the sensors of
the parking assistant, may also be reported by
the side protection function, refer to page 207.
General information
The ultrasound sensors for distance measure‐
ments are located in the bumpers and possibly
on the sides of the vehicle.
The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐
stacle and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im‐
pending collision at a distance to the object of
approx. 27 in/70 cm.
For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic
warning is already issued at a distance to the
object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐
not independently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
WARNING
Due to high speeds when PDC Park Dis‐
tance Control is activated, the warning can be
delayed due to physical circumstances. There
is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid
driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol is not yet active.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Ultrasound sensors
Ultrasound sensors of the PDC,
for instance in the bumpers.
Functional requirements
Ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with
stickers, bicycle racks.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system switches on automatically in the
following situations:
▷ If selector lever position R is engaged
when the engine is running.
▷ While approaching detected obstacles if
the speed is slower than approx.
2.5 mph/4 km/h. The activation distance
depends on the situation in question.
Seite 205
Driver assistance systems Controls
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
You may switch automatic activation on and off
when obstacles are detected.
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Parking"
4. "Automatic PDC activation": only with re‐
spective equipment.
5. "Automatic PDC activation"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Depending on equipment, an additional cam‐
era view is also switched on.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Switching on/off manually
Press park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the
reverse gear is engaged when pressing the
park assistance button.
WARNING
Signal tones
General information
When approaching an object, an intermittent
sound indicates the position of the object. E.g.,
if an object is detected to the left rear of the
vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear
speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
If there are objects in front of and behind the
vehicle at the same time, with a distance
smaller than approx. 10 in/25 cm, an alternat‐
ing constant tone will sound.
The intermittent tone and constant tone are
switched off if the selector lever position P is
engaged.
The intermittent tone is switched off after a
short time when the vehicle is stationary.
Volume
The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the
entertainment volume can be adjusted.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Tone"
4. "Volume settings"
5. "PDC"
6. Set the desired value.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object is
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
farther away are already displayed on the Con‐
trol Display before a signal sounds.
Seite 206
Controls Driver assistance systems
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
The display appears as soon as PDC is acti‐
vated.
The range of the sensors is represented in the
colors green, yellow and red.
Pathway lines are faded in for better estimation
of the required space.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, the switch can be made to PDC or to a
different view with obstacle markings as
needed:
"Rear view camera"
Crossing traffic warning, refer to page 223:
depending on the equipment, it is warned in
the PDC display against vehicles approaching
in the front or rear from the side.
With parking assistant: emergency
braking function, Active PDC
Concept
The emergency braking function of PDC ini‐
tiates an emergency braking in case of acute
risk of collision.
General information
Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre‐
vented under all circumstances.
The function is available from walking speed
while backing up or rolling backward.
A press of the accelerator pedal interrupts the
braking intervention.
After emergency braking to a stop, further
creeping toward an obstacle is possible. To
creep toward the obstacle, lightly press the ac‐
celerator pedal and release it again.
If the accelerator pedal is heavily depressed,
the vehicle drives off as usual. Manual braking
is possible at any time.
The system uses the ultrasound sensors of
PDC and parking assistant.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driv‐
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and
vehicle surroundings closely and actively inter‐
vene where appropriate.◀
Activating/deactivating the system
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Parking"
4. "Active PDC with braking interv."
5. "Active PDC with braking interv."
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
System limits
The system cannot be used in the following
situations, for example:
▷ When driving with a trailer.
If required, deactivate the system via iDrive
where applicable.
With parking assistant: side
protection
Concept
The system warns of obstacles on the side of
the vehicle.
General information
The system uses the ultrasound sensors of
PDC and parking assistant.
Seite 207
Driver assistance systems Controls
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Display
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
markings are displayed on the vehicle at the
sides.
▷ Color markings: warning against detected
obstacles.
▷ Gray markings, hatched area: no obstacles
were detected.
▷ No markings, black area: the area next to
the vehicle was not yet captured.
Limits of side protection
The system only displays stationary obstacles
that were previously detected by sensors while
passing them.
The system does not detect whether an obsta‐
cle moves later on. If the vehicle is stationary,
the markings are shown in black after a certain
time. The area next to the vehicle must be
newly captured.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or
risk of damage to property. Follow the informa‐
tion regarding the system limits and actively
intervene, if needed.◀
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measurements might not function in
the following situations:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for in‐
stance coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, for instance from passing vehicles
or loud machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
aged or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, wet conditions,
snowfall, extreme heat, or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges.
▷ With objects with corners, edges, and
smooth surfaces.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ With small and low objects, for instance
boxes.
▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of
the lane.
▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in
foam material.
▷ With plants and bushes.
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
curbs, can move into the blind area of the
sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds.
▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter
of the vehicle is not taken into account by
the system.
Seite 208
Controls Driver assistance systems
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
False warnings
The system may issue a warning under the fol‐
lowing conditions even though there is no ob‐
stacle within the detection range:
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered
with ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed
bumps.
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, for instance in underground
garages.
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ Due to heavy exhaust.
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, for in‐
stance sweeping machines, high pressure
steam cleaners or neon lights.
If necessary, switch off, refer to page 205, au‐
tomatic PDC activation on obstacle detection,
for instance in vehicle washes, to reduce false
alarms.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
White symbol is displayed, and the
range of the sensors is dimmed on the
Control Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Without Surround View:
rearview camera
Concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control
Display.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driv‐
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and
vehicle surroundings closely and actively inter‐
vene where appropriate.◀
Overview
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly:
button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Camera
The camera lens is located in the handle of the
tailgate.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If
necessary, clean the camera lens.
Seite 209
Driver assistance systems Controls
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is switched on automatically if se‐
lector lever position R is engaged when the en‐
gine is running.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly:
switching on/off manually
Press park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
PDC Park Distance Control is shown on the
Control Display.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the
reverse gear is engaged when pressing the
park assistance button.
Switching the view via iDrive
With PDC Park Distance Control activated:
"Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Functional requirements
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The tailgate is fully closed.
▷ Keep the recording range of the camera
clear. Protruding cargo or carrier systems
and trailers that are not connected to a
trailer power socket can restrict the visibil‐
ity range of the camera.
Assistance functions
General information
More than one assistance function can be ac‐
tive at the same time.
The assistance functions can be manually acti‐
vated.
▷ "Parking aid lines"
Pathway lines and turning radius lines are
displayed, refer to page 210.
▷ "Obstacle marking"
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, the
obstacles detected by PDC Park Distance
Control are displayed, refer to page 211,
by markings.
Parking aid lines
Pathway lines
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space
required when parking and maneuvering on
level roads.
Pathway lines depend on the steering angle
and are continuously adjusted to the steering
wheel movements.
Seite 210
Controls Driver assistance systems
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Turning radius lines
Turning radius lines can only be superimposed
on the camera image together with pathway
lines.
Turning radius lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level
road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an‐
gle.
Parking using pathway and turning radius
lines
1.
Position the vehicle so that the red turning
radius line leads to within the limits of the
parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the green pathway line covers the corre‐
sponding turning radius line.
Obstacle marking
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, obsta‐
cles behind the vehicle are detected by the
PDC Park Distance Control sensors.
Obstacle markings can be faded into the image
of the rearview camera.
The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark‐
ings match the markings of the PDC Park Dis‐
tance Control.
Setting brightness and contrast via
iDrive
With the rearview camera switched on:
1. Move the controller to the left.
2.
▷ "Brightness"
▷ "Contrast"
3. Set the desired value.
System limits
Deactivated camera
If the camera is deactivated, for instance if the
tailgate is open, the camera image is displayed
hatched in gray.
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, some
assistance functions also consider data from
PDC Park Distance Control.
Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance
Control chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Do not esti‐
mate the distance from the objects on the dis‐
play.
Surround View
Concept
The system provides assistance in parking and
maneuvering. The area around the vehicle is
shown on the Control Display.
Seite 211
Driver assistance systems Controls
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
General information
Several cameras capture the area from differ‐
ent selectable perspectives. In addition, assis‐
tance functions, for instance guidelines, can be
faded into the display.
The following camera perspectives can be dis‐
played:
▷ Automatic camera perspective, refer to
page 213: the system shows the camera
perspective suitable for the respective
driving situation.
▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 213: for
representing the areas behind the vehicle.
▷ Right-hand and left-hand side view, refer
to page 215: for representing the areas on
the sides of the vehicle.
▷ Camera perspective movable via iDrive, re‐
fer to page 213.
▷ Panorama View, refer to page 216: to
present cross traffic, for instance at junc‐
tions and driveways, depending on the cur‐
rently engaged gear.
Depending on the view, the environment
around the vehicle or a part of it is depicted.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driv‐
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and
vehicle surroundings closely and actively inter‐
vene where appropriate.◀
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Panorama View
Cameras
Front camera
Rearview camera
Seite 212
Controls Driver assistance systems
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
One camera is located at the bottom of each
exterior mirror housing.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt on
the camera lenses. If required, clean the cam‐
era lenses.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is switched on automatically if se‐
lector lever position R is engaged when the en‐
gine is running.
The camera perspective suitable for the re‐
spective driving situation is displayed.
Switching on/off manually
Press park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The rearview camera cannot be switched off if
the reverse gear is engaged.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Camera perspective
Overview
1 Function bar
2 Selection window
3 Side view
4 Automatic camera perspective
5 Movable camera perspective
6 Camera image
7 Rearview camera
Selection window
The individual camera perspectives can be se‐
lected in the selection window via iDrive.
Side view
The side view can be selected for the right or
left vehicle side.
This view helps when positioning the vehicle at
the curb or with other obstacles on the side by
displaying the side surroundings.
The side view looks from rear to front and in
case of danger, focuses automatically on pos‐
sible obstacles.
Automatic camera perspective
The automatic camera perspective shows a
steering-dependent view in the respective
driving direction.
This perspective adapts to the respective driv‐
ing situation.
As soon as obstacles are detected, the view
changes to a fixed display of the area in front or
Seite 213
Driver assistance systems Controls
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
at the rear behind the bumper or, if necessary,
changes to a side view.
When reverse gear is engaged, the automatic
camera perspective is closed and the system
uses a fixed perspective of the rearview cam‐
era. If necessary, manually select the auto‐
matic camera perspective when reverse gear is
engaged. The automatic camera perspective
will be retained for the current parking maneu‐
ver.
Movable camera perspective
With selection of the movable camera per‐
spective, a circle appears on the Control Dis‐
play.
By turning the Controller or via touch function,
specified perspectives on the circle can be se‐
lected.
The current perspective is marked with a cam‐
era symbol.
With BMW Gesture Control: the movable cam‐
era perspective can be moved around the cir‐
cle using BMW Gesture Control, refer to
page 32.
To leave the circle, move the Controller side‐
ways and press or tap the active camera sym‐
bol via the touchscreen.
Rearview camera
This view shows the picture of the rearview
camera.
Function bar
Assistance functions, refer to page 214, can
be activated via the function bar and settings
applied.
▷ "Parking Assistant", refer to page 218.
▷ "Brightness", refer to page 217.
▷ "Contrast", refer to page 217.
▷ "Parking aid lines", refer to page 214.
▷ "Obstacle marking", refer to page 215.
▷ "Car wash", refer to page 215.
▷ "Settings": apply settings, for instance
to use the activation points for Panorama
View.
Assistance functions
General information
More than one assistance function can be ac‐
tive at the same time.
The following assistance functions can be
manually activated:
▷ "Parking aid lines"
▷ "Obstacle marking"
▷ "Car wash"
The following assistance functions are auto‐
matically displayed:
▷ Side protection, refer to page 215.
▷ Door opening angle, refer to page 216.
Parking aid lines
Pathway lines
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space
required when parking and maneuvering on
level roads.
Pathway lines depend on the steering angle
and are continuously adjusted to the steering
wheel movements.
Seite 214
Controls Driver assistance systems
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Turning radius lines
Turning radius lines can only be superimposed
on the camera image together with pathway
lines.
Turning radius lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level
road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an‐
gle.
Parking using pathway and turning radius
lines
1.
Position the vehicle so that the red turning
radius line leads to within the limits of the
parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the green pathway line covers the corre‐
sponding turning radius line.
Obstacle marking
Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by
the PDC Park Distance Control sensors.
Obstacle markings can be shown in the cam‐
era image.
The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark‐
ings match the markings of the PDC Park Dis‐
tance Control.
Vehicle wash view
The vehicle wash view assists when entering a
vehicle wash by displaying the floor and the
vehicle's own track.
Side protection
Concept
The system warns of obstacles on the side of
the vehicle.
Display
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
markings are displayed on the vehicle at the
sides.
▷ No markings: no obstacles were detected.
▷ Color markings: warning against detected
obstacles.
Seite 215
Driver assistance systems Controls
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Limits of side protection
The system only displays stationary obstacles
that were previously detected by sensors while
passing them.
The system does not detect whether an obsta‐
cle moves later on. For this reason, at stand‐
still, the markings are not shown anymore in
the display after a certain time. The area next
to the vehicle must be newly captured.
Door opening angle
Concept
The system indicates fixed obstacles that ob‐
struct the opening angles of the doors.
The system does not provide a warning of ap‐
proaching traffic.
The maximum opening angle of the doors is
displayed in selector lever position P.
As soon as the vehicle begins moving, the
opening angles are replaced by parking aid
lines.
Limits of the display
The vehicle surroundings are displayed with
distorted image for technical reasons.
Even if the symbols for the door opening an‐
gles do not cross other objects on the Control
Display, the following needs to be noted when
parking next to other objects:
Because of the perspective, higher, protruding
objects may be closer than they appear on the
Control Display.
Panorama View
Concept
The system provides an early look at cross
traffic at blind driveways and intersections.
General information
Road users concealed by obstacles to the left
and right of the vehicle can only be detected
relatively late from the driver's seat. The cam‐
eras in the front and rear capture the sideways
traffic area to improve the view.
Yellow lines in the screen display mark the
front and rear end of the vehicle.
The camera image shows different levels of
distortion in some areas and is thus not suita‐
ble for distance estimations.
Display on the Control Display
Press the button when the engine is run‐
ning.
Depending on the driving direction, the image
of the respective camera is displayed:
▷ "front": front camera image.
▷ "rear": rear camera image.
If the vehicle is appropriately equipped, the
crossing traffic warning, refer to page 223, can
additionally warn against oncoming vehicles
using radar sensors.
Seite 216
Controls Driver assistance systems
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
With navigation system: activation
points
Concept
Positions at which Panorama View is to switch
on automatically can be stored as activation
points as soon as a GPS signal is received.
General information
Up to ten activation points can be stored.
Activation points can be used when driving for‐
ward for the front camera.
Storing activation points
1.
Drive to the position at which the system is
to be switched on, and stop.
2.
Press button.
3. Move the Controller to the left.
4. "Add activation point"
The current position is displayed.
5. "Add activation point"
Activation points are, if possible, stored with
town/city and street address, or else with the
GPS coordinates.
Using activation points
The use of activation points can be switched
on and off.
1. Press button.
2. Move the Controller to the left.
3. "Settings"
4. "Panorama view, GPS-based"
5. "Panorama view, GPS-based"
Displaying activation points
1. Press button.
2. Move the Controller to the left.
3. "Show activation points"
A list of all activation points is displayed.
Renaming or deleting activation points
1.
Press button.
2. Move the Controller to the left.
3. "Show activation points"
A list of all activation points is displayed.
4. Select an activation point as needed.
5.
▷ "Rename"
▷ "Delete this activation point"
▷ "Delete all activation points"
Setting brightness and contrast
Brightness and contrast can be adjusted with
Surround View or Panorama View switched on.
Via iDrive:
1.
Move the controller to the left.
2.
▷ "Brightness"
▷ "Contrast"
3. Set the desired value.
Functional limitations
The system can be used only to a limited ex‐
tent in the following situations:
▷ In poor light.
▷ In case of soiled cameras.
▷ With a door open.
▷ With the tailgate open.
▷ With exterior mirrors folded in.
Gray hatched areas with symbol, for instance
open door, in the camera image mark areas
that are currently not displayed.
System limits
Non-visible areas
Because of the camera angle, the areas under
the vehicle cannot be viewed by the cameras.
Seite 217
Driver assistance systems Controls
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
Some assistance functions also consider data
from the PDC Park Distance Control.
Follow, refer to page 205, the notes in the PDC
Park Distance Control chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Do not esti‐
mate the distance from the objects on the dis‐
play.
Malfunction
A camera malfunction is displayed on the Con‐
trol Display.
A yellow symbol is displayed and the
recording range of the malfunctioning
camera is displayed in black on the
Control Display.
Remote 3D View
Concept
Using the BMW Connected App and the cam‐
era images from Surround View, the vehicle
surroundings can be displayed on a mobile de‐
vice, for instance a smartphone.
The function displays a momentary view of the
situation.
Functional requirements
▷ Data transmission must be activated, refer
to page 43.
▷ BMW Connected App must be installed on
the mobile device.
Switching the function on/off
Using iDrive:
1.
With the standby state switched on: "My
Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Data privacy"
4. "Remote 3D View"
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
▷ In poor light.
▷ In case of soiled cameras.
▷ With a door or the tailgate open. Dark fields
in the display indicate areas that are not re‐
corded by the system.
▷ With exterior mirrors folded in.
▷ When other camera functions are being
performed in the vehicle.
▷ When the vehicle moves faster than walk‐
ing speed.
▷ It may not be possible to use the function
in every country.
▷ For reasons of data protection, the func‐
tion can only be used three times within
two hours.
Parking assistant
Concept
The system supports parking in the following
situations:
▷ When parking parallel to the road, parallel
parking.
▷ When reverse parking diagonally to the
road, diagonal parking.
Seite 218
Controls Driver assistance systems
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
General information
Handling
Parking assistant handling is divided into three
steps:
▷ Switching on and activating.
▷ Parking space search.
▷ Parking.
System status and instructions on required ac‐
tions are displayed on the Control Display.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces
on both sides of the vehicle.
Steptronic transmission
The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐
sible parking line and takes control of the fol‐
lowing functions during the parking procedure:
▷ Steering.
▷ Accelerating and braking.
▷ Changing the gears.
Press and hold the park assistance button for
the duration of the parking procedure. Parking
is automatic.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐
not independently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
NOTE
The parking assistant can steer the vehi‐
cle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
The safety information of the PDC Park Dis‐
tance Control, refer to page 205, applies in ad‐
dition.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Ultrasound sensors
With the four side ultrasound sensors, arrows,
and the ultrasound sensors of PDC Park Dis‐
tance Control in the bumpers, the parking
spaces are measured and the distances to ob‐
stacles determined.
Functional requirements
Ultrasound sensors
Ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with
stickers.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
For measuring parking spaces
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
Seite 219
Driver assistance systems Controls
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Suitable parking space
General information:
▷ Gap behind an object that has a min. length
of 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
Parallel parking to the road:
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects:
your vehicle's length plus approx.
2.6 ft/0.8 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
Diagonal parking:
▷ Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle's
width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m.
▷ Minimum depth: your vehicle's length.
The depth of diagonal parking spaces must
be estimated by the driver. Due to techni‐
cal limitations, the system is only able to
approximate the depth of diagonal parking
spaces.
For parking
▷ Doors and tailgate are closed.
▷ The parking brake is released.
▷ Driver's safety belt is fastened.
Switching on and activating
Switching on with the button
Press park assistance button.
The LED lights up.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated automatically.
Switching on with reverse gear
Shift into reverse.
The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
To activate: "Parking Assistant"
Display on the Control Display
System activated/deactivated
Symbol Meaning
Gray: the system is not available.
White: the system is available but
not activated.
The system is activated.
Parking space search and system
status
▷ Symbol P on the vehicle image: the parking
assistant is activated and the parking
space search is active.
▷ Control Display shows suitable parking
spaces at the edge of the road next to the
vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant
is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐
lighted in color and a signal sounds. Switch
signal tone on/off, refer to page 222.
▷ If a diagonal or parallel parking space is
clearly detected, the system automatically
adjusts the suitable parking method. In the
case of parking spaces suitable for parallel
and diagonal parking, a selection menu is
displayed. In this case, the desired parking
method must be selected manually.
Seite 220
Controls Driver assistance systems
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
▷ The parking procedure is ac‐
tive. Steering control has
been taken over by system.
▷ Parking space search is always active
whenever the vehicle is moving forward
slow and straight, even if the system is de‐
activated. When the system is deactivated,
the displays on the Control Display are
shown in gray.
Parking using the parking assistant
Parking
1. Press the park assistance button or
shift into reverse gear to switch on, refer to
page 220, the parking assistant. Activate
the parking assistant, if needed.
Parking assistant is activated.
2. Drive by the row of parked vehicles at a
speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h
and at a distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.
The status of the parking space search and
possible parking spaces are displayed on
the Control Display, refer to page 220.
3. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
Press and hold the park assistance button
for the duration of the parking procedure.
At the end of the parking procedure, the P
selector lever position is set.
The end of the parking procedure is indi‐
cated on the Control Display.
4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
needed.
Interrupting manually
The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
time:
▷ Steptronic transmission: release the
park assistance button during the
parking procedure.
▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol
on the Control Display.
Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in the
following situations:
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or
takes over steering.
▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road
surfaces.
▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to
overcome, such as curbs.
▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly
appear.
▷ If the PDC Park Distance Control displays
clearances that are too small.
▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts
or the time taken for parking is exceeded.
▷ When switching to another function on the
Control Display.
▷ When the park assistance button is re‐
leased.
▷ If the tailgate is open.
▷ If doors are open.
▷ When setting the parking brake.
▷ During acceleration.
▷ When the brake pedal remains pressed for
an extended period while the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.
▷ When unfastening the driver's safety belt.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Resuming
An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐
tinued, if needed.
Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to
page 220, and follow the instructions on the
Control Display.
Seite 221
Driver assistance systems Controls
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Switching off
The system can be switched off manually:
Press park assistance button.
Switching signal tone for suitable
parking spaces on/off
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Parking"
4. "Parking Assistant"
5. "Sound if parking space detected"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or
risk of damage to property. Follow the informa‐
tion regarding the system limits and actively
intervene, if needed.◀
No parking assistance
The parking assistant does not offer assis‐
tance in the following situations:
▷ In tight curves.
▷ For diagonal parking spaces.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
▷ On slippery ground.
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
parking space.
▷ With a mounted emergency wheel.
▷ In case of changes to an already-measured
parking space.
▷ With ditches or edges, e.g., an edge of a
port.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measurements might not function in
the following situations:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for in‐
stance coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, for instance from passing vehicles
or loud machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
aged or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, wet conditions,
snowfall, extreme heat, or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges.
▷ With objects with corners, edges, and
smooth surfaces.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ With small and low objects, for instance
boxes.
▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of
the lane.
▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in
foam material.
▷ With plants and bushes.
Seite 222
Controls Driver assistance systems
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
curbs, can move into the blind area of the
sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds.
▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter
of the vehicle is not taken into account by
the system.
Parking spaces that are not suitable may be
detected or suitable parking spaces may not
be detected at all.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
checked by a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Crossing traffic warning
Concept
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the area behind the vehicle.
At blind driveways or when driving out of diag‐
onal parking spaces, approaching cross traffic
is detected sooner by the system than is pos‐
sible from the driver's seat.
The system indicates approaching traffic.
The respective display is called up on the Con‐
trol Display. A signal tone may sound and the
light in the exterior mirror may flash.
With the respective equipment variant, the
traffic area in front of the vehicle is monitored
as well. Two additional radar sensors are lo‐
cated in the front bumpers.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traf‐
fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐
just driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the rear
bumper.
Seite 223
Driver assistance systems Controls
223
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
With the respective equipment variant, there
are two additional radar sensors in the front
bumper.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the ra‐
dar sensors clean and unobstructed.
Switching on/off
Activating/deactivating the system
1. Press park assistance button.
2. Move the controller to the left.
3. "Settings"
4. "Cross traffic alert"
5. "Cross traffic alert"
Switching on automatically
If the system was activated on the Control Dis‐
play, it is automatically switched on as soon as
PDC Park Distance Control or Panorama View
is active and a gear is engaged.
If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is
switched on.
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, the front
system is switched on when a forward gear is
engaged.
Switching off automatically
The system is automatically switched off in the
following situations:
▷ When the speed exceeds walking speed.
▷ With the steering and lane control assistant
active: when a certain driving distance is
exceeded.
▷ With an active parking operation of the
parking assistant.
WARNING
Light in the exterior mirror
The light in the exterior mirror flashes if vehi‐
cles are detected by the rear sensors and your
own vehicle is moving backwards.
Display in the PDC Park Distance
Control view
In the PDC Park Distance Control view, the re‐
spective boundary area flashes red, if vehicles
are detected by the sensors.
Seite 224
Controls Driver assistance systems
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Display in the camera view
The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the
camera view flashes red, if vehicles are de‐
tected by the sensors.
Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of your
own vehicle.
Acoustic warning
In addition to the optical indicator, a warning
signal sounds if your own vehicle moves into
the respective direction.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ If the speed of the approaching vehicle is
very high.
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered,
for instance by stickers.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ If crossing objects move at a very slow
speed.
▷ If other objects are in the capture range of
the sensors, that hide cross traffic.
Seite 225
Driver assistance systems Controls
225
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Air suspension
Concept
Air suspension ensures best possible driving
comfort under all load conditions. Due to a var‐
iable adjustment of the front and rear axles, the
damping is adjusted to the vehicle state.
General information
In the case of an uneven road surface, the ve‐
hicle level can be elevated to increase ground
clearance.
▷ Normal level, for normal road surface.
▷ Raised level, when the road surface is poor.
In the SPORT driving mode, refer to page 126,
or at higher speeds, the vehicle lowers itself.
Safety information
WARNING
When lowering the vehicle, body parts
can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. When
lowering the vehicle, make sure that the areas
of movement under the vehicle and under the
wheel housing are free.◀
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Level adjustment
Adjusting the level manually
Press button.
In the low speed range, the vehicle is raised to
the raised level with a press of the button.
Starting at a speed of approx. 20 mph/35 km/h
the vehicle lowers itself automatically to the
normal level.
Display
▷ LED off: normal level.
▷ LED flashes: level is being adjusted.
▷ LED lit: raised level.
▷ LED flashes rapidly: level adjustment not
possible.
System limits
With several manual level changes one after
another, the system will switch itself off, if nec‐
essary. The rapidly flashing LED on the button
indicates that the system is temporarily un‐
available.
Tire change
Before a tire change, deactivate the system:
Seite 226
Controls Driving comfort
226
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Press button and hold for approx. 7 sec‐
onds, then release. The LED flashes rap‐
idly.
To activate system:
The system is activated again automatically
when you drive away.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed. The
system is impaired. Vehicle handling may be
altered and driving comfort may be noticeably
reduced. Visit the nearest dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Long periods when vehicle is parked
During long periods when the vehicle is
parked, it can lower itself. This is not a mal‐
function.
If drive-ready state is switched on with the
doors closed, the vehicle is raised to the nor‐
mal level automatically.
Dynamic Damping Control
Concept
This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐
tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐
eling on uneven road surfaces.
This enhances the driving dynamics and driv‐
ing comfort depending on the road surface
condition and driving style.
General information
The system offers several different damping
settings.
The damping settings are assigned to the dif‐
ferent driving modes of the Driving Dynamics
Control, refer to page 126.
Driving mode Damper tuning
COMFORT
ECO PRO
Balanced out
COMFORT PLUS Comfortable
SPORT Firm
Seite 227
Driving comfort Controls
227
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Climate control
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Interior air quality
The air quality inside the vehicle is improved
by an emissions-tested interior, a microfilter,
and a climate-control system for regulating
temperature, air flow, and recirculated-air
mode.
In addition there are other functions which de‐
pend on the vehicle's equipment, for instance
microfilter/activated-charcoal filter, ionization,
fragrancing, automatic climate control with au‐
tomatic recirculated-air control AUC, and
parked-car ventilation.
Automatic climate control
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
Climate control functions
Button Function
Temperature, refer to
page 229.
Climate control operation, refer
to page 229.
Maximum cooling, refer to
page 229.
AUTO program, refer to
page 230.
Recirculated-air mode, refer to
page 230.
Air flow, manual, refer to
page 231.
Air distribution, manual, refer
to page 231.
SYNC program, refer to
page 231.
Defrost and defog window, re‐
fer to page 231.
Rear window defroster, refer to
page 232.
Active seat ventilation, refer to
page 103.
Seat heating, refer to
page 102.
Ambient air package, refer to
page 235.
Seite 228
Controls Climate control
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Climate control functions in detail
Switching on/off
Switching on
Press any button except for the following:
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Left side of air flow button.
▷ SYNC program.
▷ Seat heating.
▷ Seat ventilation.
Switching off
▷ Complete system:
Press and hold the left button on
the driver's side until the control
panel switches off.
▷ On the front passenger side:
Press and hold the left button on
the front passenger side.
Temperature
Concept
The automatic climate control achieves the set
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed,
by using the maximum cooling or heating ca‐
pacity, and then keeps it constant.
Settings
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
Do not rapidly switch between
different temperature settings.
Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
just the set temperature.
Air conditioning
Concept
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and
dehumidified and, depending on the tempera‐
ture setting, warmed again.
Cooling of the car's interior is possible with the
A/C button with drive-ready state switched on.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with air condi‐
tioning switched on.
Air conditioning is switched on with the engine
running.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
side windows may fog up briefly when drive-
ready state is switched on.
The air conditioning is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water develops and collects un‐
derneath the vehicle.
Maximum cooling
Concept
The system is set to the lowest temperature,
optimum air flow and recirculated-air mode
with the drive-ready state switched on.
General information
The function is available with external temper‐
atures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
drive-ready state switched on.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the sys‐
tem switched on.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
Seite 229
Climate control Controls
229
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Adjust air flow on the driver's side with the pro‐
gram active.
AUTO program
Concept
Air flow, air distribution and temperature are
controlled automatically.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the AUTO
program switched on.
Depending on the selected temperature, the
intensity of the AUTO program, and outside in‐
fluences, the air is directed to the windshield,
side windows, upper body, and into the floor
area.
The air conditioning, refer to page 229, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program so as to prevent window
condensation as much as possible.
The AUTO program is switched off automati‐
cally, when manual air distribution is set.
Intensity
With the AUTO program switched on, the in‐
tensity can be set. This changes the automatic
control for the air flow and air distribution.
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase intensity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Automatic recirculated-air control
AUC
Concept
The automatic recirculated-air control AUC
recognizes odors or pollutants in the outside
air. The outside air supply is shut off and the
interior air is recirculated.
General information
If the system is activated, a sensor detects pol‐
lutants in the outside air and controls the shut-
off automatically.
If the system is deactivated, outside air contin‐
uously flows into the vehicle's interior.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the vehicle's interior deteriorates and
the fogging of the windows increases.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED lights up if the system is
switched on using the button.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. If necessary, "Air quality"
5. "Automatic air recirculation"
If there is window condensation, switch off re‐
circulated-air mode or defog the windows, re‐
fer to page 231.
Recirculated-air mode
Concept
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently
within the vehicle.
Operation
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
Seite 230
Controls Climate control
230
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
▷ LED on: the supply of outside air is perma‐
nently shut off.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the
fogging of the windows increases.
If there is window condensation, switch off re‐
circulated-air mode or defog the windows, re‐
fer to page 231.
Controlling the air flow manually
Concept
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually.
General information
To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐
gram first.
Operation
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
The air flow of the automatic climate control
may be reduced automatically to save battery
power.
Controlling the air distribution
manually
Concept
The air distribution for climate control can be
adjusted manually.
Operation
Press button repeatedly to select a
program:
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor
area.
▷ Upper body region and floor area.
▷ Floor area.
▷ Windows and floor area.
▷ Windows: driver's side only.
▷ Windows and upper body.
▷ Upper body region.
The selected air distribution is shown on the
display of the automatic climate control.
If there is window condensation, defog the
windows, refer to page 231.
SYNC program
Concept
Depending on the equipment, the following
settings of the driver's side can be transferred
to the front-passenger side and the rear:
▷ Temperature.
▷ Air flow.
▷ Air distribution.
▷ AUTO program.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the SYNC
program switched on.
The program is switched off automatically if
the settings on the front passenger side or in
the rear are changed.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Concept
Ice and condensation are quickly removed
from the windshield and the front side win‐
dows.
Switching on/off
Press button.
Seite 231
Climate control Controls
231
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
The LED is illuminated with the system
switched on.
Point the side vents towards the side windows,
as needed. The air flow can be adjusted man‐
ually with the system switched on.
If there is window condensation, press
the button on the driver's side or
switch on air conditioning to utilize the con‐
densation sensor. Make sure that air can flow
to the windshield.
Rear window defroster
Press button. The LED lights up.
The function is available with the en‐
gine running.
The rear window defroster switches off auto‐
matically after a certain period of time.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from
the incoming air.
The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous
pollutants from the outside air that enters the
vehicle.
Have this combined filter changed during vehi‐
cle maintenance, refer to page 322.
Ventilation
Concept
The air flow directions can be individually ad‐
justed.
Adjusting the ventilation
General information
The air flow directions can be adjusted for di‐
rect or indirect ventilation.
Direct ventilation
The air flow is directed towards the passen‐
gers. The air flow heats or cools noticeably,
depending on the adjusted temperature.
Indirect ventilation
The air flow is not directed towards the pas‐
sengers. The car's interior is warmed or cooled
indirectly, depending on the set temperature.
Indirect ventilation can also be adjusted on the
Control Display.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Indirect ventilation"
Front ventilation
Overview
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 1.
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and
closing of the vents, arrow 2.
▷ Touch sensor or thumbwheel to vary the
ventilation temperature, arrow 3.
With touch sensor, push the marking in the
desired direction:
▷ Toward blue: colder.
▷ Toward red: warmer.
This does not change the set interior tem‐
perature for the driver and front passenger.
Seite 232
Controls Climate control
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Ventilation in rear, center
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 1.
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and
closing of the vents, arrow 2.
Ventilation in the rear, on the side
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 1.
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and
closing of the vents, arrow 2.
Rear automatic climate
control
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
Climate control functions
Button Function
Temperature, refer to
page 234
Maximum cooling, refer to
page 234.
AUTO program, refer to
page 234.
Air flow, manual, refer to
page 235.
Air distribution, manual, refer
to page 235.
Active seat ventilation, refer to
page 103.
Seat heating, refer to
page 102.
Seat and armrest heating, refer
to page 102.
Seite 233
Climate control Controls
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Climate control functions in detail
Switching on/off
Via iDrive
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Rear climate"
The rear automatic climate control is not ready
for operation if the automatic climate control is
switched off or if the function for defrosting the
windows and removing condensation is active.
Using the button: switching on
Press any button except for the following:
▷ Left side of air flow button.
▷ Seat heating.
▷ Seat ventilation.
Using the button: switching off
Press and hold the left side of the but‐
ton.
Temperature
Concept
The automatic climate control achieves the set
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed,
by using the maximum cooling or heating ca‐
pacity, and then keeps it constant.
Settings
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
Do not rapidly switch between
different temperature settings.
Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
just the set temperature.
Maximum cooling
Concept
The system is set to the lowest temperature,
optimum air flow and recirculated-air mode
with the drive-ready state switched on.
General information
The function is available with external temper‐
atures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
drive-ready state switched on.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the sys‐
tem switched on.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
AUTO program
Concept
Air flow, air distribution and temperature are
controlled automatically.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the AUTO
program switched on.
Depending on the selected temperature, the
AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air
is directed to the upper body and into the floor
area.
The air conditioning is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
Intensity
With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐
matic intensity control can be changed:
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase intensity.
Seite 234
Controls Climate control
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Controlling the air flow manually
Concept
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually.
General information
To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐
gram first.
Operation
Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
Controlling the air distribution
manually
Concept
The air distribution for climate control can be
adjusted manually.
Operation
Press button repeatedly to select a
program:
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Upper body region and floor area.
▷ Floor area.
BMW Touch Command
Operation of the rear automatic climate control
is also possible via BMW Touch Command.
Ambient air package
Concept
The Ambient Air Package can be used to clean
and scent the interior air with high-quality fra‐
grances.
Ionization is used to clean the air from sus‐
pended particles. Together with the selected
fragrance, ionization contributes to well-being
and relaxation while driving.
General information
Two different fragrances can be selected in the
vehicle. A variety of other fragrances is possi‐
ble by replacing the fragrance cartridges.
The following criteria can influence the per‐
ception of scents in the car's interior:
▷ Automatic climate control settings.
▷ Temperature and air humidity.
▷ Time of day and season.
▷ Physical condition of the vehicle occu‐
pants, for instance fatigue.
BMW recommends the use of genuine BMW
fragrance cartridges.
The genuine BMW fragrance cartridges are not
suitable for refilling. When a cartridge is empty,
replace it with a new fragrance cartridge.
Safety information
WARNING
Refilled genuine BMW fragrance car‐
tridges can cause the emission of harmful sub‐
stances, malfunctions, and damage to the sys‐
tem. There is a risk of injury or risk of property
damage. Do not refill genuine fragrance car‐
tridges. When a cartridge is empty, replace it
with a new fragrance cartridge.◀
Seite 235
Climate control Controls
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Ionization
Concept
Ionization cleans the car's interior air of sus‐
pended particles.
Switching on/off
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. If necessary, "Air quality"
5. "Ionization"
The climate control display indicates that ioni‐
zation is switched on.
Fragrancing
General information
Fragrancing is done at intervals in order to
avoid a habituation effect.
Two fragrance cartridges in the vehicle allow
switching between the fragrances.
The fragrance cartridges are located in the
glove compartment.
Overview
Button in the center console
Fragrancing
Functional requirements
▷ Fragrance cartridges are sufficiently filled.
▷ Interior temperature between 41 ℉/+5 ℃
and 104 ℉/+40 ℃.
▷ Open the vents to allow the fragrance to
flow out.
Selecting the fragrance
Two different fragrances can be selected in the
vehicle.
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Air quality"
5. "Fragrance"
6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Switching fragrancing on/off,
adjusting intensity
Using the button
Press button once for each intensity
level.
Highest intensity if three bars are shown on
the climate control display.
Fragrancing is switched off if no bars are dis‐
played.
Using iDrive
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Air quality"
5. "Fragrance"
6. "Level"
7. Select the desired setting.
Seite 236
Controls Climate control
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Display
General information
With operation via button, the menu of the Am‐
bient Air Package can be displayed on the
Control Display automatically.
Settings
Further settings can be adjusted.
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Air quality"
5. "Fragrance"
6. "Show fragrance setting"
The menu is shown on the Control Display.
Fragrance cartridge filling level
The illustrations on the Control Display show
the actual filling level of the fragrance car‐
tridges.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Air quality"
5. "Fragrance"
The fill level of the current fragrance is dis‐
played.
6. Select the desired setting.
When an empty fragrance cartridge is indi‐
cated, the cartridge still contains a fluid carry‐
ing the fragrance. However, it is not sufficient
for fragrancing.
When a fragrance cartridge requires replace‐
ment, a Check Control message is displayed
Inserting fragrance cartridges
The fragrance cartridges are located in the
glove compartment.
1. Open the glove compartment, refer to
page 251.
2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge
holder.
The cartridge holder slides down.
3. Remove the cover of the fragrance car‐
tridge. Hold the cover on the top to slide it
from the fragrance cartridge.
4. Insert the removed cover on the back side
of the fragrance cartridge.
Seite 237
Climate control Controls
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
5. Position fragrance cartridge such that the
chip faces away from the cartridge holder.
6. Insert the fragrance cartridge without pres‐
sure into the cartridge holder. The car‐
tridge snaps lightly into place.
7. Push the cartridge holder up, until it en‐
gages.
Make sure that no objects press against
the cartridge holder from below, otherwise
the function of the ambient air package
could be impacted.
8. Close the glove compartment.
Removing the fragrance cartridge
The fragrance cartridges are located in the
glove compartment.
1.
Open the glove compartment, refer to
page 251.
2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge
holder.
The cartridge holder slides down.
3. Pull desired fragrance cartridge from the
holder.
Fragrance cartridge, arrow 1: first fra‐
grance indicated on the Control Display.
Fragrance cartridge, arrow 2: second fra‐
grance indicated on the Control Display.
4. Pull desired fragrance cartridge from the
holder.
Recycling
Empty fragrance cartridges can be
taken to a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop for recycling.
Seite 238
Controls Climate control
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
BMW Touch Command
The Ambient Air Package can also be operated
using BMW Touch Command.
Stationary climate control
Concept
Stationary climate control cools or heats the
car's interior prior to departure to a comforta‐
ble temperature.
The system automatically cools, vents, and
heats depending on the interior, external, and
set temperature. Snow and ice may be re‐
moved more easily.
General information
The stationary climate control can be switched
on and off directly or via a pre-set departure
time.
▷ Switching on/off directly, refer to
page 239.
▷ Climate control at departure time, refer to
page 240.
Stationary climate control can be switched on
with a BMW Remote App, refer to page 241.
The air automatically exits through the vents to
the windshield, the side windows, the upper
body region and into the floor area.
The system switches off automatically after a
certain period of time.
If stationary climate control is used during the
charging process, less air conditioning ca‐
pacity will be required while driving. This opti‐
mizes the range.
Functional requirements
▷ The vehicle is in idle state or standby state
and not in drive-ready state.
▷ The high-voltage battery is sufficiently
charged or the charging cable is con‐
nected.
If the high-voltage battery is heavily dis‐
charged, it can take some time after con‐
necting the charging cable, until the sta‐
tionary climate control will be functional.
▷ Direct operation or departure time prese‐
lected: depends on internal, external, and
set desired temperature.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
▷ The ensure the starting capability of the
vehicle, the stationary climate control may
be automatically switched off, for instance
after repeated switching on: switch the
drive-ready state on and off and the sys‐
tem is available again.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly
Concept
There are different ways to switch the system
on or off.
symbol on the automatic climate control in‐
dicates the system is switched on.
The system switches off automatically after a
certain period of time.
Using the button
When the vehicle is in standby state, the sys‐
tem can be switched on or off via the auto‐
matic climate control buttons.
The system switches off when the vehicle is
exited.
Press any button except:
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Left side of air flow button.
▷ Seat heating.
▷ Seat ventilation.
Seite 239
Climate control Controls
239
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Via iDrive
The system can be switched on or off via
iDrive.
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Activate comfort climate"
5. "Activate now"
Via BMW display key
The system can be switched on or off via the
BMW display key.
Switching on
1.
Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
2. "Departure setting"
3. Select .
4. "Activate now"
5. "Start"
Switching off
1.
Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
2. "Departure setting"
3. Select .
4. "Stop"
Climate control at departure time
Concept
Different departure times can be adjusted to
ensure a comfortable interior temperature in
the vehicle at the time of departure.
The activation time is automatically deter‐
mined based on the temperature.
Departure time with weekday: time and day of
the week can be set.
On the desired weekdays, the system will be
switched on promptly before the set departure
time.
The departure time is preselected in two
steps:
▷ Set departure times.
▷ Activate departure times.
Setting the departure time
Via iDrive
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Activate comfort climate"
5. "Plan comfort climate"
6. Select the desired departure time.
7. Set the departure time.
8. Select day of the week, if needed.
Via BMW display key
1.
Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
2. "Departure setting"
3. Select
4. Select the desired departure time.
5. Set the departure time.
6. Select day of the week, if needed.
7. "OK"
Activating the departure time
If a departure time is to influence the switching
on of the stationary climate control, the re‐
spective departure time must be activated first.
Via iDrive
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Activate comfort climate"
5. "Plan comfort climate"
6. "Precondition for departure"
Activate the desired departure time.
Seite 240
Controls Climate control
240
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol signals an activated departure time.
symbol on the automatic climate control in‐
dicates the system is switched on.
Via BMW display key
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
2. "Departure setting"
3. Select .
4. Tap on symbol.
Activate the desired departure time.
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol signals an activated departure time.
symbol on the automatic climate control in‐
dicates the system is switched on.
Activating with BMW Remote app
Using an appropriate BMW App with remote
function, the system can be switched on di‐
rectly or via a preset departure time.
Seite 241
Climate control Controls
241
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Integrated Universal Remote
Control
Concept
The integrated Universal Remote Control in
the interior mirror can operate up to 3 func‐
tions of remote-controlled systems, such as
garage door drives, barriers, or lighting sys‐
tems.
General information
The integrated Universal Remote Control re‐
places up to 3 different hand-held transmitters.
To operate the remote control, the buttons on
the interior mirror must be programmed with
the desired functions. The hand-held transmit‐
ter for the particular system is required in order
to program the remote control.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, for instance
the garage door, using the integrated Universal
Remote Control. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the area
of movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety instructions of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.◀
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
ing or in the owner's manual of the sys‐
tem to be controlled, the system is
generally compatible with the integrated Uni‐
versal Remote Control.
If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ A dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
Control elements on the interior mirror
▷ Buttons, arrow 1.
▷ LED, arrow 2.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming.
Programming
General information
1.
Switch on standby state.
2. Initial setup:
Seite 242
Controls Interior equipment
242
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Press and hold the two outer buttons on
the interior mirror simultaneously for ap‐
proximately 10 seconds until the LED
flashes green rapidly. This erases all pro‐
gramming of the buttons on the interior
mirror.
3. Press the interior mirror button to be pro‐
grammed. The LED flashes orange.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to
8 cm away from the buttons of the interior
mirror. The required distance depends on
the hand-held transmitter.
5. Press and hold the button of the desired
function on the hand-held transmitter. The
LED on the interior mirror will begin flash‐
ing orange slowly.
6. As soon as the LED flashes green more
rapidly or lights up continuously, release
the button. Green light indicates that the
button on the interior mirror has been pro‐
grammed. Faster green flashing indicates
that it is a rolling code wireless system.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐
tween the interior mirror and the hand-held
transmitter and repeat the step. Several
more attempts at different distances may
be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds be‐
tween attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and repeat‐
edly press and release the hand-held
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
7.
To program other functions on other but‐
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
The systems can be controlled using the inte‐
rior mirror buttons.
Special feature of the rolling code
wireless system
If you are unable to operate the system after
repeated programming, please check if the
system to be controlled features a rolling code
radio system.
Read the system's owner's manual, or press
the programmed button on the interior mirror
longer. If the LED on the interior mirror starts
flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for
2 seconds, the system features a rolling code
radio system. Flashing and continuous illumi‐
nation of the LED will repeat for approximately
20 seconds.
For systems with a rolling code radio system,
the integrated Universal Remote Control and
the system also have to be synchronized.
Please read the owner's manual to find out
how to synchronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐
ond person.
Synchronizing the universal remote control
with the system:
1.
Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
mote-controlled system.
2. Program the relevant button on the interior
mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
on the system being programmed. You
have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the
interior mirror for approximately 3 seconds
and then release it. If necessary, repeat this
step up to three times in order to finish
synchronization. Once synchronization is
complete, the programmed function will be
carried out.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1.
Switch on standby state.
2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to
be programmed.
3. As soon as the interior mirror LED starts
flashing slowly, hold the hand-held trans‐
mitter for the system to be controlled ap‐
prox. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the
buttons of the interior mirror. The required
Seite 243
Interior equipment Controls
243
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
distance depends on the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the
desired function on the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐
rior mirror LED flashes more rapidly or
lights up continuously. The LED flashing
more rapidly or being continuously lit up in‐
dicates that the button on the interior mir‐
ror has been programmed. The system can
then be controlled by the button on the in‐
terior mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
most 60 seconds, change the distance and
repeat the programming starting with
step 4. Several more attempts at different
distances may be necessary. Wait at least
15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and repeat‐
edly press and release the hand-held
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
Operation
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, for instance
the garage door, using the integrated Universal
Remote Control. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the area
of movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety instructions of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.◀
The system, such as the garage door, can be
operated using the button on the interior mirror
while the drive-ready or standby state is
switched on. To do this, hold down the button
within receiving range of the system until the
function is activated. The interior mirror LED
stays lit while the wireless signal is being
transmitted.
Deleting stored functions
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the
interior mirror simultaneously for approxi‐
mately 10 seconds until the LED on the interior
mirror flashes green rapidly. All stored func‐
tions will be deleted. The functions cannot be
deleted individually.
Sun visor
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.
Glare shield from the side
Folding out
1.
Fold the sun visor down.
2. Unhook it from the holder and swing it to
the side.
3. Move it back to the desired position.
Folding up
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun
visor.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐
hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the
mirror lighting switches on.
Seite 244
Controls Interior equipment
244
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Ashtray
Front center console
Opening
1. Push the cover forward until it engages be‐
hind the cup holders.
2. Push the cover forward again until it en‐
gages behind the storage compartment.
3. Fold the cover upward.
Emptying
Grasp the insert on the side and pull it out.
Rear door
Opening
Press on the cover.
Emptying
Grasp the insert on the side and remove it.
Cigarette lighter
Safety information
WARNING
Contact with hot heating elements or the
hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause
burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the
cigarette lighter falls down or is held against
the respective objects. There is a risk of fire
and injuries. Hold the cigarette lighter by its
handle. Make sure that children do not use the
cigarette lighter and burn themselves.◀
Seite 245
Interior equipment Controls
245
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
NOTE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
property damage. Replace the cigarette lighter
or socket cover again after using the socket.◀
Front center console
1. Push the cover forward until it engages be‐
hind the cup holders.
2. Push the cover forward again until it en‐
gages behind the storage compartment.
The cigarette lighter is located between the
cup holders.
Rear center console
Without rear console: opening and
closing
The cigarette lighter is on the right side.
Open: press on the cover.
To close: press the cover closed again.
With rear console: opening and
closing
Push the cover backward until it engages.
The cigarette lighter is located between the
cup holders.
Tap the cover on the handle bar to close it.
Seite 246
Controls Interior equipment
246
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Operation
Push in the lighter.
The lighter can be removed as
soon as it pops back out.
Sockets
Concept
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment when standby and drive-
ready state are switched on.
General information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
patible connectors.
Safety information
NOTE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
work can be overloaded or damaged. There is
a risk of property damage. Only connect bat‐
tery chargers for the vehicle battery to the
starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐
ment.◀
NOTE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
property damage. Replace the cigarette lighter
or socket cover again after using the socket.◀
Front center armrest
The center armrest contains a socket.
Front center console
Push the cover forward until it engages.
A socket is located between the cup holders.
Rear center console
Without rear console: opening and
closing
The rear center console contains two sockets.
Open: press on the cover.
To close: press the cover closed again.
Seite 247
Interior equipment Controls
247
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
With rear console: opening and
closing
Push the cover backward until it engages.
A socket is located between the cup holders.
Tap the cover on the handle bar to close it.
With rear console: rear center armrest
The center armrest contains a socket.
In the cargo area
A socket is located on the right side in the
cargo area. Unfold the cover.
USB interface
General information
Follow the information regarding the connec‐
tion of mobile devices to the USB interface in
the section on USB connections, refer to
page 47.
In the center armrest
A USB interface is located in the center arm‐
rest.
In the center console
NOTE
Objects in the storage compartment,
e.g., large USB connectors, may block or dam‐
age the cover when it is being opened or
closed. There is a risk of damage to property.
Seite 248
Controls Interior equipment
248
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Make sure that the area of movement of the
cover is clear while opening and closing it.◀
1. Push the cover forward until it engages be‐
hind the cup holders.
2. Push the cover forward again until it en‐
gages behind the storage compartment.
A USB interface is located in the center con‐
sole.
Folding table in the rear
General information
There is a folding table in the center armrest of
the rear console.
Safety information
WARNING
A folded-out folding table protrudes into
the vehicle's interior and, in case of accident,
braking or evasive maneuvers can cause inju‐
ries. Objects on the table can be thrown
around the vehicle's interior while driving.
There is a risk of injury. Do not unfold or use
folding table while driving.◀
Folding open the folding table
1. Open the center armrest. Press the button
for this purpose.
2. Grasp the folding table at the rear and fold
forward in the center armrest.
3. Pull the folding table from the center arm‐
rest.
4. Close the cover of the center armrest.
5. Fold the folding table down and adjust as
needed.
Seite 249
Interior equipment Controls
249
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Folding in the folding table
Proceed in reverse order to fold in the folding
table.
Seite 250
Controls Interior equipment
250
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Safety information
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable
connection to the vehicle, e.g., mobile phones,
can be thrown into the vehicle's interior while
driving, e.g., in the event of an accident or dur‐
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a
risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
vehicle's interior.◀
NOTE
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Do not use anti-slip pads.◀
Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the car's interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side, refer to page 251.
▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side,
refer to page 252.
▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to
page 252.
▷ Storage compartment in the center con‐
sole, refer to page 252.
▷ Center armrest, refer to page 253.
▷ Storage compartment between the rear
seats, refer to page 253.
▷ Storage compartment in the rear center
console, refer to page 252.
▷ Pockets on the backrests of the front
seats.
Glove compartment
Front passenger side
Safety information
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment
protrudes in the vehicle's interior. Objects in
the glove compartment can be thrown into the
vehicle's interior while driving, e.g., in the event
of an accident or during braking and evasive
maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always
close the glove compartment immediately after
using it.◀
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment switches
on.
Seite 251
Storage compartments Controls
251
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Closing
Fold cover closed.
Locking
The glove compartment can be locked with an
integrated key. This prevents access to the
glove compartment.
After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐
mote control can be handed over without the
integrated key, e.g., when the vehicle is parked
by valet parking.
Driver's side
Safety information
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment
protrudes in the vehicle's interior. Objects in
the glove compartment can be thrown into the
vehicle's interior while driving, e.g., in the event
of an accident or during braking and evasive
maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always
close the glove compartment immediately after
using it.◀
Opening
Pull the handle.
Closing
Fold cover closed.
Compartments in the doors
WARNING
Breakable objects, for instance glass
bottles or glasses, can break in the event of an
accident. Broken glass can be scattered in the
car's interior. There is a risk of injury. Do not
use any breakable objects while driving. Only
stow breakable objects in lockable storage
compartments.◀
Storage compartment in the
center console
Opening
1.
Push the cover forward until it engages be‐
hind the cup holders.
2. Push the cover forward again until it en‐
gages behind the storage compartment.
Closing
1.
Touch the cover on the handle bar. The
cover closes up to the cup holders.
2. Tap the cover again. The cover closes fully.
Storage compartment in the
rear center console
The rear center console contains a storage
compartment.
Seite 252
Controls Storage compartments
252
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Storage compartment
between the rear seats
General information
A storage compartment is located behind the
cover between the backrests.
Opening
Push the cover up until it engages.
Closing
Push the cover up again.
The cover slides down.
Center armrest
Front
General information
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the seats.
Opening
Press button.
Closing
Press cover down until it engages.
Rear
General information
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the seats.
Folding down
Reach into the recess and fold the center arm‐
rest forward.
Opening
Depending on the equipment, proceed as fol‐
lows:
Seite 253
Storage compartments Controls
253
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Press button, arrow 1, and fold the cover up,
arrow 2.
Press button, arrow 1, and fold the cover up,
arrow 2.
Press button.
Closing
Press cover down until it engages.
Cup holders
Safety information
WARNING
Unsuitable containers in the cup holder
and hot beverages can damage the cup holder
and increase the risk of injury in the event of an
accident. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Use light-weight, unbreaka‐
ble, and sealable containers. Do not transport
hot beverages. Do not force objects into the
cup holder.◀
Front
Opening
Push the cover forward until it engages.
Two cup holders are located in the center con‐
sole.
Closing
Touch the cover on the handle bar. The cover
closes.
Seite 254
Controls Storage compartments
254
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Rear
Safety information
NOTE
With an open cup holder, the center arm‐
rest cannot be folded back up. There is a risk
of property damage. Press back the covers be‐
fore the center armrest is folded up.◀
Without rear console: opening and
closing
Opening
Fold the center armrest forward.
Press button.
Closing
Push back the cup holder.
With rear console: opening and
closing
Opening
Push the cover backward until it engages.
Closing
Touch the cover on the handle bar. The cover
closes.
Clothes hooks
Safety information
WARNING
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks
can obstruct the view while driving. There is a
risk of an accident. When suspending clothing
articles from the hooks, ensure that they will
not obstruct the driver's view.◀
WARNING
Improper use of the clothes hooks can
lead to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury and risk of property damage. Only
hang lightweight objects, e.g., clothing articles,
from the clothes hooks.◀
General information
The clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐
dles in the rear and on the door pillar in the
rear.
Seite 255
Storage compartments Controls
255
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Cargo area
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Loading
Safety information
WARNING
High gross weight can overheat the tires,
damage them internally and cause a sudden
drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving charac‐
teristics may be negatively impacted, reducing
lane stability, lengthening the braking distan‐
ces and changing the steering response.
There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to
the permitted load capacity of the tires and
never exceed the permitted gross weight.◀
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable
connection to the vehicle, e.g., mobile phones,
can be thrown into the vehicle's interior while
driving, e.g., in the event of an accident or dur‐
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a
risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
vehicle's interior.◀
WARNING
Improperly stowed objects can shift and
be thrown into the vehicle's interior, e.g., in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and
secure objects and cargo properly.◀
NOTE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause dam‐
age. There is a risk of property damage. Make
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.◀
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400–750 (5 x 150) =
650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐
gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐
cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Seite 256
Controls Cargo area
256
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Load
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing and securing cargo
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of
the rear passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: stow as far forward as
possible, directly behind and at the bottom
of the rear passenger seat backrests.
When the rear seat is not occupied, secure
each of the outer safety belts in the oppo‐
site buckle.
▷ Smaller and lighter cargo: secure with
ratchet straps or with a cargo net or draw
straps.
▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
straps.
Lashing eyes in the cargo
area
General information
Attach load securing aids, such as lashing
straps, retaining straps, draw straps or cargo
nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Lashing eyes
There are four lashing eyes in the cargo area
for securing cargo.
Storage compartments in the
cargo area
Multi-function hook
General information
A multi-function hook is located on the left
side in the cargo area.
Safety information
WARNING
Improper use of the multi-function hooks
can lead to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury and risk of property damage. Only
hang lightweight objects, e.g., shopping bags,
from the multi-function hooks. Only transport
heavy luggage in the cargo area if it has been
appropriately secured.◀
Seite 257
Cargo area Controls
257
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Folding down
Press on the multi-function hook and turn until
it engages.
Side storage compartments
General information
A storage compartment is located on the left
and right sides in the cargo area.
Pull on the straps.
Storage compartment under the cargo
area floor
There is a storage compartment under the
cargo floor panel.
Fold up the cargo floor panel.
Through-loading system
Concept
The through-loading system allows the trans‐
port of long objects, such as skies.
Without comfort seats: opening
through-loading
1.
Fold down the center armrest.
2. Remove flap.
3. Pull handle, arrow 1, down and fold panel
forward, arrow 2.
Seite 258
Controls Cargo area
258
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
With comfort seats: opening through-
loading
Without rear console
1. Fold down the center armrest.
2. Pull on the loop.
With rear console
1.
Push the cover up until it engages.
2. Pull on the loop.
Enlarging the cargo area
General information
The cargo floor panel can be lowered to stow
bulky luggage.
Safety information
NOTE
The spaces under the cargo area floor
are intended for the covers of the side storage
compartments. Other objects may result in
damage to the vehicle electrical system if the
cargo area floor should sink down or in an acci‐
dent. There is a risk of damage to property.
Only place the covers of the side storage com‐
partments into the spaces under the cargo
area floor.◀
Enlarging
1.
Remove the covers of the side storage
compartments.
2. Lift the cargo floor panel.
Seite 259
Cargo area Controls
259
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
3. Stow the covers of the side storage com‐
partments under the cargo floor panel in
the respectively provided recesses.
4. Lift the cargo floor panel by its handle to‐
wards the back and up and lower it.
5. Press the side partition nets downward.
Reducing the size
Proceed in reverse order to make the cargo
area smaller again.
Ski and snowboard bag
The ski and snowboard bag is contained in a
protective jacket in the cargo area.
Follow the installation and owner's manual in‐
cluded in the protective jacket.
Seite 260
Controls Cargo area
260
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Seite 261
Cargo area Controls
261
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating modes.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need to begin working together
smoothly.
The following instructions will help you to ach‐
ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
Safety information
WARNING
Due to new parts and components,
safety and driver assistance systems can react
with a delay. There is a risk of an accident. Af‐
ter installing new parts or with a new vehicle,
drive conservatively and intervene early if nec‐
essary. Observe the break-in procedures of
the respective parts and components.◀
Engine, transmission, and axle drive
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
speed:
▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐
stances.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full
effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km.
Drive moderately during this break-in period.
Following part replacement
Observe the break-in procedures again, if
components mentioned above are replaced.
General driving notes
Closing the tailgate
Safety information
WARNING
An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi‐
cle and can endanger occupants and other
traffic participants or damage the vehicle in the
event of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐
neuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter
the car's interior. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Do not drive with the
tailgate open.◀
Driving with the tailgate open
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
Seite 264
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
264
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
▷ Drive moderately.
Hot exhaust system
WARNING
During driving operation, high tempera‐
tures can occur underneath the vehicle body,
e.g., caused by the exhaust gas system. If
combustible materials, such as leaves or grass,
come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust
gas system, these materials can ignite. There
is a risk of injury or risk of property damage. Do
not remove the heat shields installed and never
apply undercoating to them. Make sure that no
combustible materials can come in contact
with hot vehicle parts in driving operation, idle
or during parking. Do not touch the hot ex‐
haust system.◀
Climate control windshield
The marked area is not covered with heat re‐
flective coating.
Use this area for garage door openers, devices
for electronic toll collection, etc.
Climate control windshield
The vehicle glass provides full protection
against the harmful effects of UV radiation on
the skin.
Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle
WARNING
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones
can influence one another. There is radiation
due to the transmission operations of mobile
phones. There is a risk of injury or risk of prop‐
erty damage. If possible, in the vehicle's inte‐
rior use only mobile phones with direct con‐
nections to an exterior antenna in order to
exclude mutual interference and deflect the ra‐
diation from the vehicle's interior.◀
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
Driving through water
General information
When driving through water, follow the follow‐
ing:
▷ Drive through calm water only.
▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper
than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm.
▷ Drive through water no faster than walking
speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
Safety information
NOTE
When driving too quickly through too
deep water, water can enter into the engine
compartment, the electrical system or the
transmission. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. When driving through water, do not ex‐
ceed the maximum indicated water level and
the maximum speed for driving through wa‐
ter.◀
Seite 265
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
265
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Braking safely
General information
The vehicle is equipped with the Antilock
Brake System ABS as a standard feature.
Perform an emergency stop in situations that
require such.
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid
any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐
fort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
the hydraulic circuits indicate that the Antilock
Brake System ABS is in its active mode.
In certain braking situations, the perforated
brake discs can emit functional noises. How‐
ever, functional noises have no effect on the
performance and operational reliability of the
brake.
Objects in the area around the pedals
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in
the vehicle such that they are secured and
cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, for instance for cleaning.◀
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain,
gently press the brake pedal every few miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger
other traffic.
The heat generated during braking dries brake
discs and brake pads and protects them
against corrosion.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
Hills
General information
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear that requires least braking effort. Other‐
wise, the brakes may overheat and reduce
brake efficiency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect
by shifting down, going all the way to first gear,
if needed.
Safety information
WARNING
Light but consistent brake pressure can
lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out
and possibly even brake failure. There is a risk
of an accident. Avoid placing excessive stress
on the brake system.◀
WARNING
In idle state, in the ECO PRO driving pro‐
gram or with drive-ready state switched off,
safety-relevant functions, for instance engine
braking effect, braking force boost and steer‐
ing assistance, are restricted or not available at
all. There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive
in idle state, in the ECO PRO driving program
or with drive-ready state switched off.◀
Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐
tion on the brake pads are increased by the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning
agents.
Seite 266
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
266
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause
a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐
sponse - generally this cannot be corrected.
Condensation water under the parked
vehicle
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water develops and collects un‐
derneath the vehicle.
Roof-mounted luggage rack
General information
Installation only possible in roof drip rail with
flaps. Further information is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Roof racks are available as special accessories.
Roof drip rail with flaps
The fixing points are located in the roof drip rail
above the doors.
Fold the cover outward.
Mounting
Follow the installation instructions of the roof
rack.
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained
for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.
Magnetic roof-mounted luggage racks
Because of the aluminum roof, magnetic roof-
mounted luggage racks cannot be used.
Loading
Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the
vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they
have a major effect on vehicle handling and
steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading
and driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
loads and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐
tained for tilting and opening the glass
sunroof.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the
bottom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, for instance
using ratchet straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the tailgate.
▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐
ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners
gently.
Driving on racetracks
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during
racetrack operation lead to increased wear.
This wear is not covered by the warranty. The
vehicle is not designed for use in motor sports
competition.
Seite 267
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
267
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
General information
The vehicle contains advanced technologies
for the reduction of fuel consumption and
emission values.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
Carrying out certain measures, such as a mod‐
erate driving style and regular maintenance,
can influence fuel consumption and the envi‐
ronmental impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts
following use
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof-mounted or rear
luggage racks which are no longer required fol‐
lowing use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
Close the windows and glass
sunroof
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
open results in increased air resistance and
raises fuel consumption.
Tires
General information
Tires can affect fuel consumption in various
ways, e.g., tire size may influence fuel con‐
sumption.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before
starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
tire wear.
Drive away without delay
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the quickest way of warming the cold
engine up to operating temperature.
Look well ahead when
driving
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
consumption.
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you.
Seite 268
Driving tips Saving fuel
268
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Avoid high engine speeds
Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel con‐
sumption and reduces wear.
If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift
indicator, refer to page 140.
Use coasting conditions
When approaching a red light, take your foot
off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to
a halt.
For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐
erator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
The high-voltage battery is charged.
Charge regularly
Charge the vehicle as often as possible at a
charging facility. This will further reduce fuel
consumption due to the use of electrical en‐
ergy.
Switch off the engine during
longer stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, for
instance at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in
traffic congestion.
Switch off any functions that
are not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear
window defroster require a lot of energy and
increase fuel consumption, especially in city
and stop-and-go traffic.
Switch off these functions if they are not
needed.
The ECO PRO driving mode supports the en‐
ergy conserving use of comfort features.
These functions are automatically deactivated
partially or completely.
Have maintenance carried
out
Have the vehicle maintained regularly to ach‐
ieve optimal vehicle efficiency and service life.
BMW recommends that maintenance work be
performed by a BMW dealer’s service center.
For information on the BMW Maintenance
System, refer to page 322.
Using the hybrid system
efficiently
Concept
The vehicle's hybrid system runs automati‐
cally. Through foresighted driving, the hybrid
properties are efficiently used, i.e., fuel con‐
sumption and energy recovery are optimized.
Optimizing energy recovery
Types of energy recovery
Energy recovery is used to charge the high-
voltage battery. Energy recovery is important
for the supply of electrical components and
thus a prerequisite for fuel efficiency. Energy
recovery appears in three stages during coast‐
ing and braking:
▷ Low energy recovery: while coasting to a
halt without stepping on the brake.
▷ Average energy recovery: while decelerat‐
ing slightly by gently pressing the brake
pedal.
▷ Maximum energy recovery: when pressing
the brake pedal somewhat more firmly pro‐
vided that the pointer remains in the mid‐
dle area of the CHARGE indicator in the in‐
strument cluster, refer to page 132.
Seite 269
Saving fuel Driving tips
269
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Optimum energy recovery
Foresighted driving and decelerating helps
with optimizing energy recovery.
As soon as the display shows the maximum
energy recovery, only press the brake pedal
harder if required by the situation.
Exemplary traffic situations for fuel
efficiency
In many driving situations, the hybrid system
allows for a particularly efficient energy man‐
agement.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic:
The combustion engine is switched on or
over automatically by the hybrid system.
▷ Driving with constant speed:
The electric motor relieves the combustion
engine periodically by also being switched
on.
Optimizing fuel consumption
Charging the vehicle regularly
Charge the vehicle regularly and completely
using a suitable charging device. This will re‐
duce fuel consumption due to the use of elec‐
trical energy.
Longer idle periods, refer to page 337, can re‐
duce the charge state of the high-voltage bat‐
tery.
Avoiding the use of the combustion
engine
Observe the following information to avoid us‐
ing the combustion engine:
▷ Set the characteristics of the hybrid sys‐
tem to MAX eDRIVE, refer to page 112.
▷ Observe the indicators in the instrument
cluster regarding electric driving, refer to
page 131.
Using the navigation system regularly
Use the navigation system also for familiar and
regularly traveled routes. When the navigation
system destination guidance is active, the hy‐
brid system uses the existing navigation data.
The upcoming course of the road is analyzed.
Hybrid operation adapts to the specific route
sections.
ECO PRO
Concept
ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves
on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐
gine control and comfort features, for instance
the climate control output, are adjusted.
Under certain conditions the engine is auto‐
matically decoupled from the transmission in
the D selector lever position and the engine is
switched off. The D selector lever position re‐
mains engaged.
In addition, context-sensitive information, ECO
PRO tips, are displayed to assist with an opti‐
mized fuel consumption driving style.
General information
The system includes the following
EfficientDynamics functions and
EfficientDynamics displays:
▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to
page 271.
▷ Driving style analysis, refer to page 271.
Overview
Seite 270
Driving tips Saving fuel
270
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Button
Activating ECO PRO
Press button. ECO PRO is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
Configuring ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
Opening via the Driving Dynamics
Control
1. Activate ECO PRO.
2. "Configure ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
Opening via iDrive
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Driving Experience Control"
4. "Configure ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Activating/deactivating ECO PRO
functions
The following ECO PRO functions can be acti‐
vated/deactivated:
▷ "ECO PRO speed warning"
▷ "ECO PRO seat climate control"
▷ "ECO PRO climate control"
▷ "ECO PRO sight"
Settings are stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
ECO PRO limit
▷ Activate the ECO PRO limit:
"ECO PRO speed warning"
An ECO PRO tip is displayed if the speed
of the set ECO PRO limit is exceeded.
▷ Adjust the ECO PRO limit speed:
"Tip at:"
Select the desired speed.
ECO PRO seat climate control
The output of seat heating and, where applica‐
ble, seat ventilation is reduced when ECO PRO
is activated.
ECO PRO climate control
Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient.
That is, it is possible to deviate slightly from
the set temperature or to heat or cool the car's
interior more slowly, to economize on fuel con‐
sumption.
The mirror heating is made available when ex‐
ternal temperatures are very cold.
ECO PRO Sight
The output of exterior mirror heating and rear
window defroster is reduced.
Resetting the settings
Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard
settings:
"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD"
Driving style analysis
Concept
The function helps develop an especially effi‐
cient driving style and to conserve fuel.
For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed.
The assessment is done in various categories
and is displayed on the Control Display.
This display will help you adjust your driving
style and save some fuel.
General information
The current trip is assessed.
To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO
PRO tips are displayed during driving.
The range of the vehicle can be extended by
adjusting your driving style.
Seite 271
Saving fuel Driving tips
271
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Functional requirement
This function is available in ECO PRO mode.
Calling up ECO PRO driving style
analysis
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "Driving style analysis"
Display on the Control Display
The display of the ECO PRO driving style anal‐
ysis consists of a symbolized route and a
lookup table.
The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driv‐
ing style. The more efficient the driving style,
the smoother the depicted route becomes, ar‐
row 1.
The table of values contains stars. The more
efficient the driving style, the more stars are in‐
cluded in the table, arrow 2.
If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi‐
cient, a more wavy road and a reduced number
of stars are displayed.
Seite 272
Driving tips Saving fuel
272
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Seite 273
Saving fuel Driving tips
273
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Charging the vehicle
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Concept
The vehicle can be charged using various
charging cables at charging stations or house‐
hold sockets. Control and monitoring of the
charging process are handled completely au‐
tomatically. The charge current strength can
be set via iDrive.
General information
High-voltage battery
The high-voltage battery is used as an energy
accumulator. The high-voltage battery can be
charged by energy recovery during the trip or
via the power grid.
In order to operate the high-voltage battery
optimally, charge the vehicle regularly and
completely on a compatible charger.
When charging via the power grid, you can
chose between the following variants.
▷ Level 1 charging via a household socket.
▷ Level 2 charging via a Level 2 charging sta‐
tion.
Level 1 charging is possible via a household
socket with a voltage of 120 volts.
For optimal use of the energy from the power
mains, charging at a charging station, e.g.,
BMW Wallbox, is recommended.
Charge current
General information
The charge current strength is indicated in am‐
peres.
The vehicle cannot automatically detect the
maximum permissible charge current strength
of the power grid during charging via a house‐
hold socket or charging station.
Level 1 charging
Prior to the first Level 1 charging at your own
household socket, as well as when charging at
external electrical power sockets in Level 1,
the allowed charge current strength must be
determined, for instance by a qualified electri‐
cian.
The charge current strength for Level 1 charg‐
ing, refer to page 281, can be adjusted in the
vehicle in three levels.
At delivery, the charge current for
Level 1 charging is set to the lowest level.
Depending on the country-specific version,
one of several ampere ratings is printed on the
enclosed Level 1 charging cable. This ampere
rating is the limit which must be adhered to for
the vehicle if the charge current is set to the
highest level. Depending on the charge cur‐
rent, the change in charge current strength
varies when lower levels are set.
Seite 276
Mobility Charging the vehicle
276
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Overview
Print on charging cable Charge current setting
"Max." "Reduced" "Low"
8 A 8 A 6 A 6 A
10 A 10 A 7.5 A 6 A
12 A 12 A 9 A 6 A
15 A 15 A 11.25 A 7.5 A
Depending on the set charge current, the
charging duration changes.
Maintaining charge state
Should it be necessary, for instance to con‐
serve a certain electrical range for a later point
in time on the trip, the current charge state of
the high-voltage battery can be maintained or
increased with BATTERY CONTROL, refer to
page 113.
Safety information
WARNING
Improper working with electrical current
can lead to an electric shock due to high vol‐
tages or high currents. There is a risk of fire or
danger to life. Observe the general safety reg‐
ulations when working with electrical current.◀
WARNING
A faulty and incorrectly designed charg‐
ing device at the charging location can cause
damage to the vehicle and overload the power
mains at the charging location. There is a risk
of fire and a risk of injury.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that, prior to your first use of a charging loca‐
tion, you have the compatibility of the following
components confirmed:
▷ Charging cable.
▷ Charging station.
▷ Household socket and connected cir‐
cuits.◀
WARNING
Damaged or worn charging devices, e.g.,
worn contacts, can heat up. There is a risk of
fire. Only use charging devices in proper
state.◀
WARNING
If a sufficient safety distance from easily
flammable materials is not maintained, simulta‐
neous charging and filling with fuel can cause a
risk of fire. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Do not fill the vehicle with
fuel and charge it simultaneously.◀
WARNING
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. High voltage is applied at the
charging connection. There is a risk of injury or
danger to life.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that work on the charging connection, e.g.,
cleaning, be performed by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
Seite 277
Charging the vehicle Mobility
277
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Charging cable
General information
Use a Level 1 charging cable, Level 2 charging
cable or the permanently installed charging ca‐
ble of a charging station to charge the vehicle.
Different charging cables can be required de‐
pending on the country.
Safety information
WARNING
Non-compatible charging cables or un‐
suitable charging stations can heat up and
cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk of
fire. Use charging cables or charging stations
for charging that are suitable for the respective
vehicle type.
A dealer's service center will be glad to provide
information about suitable charging cables.◀
WARNING
Improper use of the charging cable can
prevent charging and lead to damage, e.g., ca‐
ble fire. There is a risk of fire. Use the charging
cable only for charging the vehicle, and do not
extend it using cables or adapters.◀
WARNING
Damaged charging cables can heat up or
lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of fire
or a risk of injury. Use undamaged charging ca‐
bles only.◀
Level 1 charging cable
With the Level 1 charging cable, it is permissi‐
ble to perform charging from grounded house‐
hold sockets. At the power connection of a
household socket, charging is done with alter‐
nating current.
When a Level 1 charging cable is used, this
may produce efficiency values other than indi‐
cated on the energy label.
Level 2 charging cable
The Level 2 charging cable makes it possible
to quickly recharge at sockets of designated
Level 2 charging stations using a special plug.
Charging is performed with alternating current
at designated Level 2 charging stations. The
charging process can be completed faster than
at household sockets.
A charging current strength of up to maxi‐
mum 16 A is possible.
If necessary, the charging cable is attached to
the charging station.
Storage
The Level 1 charging cable is located in a bag
in the cargo area.
If required, store the charging cable with the
installed plug cover to prevent moisture in the
charging cable plug.
Connecting
Charging socket flap
The charging socket flap is located on the left
side of the vehicle.
Seite 278
Mobility Charging the vehicle
278
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Always keep charging socket clean and unob‐
structed.
Keep the charging socket flap closed when the
charging socket is not used.
Connecting the charging cable
To connect, engage selector lever position P,
deactivate drive-ready state, and unlock the
vehicle. Set the parking brake, if needed.
1. Tap on the charging socket flap, arrow.
2. Connect the Level 1 charging cable to the
household socket or the Level 2 charging
cable to the port on the charging station.
3. Insert the charging cable plug correspond‐
ing to the charging socket, and push it in
until it engages.
Removing
When the vehicle is locked, the charging cable
is locked. Unlock the vehicle before removing
the cable.
If necessary, clean the area between charging
socket flap and charging socket, for instance
from snow, before removing it.
1.
Unlock the vehicle by remote control if it is
locked.
Charging cable is unlocked.
2. Press the release button on the handle, ar‐
row 1, and grasp the charging cable at the
gripping areas.
Charging process is interrupted.
3. Remove the charging cable from the
charging socket, arrow 2.
4. Close the charging socket flap.
5. Disconnect Level 1 charging cable from
the household socket or Level 2 charging
cable from the port on the charging station
as needed.
6. Stow the charging cable.
At a charging station, insert the perma‐
nently installed charging cable in the place
provided for it.
Manually unlocking the charging cable
The charging cable is locked when the vehicle
is locked and during the charging process.
In case of an electrical malfunction, the charg‐
ing cable can be manually unlocked.
1.
Open the hood.
2. Pull knob.
Charging cable is manually unlocked.
3. Removing the charging cable, refer to
page 279.
Seite 279
Charging the vehicle Mobility
279
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Charging process
Safety information
WARNING
Improper use of the power mains con‐
nection can lead to damage, e.g., cable fire.
There is a risk of injury or risk of property dam‐
age. Use the charging cable only for charging
the vehicle, and do not extend it using cables
or adapters.◀
WARNING
If the charge current strength is adjusted
incorrectly, the power mains of the household
socket can be overloaded and overheat. There
is a risk of fire. Adjust the charge current
strength to the power mains prior to charging
on household sockets. With unknown power
networks, set on the lowest level.◀
Starting the charging process
1.
Engage selector lever position P. Set the
parking brake, if needed.
2. Planning the charging process, refer to
page 281.
3. Switch off drive-ready state.
4. Connect Level 1 charging cable to the
household socket or Level 2 charging ca‐
ble to the port on the charging station.
5. Open charging socket flap.
6. Connect charging cable to the vehicle, re‐
fer to page 278.
7. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked.
At high temperatures, the high-voltage battery
is initially cooled. There may be a delay before
charging starts. If the high-voltage battery is
discharged, cooling of the high-voltage battery
may not be possible. The charging process
cannot be started.
The charging process may take longer under
extremely low or high temperatures.
Display of the charging status
Indicator light at the charging socket
Charging status
Light Charging status
White Charging cable can be con‐
nected or removed.
Flashes yel‐
low
Charging process is being pre‐
pared.
Blue The charging process starts at
the set time.
Flashes
blue
Charging process is active.
Flashes red Fault in the charging process.
Green Charging process is com‐
pleted.
When the vehicle is locked, the indicator light
goes out after some time.
When the vehicle is unlocked, the blue indica‐
tor light flashes continuously. The other indica‐
tor lights go out after some time.
To check the charging process, press the
key on the remote control. The charging status
is indicated on the indicator light. In some
cases the vehicle is locked.
Additional messages about the charging status
can be displayed in the instrument cluster, on
the BMW display key, or via the BMW Con‐
nected app on a smartphone.
Seite 280
Mobility Charging the vehicle
280
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Planning the charging process
General information
The charging process can be adapted to con‐
straints, such as the cost of electricity or avail‐
able power sources. The vehicle can control
the charging process in such a way that the
charging process is completed at the depar‐
ture time. A departure time must be set for this
purpose, refer to page 283.
The following settings are available:
▷ Immediate charging.
▷ Set time window for favorable charging.
▷ Set charging via a Level 1 charging cable.
▷ Intelligent charging.
If drive-ready state is switched off, changes
can be made via iDrive. Settings for stationary
climate control and charging process are also
accepted for planned departure times.
Intelligent charging can be ignored for the next
charging process.
1.
"Charge immediately once"
Immediate charging
The charging process starts as soon as the
charging cable is connected.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Charge immediately"
Setting time window for favorable
charging
When departure time is set, a time window for
charging with a favorable electricity rate can be
set.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Charge for departure time"
4. "Set low cost time slot"
5. Set rate begin.
6. Set rate end.
The Digital Charging Service enables the time
window to be set automatically for certain loca‐
tions. Further information about the Digital
Charging Service is available on the Internet:
https://charging.bmwgroup.com
The vehicle can also start the charging process
before the selected time window begins or end
it after the selected time window finishes. The
starting point of the charging process is ad‐
justed so the vehicle can be fully charged and,
if applicable, its climate controlled right up to
the departure time.
If drive-ready state is switched off, changes
can be made via iDrive.
The set time window can be ignored for the
next charging process.
1.
"Charge immediately once"
Setting the charge current for
charging via a Level 1 charging cable
Depending on the electrical mains, the vehicle
must be charged with a different charging cur‐
rent strength, refer to page 276.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Charging rate settings"
Settings are stored. When you change charg‐
ing locations you also might need to change
the setting for charging.
Set the charge current strength at other
household sockets to the lowest level.
Stopping the charging process
The charging process can be stopped at any
time by removing the charging cable and con‐
tinued at a later time by connecting the charg‐
ing cable. This enables, e.g., the use of other
Seite 281
Charging the vehicle Mobility
281
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
loads on the power connection or prevents si‐
multaneous high power from multiple loads.
Removing the charging cable, refer to
page 279.
Continuing the charging process
If the charging process is interrupted, e.g.,
through a temporary power failure, the charg‐
ing process is automatically continued after
the interruption.
Terminating the charging process
1. Remove the charging cable from the vehi‐
cle, refer to page 279.
2. Stow the charging cable as required.
3. Close the charging socket flap.
4. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked.
Intelligent charging
Concept
Intelligent charging can adapt the charging
process dynamically via the Internet to the en‐
vironmental condition, such as the availability
of solar power or time-variable electricity rates.
Intelligent charging is part of BMW's Digital
Charging Service.
Further information about the Digital Charging
Service is available on the Internet:
https://charging.bmwgroup.com
General information
No time for the end of charging is displayed in
the instrument cluster for intelligent charging.
If drive-ready state is switched off, changes
can be made via iDrive.
Intelligent charging can be ignored for the next
charging process.
1.
"Charge immediately once"
Functional requirements
▷ Account on the BMW charging portal.
▷ A subscription to the intelligent charging
service has been obtained.
▷ Suitable Wallbox.
▷ Departure time set, refer to page 283.
▷ Charge current strength setting to highest
level, refer to page 281.
Configuring the BMW charging
service
Use one of the following to configure the
BMW charging service:
▷ BMW remote app on the smartphone.
▷ BMW charging portal in the Internet.
Activating intelligent charging
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Charge for departure time"
4. "Intelligent charging"
Displays in the instrument
cluster
The charge state indicator light, refer to
page 131, shows the charge state of the high-
voltage battery in the instrument cluster, if
standby state is switched on. If all bars are fil‐
led, the high-voltage battery is fully charged.
Even if no bars are filled, the high-voltage sys‐
tem is still under high voltage.
Information regarding the charging process are
shown on the charging screen, refer to
page 130.
Seite 282
Mobility Charging the vehicle
282
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Display Meaning
Blue plug: charging process active
or completed.
White plug: charging process inter‐
rupted.
End of charging time or set depar‐
ture time.
Charging progress bar.
Indicator in blue: charged electrical
range.
Indicator in white: maximum electri‐
cal range.
Departure time set.
Climate control activated at depar‐
ture time.
Flashing: ventilation active.
Flashing: heating active.
Flashing: cooling active.
Departure time
Concept
For optimum range and climate control, the
departure time can be set before parking the
vehicle.
General information
With a set departure time, the vehicle is pre-
heated or pre-cooled during the charging
process if climate control is set. Climate con‐
trol output is reduced during the trip. This in‐
creases the range during electric driving.
The following settings are possible at depar‐
ture time:
▷ Climate control at departure time.
▷ Scheduling of up to three regular departure
times.
If drive-ready state is switched off, changes
can be made via iDrive. Settings for climate
control and charging process are also applied
for scheduled departure times.
Climate control at departure time
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Precondition for departure"
Setting the departure time
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Set departure time"
4. Set the time and weekday.
Up to three departure times can be set.
Activating the departure time
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Set departure time"
Set departure times are displayed.
4. For instance, activate "Departure time 1".
Up to three departure times can be activated.
The set departure time will be deactivated, if
the departure time was ignored three times in
a row.
Seite 283
Charging the vehicle Mobility
283
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Climate control
General information
The following settings for climate control of
the vehicle are possible:
▷ Activate stationary climate control immedi‐
ately, refer to page 239.
With stationary climate control activated
and no charging cable connected, the
range is reduced.
▷ Planned climate control at the set depar‐
ture time, refer to page 240.
Discharged high-voltage and
vehicle battery
General information
In addition to the high-voltage battery, the ve‐
hicle has a 12 volt vehicle battery, which is re‐
quired for operation of the onboard electron‐
ics.
If the high-voltage battery is discharged and
the combustion engine is started, air condi‐
tioning may be limited.
With a discharged vehicle battery, no operation
of the vehicle is possible.
Starting the vehicle
If the vehicle battery is discharged, the com‐
bustion engine can be started using the bat‐
tery of another vehicle and two jumper cables,
see Jump-starting, refer to page 330.
Seite 284
Mobility Charging the vehicle
284
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Refueling
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
General information
Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to
page 288, prior to refueling.
To also ensure all engine functions under un‐
favorable conditions, for instance vehicle on a
steep incline, at least 3 US gal/10 liters fuel
should be refueled.
Safety information
WARNING
If a sufficient safety distance from easily
flammable materials is not maintained, simulta‐
neous charging and filling with fuel can cause a
risk of fire. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Do not fill the vehicle with
fuel and charge it simultaneously.◀
NOTE
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of property
damage. Refuel promptly.◀
Tank vent
Concept
The vehicle is equipped with a special fuel
tank. The fuel tank is designed for special re‐
quirements that arise from hybrid operation of
the vehicle, i.e., alternating drive with combus‐
tion engine or electric motor.
General information
In the fuel tank, excess pressure can build up
due to gasoline vapors which are dissipated
before the fuel cap is opened.
Overview
The button is located on the driver's floor area.
Tank venting
1.
Switch off drive-ready state.
2.
Press button to start the pressure
equalization.
The status of the tank venting is displayed
in the instrument cluster. In rare cases, the
tank venting can last several minutes.
If the tank venting has been completed, a
message is displayed in the instrument
cluster. The fuel filler flap is released for
opening.
3. Open the fuel filler flap.
Seite 285
Refueling Mobility
285
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
If the fuel filler flap is not opened within
10 minutes after the fuel filler flap was re‐
leased, the fuel filler flap relocks. Press
button again.
Fuel cap
Opening
Before opening , vent the tank, refer to
page 285.
1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached
to the fuel filler flap.
Closing
WARNING
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be
jammed and crushed during closing. The cap
cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors
can escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Pay attention that the retain‐
ing strap is not jammed or crushed when clos‐
ing the lid.◀
1. Fit the lid and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
E.g., in the event of an electrical malfunction.
The release is located in the cargo area.
1.
Open the cover on the right side trim.
2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump
symbol. This silently releases the fuel filler
flap.
3. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap. Fuel filler flap is opened.
4. Carefully open the fuel cap. Excess pres‐
sure can build up in the fuel tank from gas‐
oline vapor.
5. Fuel the vehicle as usual. The residue
pressure in the tank may make refueling
difficult, for instance the fuel pump nozzle
may shut off frequently.
Seite 286
Mobility Refueling
286
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Observe the following when
refueling
General information
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Observe safety regulations posted at the gas
station.
Safety information
WARNING
If a sufficient safety distance from easily
flammable materials is not maintained, simulta‐
neous charging and filling with fuel can cause a
risk of fire. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Do not fill the vehicle with
fuel and charge it simultaneously.◀
NOTE
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfill‐
ing of the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys‐
tem. Painted surfaces may be damaged by
contact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm the
environment. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. Avoid overfilling.◀
Seite 287
Refueling Mobility
287
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Fuel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Fuel recommendation
General information
Depending on the region, many gas stations
sell fuel that has been customized to winter or
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in
winter, e.g., helps make a cold start easier.
Gasoline
General information
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline
should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur con‐
tent.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used.
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling.
Ethanol should meet the following quality stan‐
dards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
Safety information
CAUTION
The use of poor-quality fuels may result
in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐
tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐
ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐
ronmental conditions such as high ambient
temperature and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to
purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled main‐
tenance.◀
NOTE
Do not press the Start/Stop button after
refueling with the wrong fuel. Furthermore, the
catalytic converter is permanently damaged.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not re‐
fuel or add the following in the case of gasoline
engines:
▷ Leaded gasoline.
▷ Metallic additives, e.g., manganese or iron.
Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.◀
NOTE
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel sys‐
tem and the engine. There is a risk of damage
to property. Do not use fuels with a higher per‐
centage of ethanol than recommended. Do not
refuel with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5
to M100.◀
Seite 288
Mobility Fuel
288
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
NOTE
Fuel that does not comply with the mini‐
mum quality can compromise engine function
or cause engine damage. There is a risk of
property damage. Do not fill with fuel that does
not comply with the minimum quality.◀
Recommended fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 91.
Minimum fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 89.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high external temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Seite 289
Fuel Mobility
289
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Wheels and tires
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Tire inflation pressure
General information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐
sure influence the following:
▷ The service life of the tires.
▷ Road safety.
▷ Driving comfort.
▷ Fuel consumption.
Safety information
WARNING
A tire with low or missing tire inflation
pressure impacts handling, such as steering
and braking response. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐
sure, and correct it as needed, e.g., twice a
month and before a long trip.◀
Checking the tire inflation pressure
General information
Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold, i.e.:
▷ Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 km has
not been exceeded.
▷ If the vehicle has not moved again for at
least 2 hours after a trip.
The tire inflation pressure specifications only
relate to cold tires or tires at the same temper‐
ature as the ambient temperature.
Tires heat up while driving. The tire inflation
pressure increases with the tire temperature.
The displays of inflation devices may under-
read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire in‐
flation pressure.
Check whether all valve caps are screwed onto
the tire valves.
After correcting the tire inflation
pressure
For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires.
For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset the
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
Tire inflation pressure specifications
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 291, contains all tire inflation pressure
specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
ambient temperature. The tire inflation pres‐
sure values apply to tire sizes approved by the
manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle
type.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
Tire inflation pressures up to
100 mph/160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
to page 291, and adjust as necessary.
Seite 290
Mobility Wheels and tires
290
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
These pressure values can also be found on
the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's
door pillar.
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
Tire inflation pressure values up to
100 mph/160 km/h
740Le xDrive iPerformance
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/50 R 18 100
V M+S A/S RSC
245/50 R 18 100
H M+S RSC
2.2/32 2.4/35
245/45 R 19 102
V M+S XL A/S
RSC
245/45 R 19 102
V M+S XL RSC
2.4/35 2.6/38
Front:
245/45 R 19 98 Y
RSC
2.5/36 -
Rear: 275/40 R 19
101 Y RSC
- 2.5/36
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Front:
245/35 R 21 96
Y XL RSC
3.0/44 -
Rear: 275/30 R 21
98 Y XL RSC
- 3.0/44
Emergency wheel:
T 135/80 R 18
104 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2/60
Tire inflation pressures at max.
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
WARNING
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,
and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the
relevant table on the following pages. Other‐
wise, tire damage and accidents could occur.◀
For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
to page 291, and adjust as necessary.
Tire inflation pressure values over
100 mph/160 km/h
740Le xDrive iPerformance
Without high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/50 R 18 100
V M+S A/S RSC
245/50 R 18 100
H M+S RSC
2.5/36 2.7/39
Seite 291
Wheels and tires Mobility
291
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
245/45 R 19 102
V M+S XL A/S
RSC
245/45 R 19 102
V M+S XL RSC
2.7/39 2.9/42
Front:
245/45 R 19 98 Y
RSC
2.5/36 -
Rear: 275/40 R 19
101 Y RSC
- 2.5/36
Front:
245/35 R 21 96
Y XL RSC
3.0/44 -
Rear: 275/30 R 21
98 Y XL RSC
- 3.0/44
Emergency wheel:
T 135/80 R 18
104 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2/60
With high-speed tuning feature
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
245/50 R 18 100
H M+S RSC
2.5/36 2.7/39
245/45 R 19 102
V M+S XL RSC
2.9/42 3.1/45
Front:
245/45 R 19 98 Y
RSC
2.7/39 -
Rear:
275/40 R 19 101
Y RSC
- 2.7/39
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Front:
245/35 R 21 96
Y XL RSC
3.3/48 -
Rear:
275/30 R 21 98
Y XL RSC
- 3.3/48
Emergency
wheel:
T 135/80 R 18
104 M
Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2/60
Tire identification marks
Tire size
245/45 R 18 96 Y
245: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
18: rim diameter in inches
96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Maximum tire load
Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible
weight for which the tire is approved.
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire side‐
wall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR
– on the certification label on the driver door B-
pillar. Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be
greater than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross
Axle Weight Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs.
rear GAWR and tire loads, respectively.
Speed letter
Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h
R = up to 106 mph/170 km/h
S = up to 112 mph/180 km/h
Seite 292
Mobility Wheels and tires
292
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 2117
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
2117: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age
Recommendation
Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at
least every 6 years.
Manufacture date
You can find the manufacture date of the tire
on the tire's sidewall.
Designation Manufacture date
DOT … 2117 21st week of 2017
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera‐
ture A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition to
these grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well
on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, how‐
ever, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteris‐
tics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
to a level of performance which all passenger
vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Mo‐
tor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades
Band A represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Seite 293
Wheels and tires Mobility
293
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.◀
RSC – Run-flat tires
Run-flat tires, refer to page 296, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the sidewall.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
weather performance than summer tires.
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased
risk of hydroplaning.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for
winter operation.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the
tire's circumference and have the legally re‐
quired minimum height of 0.063 in‐
ches/1.6 mm.
The positions of the wear indicators are
marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread
Wear Indicator.
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles
can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur
with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐
ioning between the wheel and the road. Be
careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your
speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped
with low-profile tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
functions:
▷ Unusual vibrations.
▷ Unusual tire or running noises.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐
dency to pull to the left or right.
Damage can be caused by the following situa‐
tions, for instance:
▷ Driving over curbs.
▷ Road damage.
▷ Tire inflation pressure too low.
▷ Vehicle overloading.
▷ Incorrect tire storage.
Safety information
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation
pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle
control. There is a risk of an accident. If tire
damage is suspected while driving, immedi‐
ately reduce speed and stop. Have wheels and
Seite 294
Mobility Wheels and tires
294
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
tires checked. For this purpose, drive carefully
to the nearest dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Have vehicle towed or transported as
needed.◀
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation
pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle
control. There is a risk of an accident. Do not
repair damaged tires, but have them re‐
placed.◀
WARNING
Tires can become damaged by driving
over obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at
high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire
cross-section. The smaller the tire cross-sec‐
tion, the higher the risk of tire damage. There
is a danger of accidents and property damage.
If possible, drive around obstacles, or drive
over them slowly and carefully.◀
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting and wheel balancing
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried
out by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Wheel and tire combination
General information
You can ask the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop
about the correct wheel/tire combination and
wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
Incorrect wheel/tire combinations impair the
function of a variety of systems such as ABS or
DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
figuration from a single manufacturer.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel/
tire combination remounted on the vehicle as
soon as possible.
Safety information
WARNING
Wheels and tires which are not suitable
for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehi‐
cle, for instance due to contact with the body
due to tolerances despite the same official size
rating. There is a risk of an accident. The man‐
ufacturer of your vehicle strongly suggests
that you use wheels and tires that have been
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for
your vehicle type.◀
WARNING
Mounted steel wheels can cause techni‐
cal problems, e.g., independent loosening of
the lug bolts, damage to the brake discs. There
is a risk of an accident. Do not mount steel
wheels.◀
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of the ve‐
hicle recommends certain tire brands. The tire
brands can be identified by a star on the tire
sidewall.
New tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Seite 295
Wheels and tires Mobility
295
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Retreaded tires
WARNING
Retreaded tires can have different tire
casing structures. With advanced age the serv‐
ice life can be limited. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. The manufacturer of your vehicle does
not recommend the use of retreaded tires.◀
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Winter tires
General information
Winter tires are recommended for operating on
winter roads.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro‐
vide better winter traction than summer tires,
they usually do not provide the same level of
performance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then attach a label showing the permissible
maximum speed in the field of view. The label
is available from a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
With winter tires mounted, observe and do not
exceed the permissible maximum speed.
Run-flat tires
If you are already using run-flat tires, for your
own safety you should replace them only with
the same kind. No spare tire is available in the
case of a flat tire. Further information is availa‐
ble from a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Rotating wheels between axles
Different wear patterns can occur on the front
and rear axles depending on individual driving
conditions. The tires can be rotated in pairs
between the axles to achieve even wear. Fur‐
ther information is available from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop. After rotating, check the tire
pressure and correct, if needed.
Rotating the tires is not permissible on vehi‐
cles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the
front and rear axles.
Storing tires
Air pressure
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark
place.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease, and solvents.
Do not leave tires in plastic bags.
Remove dirt from wheels or tires.
Run-flat tires
Concept
Run-flat tires permit continued driving under
restricted conditions even in the event of a
complete loss of tire inflation pressure.
General information
The wheels consist of tires that are self-sup‐
porting, to a limited degree, and possibly spe‐
cial rims.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to
remain drivable to a restricted degree in the
event of a tire inflation pressure loss.
Seite 296
Mobility Wheels and tires
296
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Follow the instructions for continued driving
with a flat tire.
Safety information
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently with a
run-flat with no or low inflation pressure; for in‐
stance, your lane stability when braking is re‐
duced, braking distances are longer and the
self-steering properties will change. There is a
risk of an accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Label
The tires are marked on the tire sidewall with
RSC Run-flat System Component.
Repairing a flat tire
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead position
and engage the steering wheel lock.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Mobility System
Concept
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage
can be sealed temporarily to enable continued
travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped
into the tires, which seals the damage from the
inside.
General information
▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐
lity System found on the compressor and
sealant container.
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
▷ Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.
▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies
that have penetrated the tire. Only remove
foreign objects if they are visibly protruding
from the tire.
▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
container and apply it to the steering
wheel.
▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
wheel electronics. In this case, have the
electronics checked and replaced at the
next opportunity.
▷ The compressor can be used to check the
tire inflation pressure.
Seite 297
Wheels and tires Mobility
297
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Overview
Storage
The Mobility System is in a bag on the right
side of the cargo area.
Sealant container
▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.
▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.
Observe use-by date on the sealant container.
Compressor
1 Sealant container unlocking
2 Sealant container holder
3 Tire pressure gage
4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button
5 On/off switch
6 Compressor
7 Connector/cable for socket
8 Connection hose
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead position
and engage the steering wheel lock.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Filling the tire with sealant
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain pollutants which are colorless and odor‐
less. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and
ensure sufficient ventilation.◀
NOTE
The compressor can overheat during ex‐
tended operation. There is a risk of property
damage. Do not run the compressor for more
than 10 min.◀
Seite 298
Mobility Wheels and tires
298
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Filling
1. Shake the sealant container.
2. Pull filling hose completely out of the cover
of the sealant container. Do not kink the
hose.
3. Slide the sealant container into the holder
on the compressor housing, ensuring that
it engages audibly.
4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer onto the tire valve of the nonworking
wheel.
5. With the compressor switched off, insert
the plug into the power socket inside the
vehicle.
6. With standby state switched on or the en‐
gine running, switch on the compressor.
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to
fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire infla‐
tion pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the
tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach
approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compres‐
sor at this point.
Seite 299
Wheels and tires Mobility
299
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Checking and adjusting the tire
inflation pressure
Checking
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire
pressure gage.
To continue the trip, a tire inflation pressure of
at least 2 bar must be reached.
Removing and stowing the sealant
container
1.
Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer from the tire valve.
2. Press the red unlocking device.
3. Remove the sealant container from the
compressor.
4. Wrap and store the sealant container in
suitable material to avoid dirtying the cargo
area.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is not
reached
1.
Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐
tribute the sealant in the tire.
3. Screw the connection hose of the com‐
pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.
4. Insert the connector into the power socket
inside the vehicle.
5. With standby state switched on or the en‐
gine running, switch on the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar
cannot be reached, contact your dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar is
reached, see Minimum tire inflation pres‐
sure is reached.
6. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the tire valve.
7. Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is
reached
1.
Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the tire valve.
2. Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
4. Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to
ensure that the sealant is evenly distrib‐
uted in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h.
Seite 300
Mobility Wheels and tires
300
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Adjustment
1. Stop at a suitable location.
2. Screw the connection hose of the com‐
pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.
3. Insert the connector into the power socket
inside the vehicle.
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at
least 2.0 bar.
▷ Increase tire inflation pressure: with
standby state switched on or the en‐
gine running, switch on the compres‐
sor.
▷ Reduce tire inflation pressure: press
the button on the compressor.
5. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the tire valve.
6. Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Continuing the trip
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 307.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to
page 302.
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant
container of the Mobility System promptly.
Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of
fine-link snow chains have been tested by the
manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended
as road-safe and suitable.
Information regarding suitable snow chains is
available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Use
WARNING
With the mounting of snow chains on un‐
suitable tires, the snow chains can come into
contact with vehicle parts. There is a risk of ac‐
cidents or risk of property damage. Only mount
snow chains on tires that are designated by
their manufacturer as suitable for the use of
snow chains.◀
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 245/50 R 18.
▷ 245/45 R 19.
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
tions.
Make sure that the snow chains are always
sufficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed ac‐
cording to the snow chain manufacturer's in‐
structions.
Do not initialize the run-flat tires after mount‐
ing snow chains, as doing so may result in in‐
correct readings.
Seite 301
Wheels and tires Mobility
301
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
after mounting snow chains, as doing so may
result in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control DTC to optimize the
forward momentum.
Maximum speed with snow chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
when using snow chains.
Rear axle steering during operation
with snow chains
General information
In order to guarantee free running of the
wheels when operating with snow chains, rear
axle steering of the integral active steering
must be switched off when snow chains are
mounted.
Safety information
WARNING
When rear wheel steering is switched on
and snow chains are mounted, there can be
contact between snow chains and the chassis.
There is a risk of accidents or risk of property
damage. With mounted snow chains, switch
off the rear wheel steering.◀
Switching off rear wheel steering
The rear wheel steering is switched off by
specifying that snow chains are installed.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Tire chains"
4. "Tire chains installed"
Starting with the permissible maximum speed
with snow chains of 30 mph/50 km/h the rear
axle steering will be switched on again auto‐
matically.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
Concept
The system monitors tire inflation pressure in
the four mounted tires. The system warns you
if there is a loss of pressure in one or more
tires.
General information
Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire in‐
flation pressure and tire temperature.
When operating the system, also note the ad‐
ditional information found in the Tire inflation
pressure, refer to page 290, chapter.
Functional requirements
The following conditions must be met for the
system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of
tire inflation pressure is not assured:
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, a reset
was performed with the correct tire infla‐
tion pressure.
▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad‐
justed to a new value, a reset was per‐
formed.
▷ Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.
Status display
Current status
The system status can be displayed on the
Control Display, e.g., whether or not the sys‐
tem is active.
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
The current status is displayed.
Current tire temperature
Depending on the model, the current tire tem‐
peratures are displayed.
Seite 302
Mobility Wheels and tires
302
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
The current tire temperatures may change
while driving or due to the external tempera‐
ture.
Tire conditions
General information
Tire and system status are indicated by the
color of the wheels and a SMS text message
on the Control Display.
All wheels green
The system is active and bases warnings on
the tire inflation pressures stored during the
last reset.
One to four yellow wheels
A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation
pressure has occurred in the indicated tires.
Gray wheels
It may not be possible to identify tire pressure
losses.
Possible causes:
▷ Malfunction.
▷ The system is being reset.
Performing a reset
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
4. Switch on drive-ready state and do not
drive off.
5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform
reset".
6. Drive away.
The wheels are displayed in gray and the fol‐
lowing is displayed "Resetting Tire Pressure
Monitor…".
After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
short period, the set tire inflation pressures are
accepted as the target tire inflation pressures.
The reset is completed automatically while
driving.
After a successfully completed reset, the
wheels on the Control Display are shown in
green and the following is displayed: "Tire
Pressure Monitor active. See label for
recommended pressures.".
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When
you continue the reset resumes automatically.
Messages
General information
A low tire inflation pressure may cause the
DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be switched
on.
Safety information
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Run-
flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is
a risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if
the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Fol‐
low the information on run-flat tires and contin‐
ued driving with these tires.◀
If a tire inflation pressure check is
required
Message
A symbol with a Check Control message ap‐
pears on the Control Display.
Seite 303
Wheels and tires Mobility
303
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Symbol Possible cause
Inflation was not carried out accord‐
ing to specifications, e.g., the tire
has not been sufficiently inflated.
The system has detected a wheel
change, but no reset was done.
The tire inflation pressure has fallen
below the level of the last reset.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Measure
1.
Check the tire pressure and correct as
needed.
2. Perform a system reset.
If the tire inflation pressure is too low
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control
message appears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a tire inflation pressure
loss.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Measure
1.
Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a
speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.
2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a
gas station, check the tire inflation pres‐
sure in all four tires and correct if neces‐
sary.
3. Reset the system.
If there is a significant loss of tire
inflation pressure
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with the affected tire ap‐
pears in a Check Control message on the Con‐
trol Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Measure
1.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
normal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 296, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires, for instance using the tire pressure
gage of a flat tire kit.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may
not have been reset. In this case, perform
the reset.
Seite 304
Mobility Wheels and tires
304
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
If tire damage cannot be found, contact a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or
by changing the wheel.
Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit,
may damage the TPM wheel electronics. Have
the electronics replaced at the next opportu‐
nity.
Run-flat tires
Safety information
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently with a
run-flat with no or low inflation pressure; for in‐
stance, your lane stability when braking is re‐
duced, braking distances are longer and the
self-steering properties will change. There is a
risk of an accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Follow the following when continuing to drive
with a damaged tire:
1.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires at the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may
not have been reset. In this case, perform
the reset.
Possible driving range with a
depressurized tire
The possible driving range varies depending
on the how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g.,
speed, road conditions, external temperature.
The driving range may be less but may also be
more if an economical driving style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight
and used under favorable conditions, its possi‐
ble driving range will be up to 50 miles/80 km.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle
differently, potentially leading to conditions
such as the following:
▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course.
▷ Longer braking distances.
▷ Changed self-steering properties.
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steer‐
ing maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for in‐
stance curbs or potholes.
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐
dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
System limits
Temperature
The tire inflation pressure depends on the
tire's temperature.
Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the
tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire in‐
flation pressure.
The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the
tire temperature falls again.
Seite 305
Wheels and tires Mobility
305
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
These circumstances may cause a warning
when temperatures fall very sharply.
Sudden tire pressure loss
The system cannot indicate sudden serious
tire damage caused by external circumstances.
Failure to perform a reset
The system does not function properly if a re‐
set has not been carried out, for instance a flat
tire is reported though tire inflation pressures
are correct.
Malfunction
Message
The yellow warning light flashes and is
then illuminated continuously. A Check
Control message is displayed. It may
not be possible to identify tire pressure losses.
Measure
▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is
mounted: have the wheels checked, if
needed.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked.
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: after leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
▷ The system was unable to complete the
reset. Perform a system reset again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐
ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also
been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐
cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐
ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐
tor is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐
tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illumi‐
nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐
sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐
function exists. When the malfunction indicator
is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replace‐
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐
tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
Seite 306
Mobility Wheels and tires
306
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
FTM Flat Tire Monitor
Concept
The system detects tire inflation pressure loss
on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐
tween the individual wheels while driving.
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the
diameter and therefore the rotational speed of
the corresponding wheel changes. The differ‐
ence will be detected and reported as a flat
tire.
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tion pressure in the tires.
Functional requirements
The following conditions must be met for the
system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of
tire inflation pressure is not assured:
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, an initial‐
ization was performed with the correct tire
inflation pressure.
▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad‐
justed to a new value, an initialization was
performed.
Status display
The current status of the flat tire monitor can
be displayed, e.g., whether the RPA is active.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Initialization required
An initialization must be performed in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been
adjusted.
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement.
Performing initialization
When initializing, the set tire inflation pres‐
sures serve as reference values in order to de‐
tect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐
firming the tire inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
Using iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
4. Switch on drive-ready state and do not
drive off.
5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset"
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues when
driving resumes.
Messages
General information
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control is switched on, if needed.
Safety information
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Run-
flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is
a risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if
the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Fol‐
low the information on run-flat tires and contin‐
ued driving with these tires.◀
Indication of a flat tire
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
Seite 307
Wheels and tires Mobility
307
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control
message appears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
Measure
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
normal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 296, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1.
Identify the damaged tire.
To do this, check the tire inflation pressure
in all four tires, for instance using the tire
pressure gage of a flat tire kit.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
If identification of flat tire damage is not
possible, please contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
2.
Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or
by changing the wheel.
Run-flat tires
Safety information
WARNING
Your vehicle handles differently with a
run-flat with no or low inflation pressure; for in‐
stance, your lane stability when braking is re‐
duced, braking distances are longer and the
self-steering properties will change. There is a
risk of an accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
Follow the following when continuing to drive
with a damaged tire:
1.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires at the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
Possible driving range with a
depressurized tire
The possible driving range varies depending
on the how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g.,
speed, road conditions, external temperature.
The driving range may be less but may also be
more if an economical driving style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight
and used under favorable conditions, its possi‐
ble driving range will be up to 50 miles/80 km.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle
differently, potentially leading to conditions
such as the following:
▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course.
▷ Longer braking distances.
▷ Changed self-steering properties.
Seite 308
Mobility Wheels and tires
308
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steer‐
ing maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for in‐
stance curbs or potholes.
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐
dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
System limits
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
▷ A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss
in all four tires will not be recognized.
Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure
regularly.
▷ Sudden serious tire damage caused by ex‐
ternal circumstances cannot be recognized
in advance.
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface.
▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction
wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting).
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Changing wheels/tires
General information
When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a
wheel does not always need to be changed im‐
mediately when there is a loss of tire inflation
pressure due to a flat tire.
If needed, the tools for changing wheels are
available as accessories from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Safety information
DANGER
The vehicle jack is only provided for
short-term lifting of the vehicle for wheel
changes. Even if all safety measures are ob‐
served, there is a risk of the raised vehicle fall‐
ing, if the vehicle jack tilts over. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. If the vehicle is
raised, do not lie under the vehicle and do not
start the engine.◀
WARNING
The vehicle jack is provided by the vehi‐
cle manufacturer for changing wheels in the
event of a flat tire. The vehicle jack is not de‐
signed for frequent use, for instance for chang‐
ing from summer to winter tires. Using the ve‐
hicle jack frequently may cause it to jam or
become damaged. There is a risk of injury and
risk of damage to property. Only use the vehi‐
cle jack to change an emergency wheel or a
spare tire in the event of a flat tire.◀
WARNING
On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for
example snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack
can slip away. There is a risk of injury. If possi‐
ble, change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip-
resistant surface.◀
WARNING
The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting
the vehicle and for the jacking points on the
vehicle only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift
any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle
jack.◀
WARNING
If the vehicle jack is not inserted into the
jacking point provided for this purpose, the ve‐
hicle may be damaged or the vehicle jack may
slip when it is being cranked up. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. When
cranking up the vehicle jack, ensure that it is
Seite 309
Wheels and tires Mobility
309
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
inserted in the jacking point next to the wheel
housing.◀
WARNING
A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack
may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are ex‐
erted on it. There is a risk of injury and risk of
damage to property. While the vehicle is
raised, do not exert lateral forces on the vehicle
or pull abruptly on the vehicle. Have a stuck
wheel removed by a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop.◀
WARNING
Incorrect handling of the vehicle jack can
damage the vehicle's underbody and expose
high-voltage components. There is a risk of in‐
jury or risk of damage to property. When crank‐
ing up the vehicle jack, ensure that it is in‐
serted in the jacking point next to the wheel
housing. Make sure not to damage any of the
underbody paneling parts.◀
Securing the vehicle against rolling
General information
The vehicle manufacturer recommends to ad‐
ditionally secure the vehicle against rolling
away when changing a wheel.
On a level surface
Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects in
front and behind the wheel that is diagonal to
the wheel to be changed.
On a slight downhill gradient
If you need to change a wheel on a slight
downhill grade, place chocks and other suita‐
ble objects, for instance a rock, under the
wheels of both the front and rear axles against
the rolling direction.
Lug bolt lock
Concept
The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The
lug bolts can only be released with the adapter
which matches the coding.
Overview
The adapter of the lug bolt lock is in the on‐
board vehicle tool kit or in a storage compart‐
ment close to the onboard vehicle tool kit.
▷ Lug bolt, arrow 1.
▷ Adapter, arrow 2.
Unscrewing
1.
Attach the adapter to the lug bolt.
2. Unscrew the lug bolt.
Seite 310
Mobility Wheels and tires
310
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the
lug bolt.
Screwing on
1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. If neces‐
sary, turn the adapter until it fits on the lug
bolt.
2. Screw on the lug bolt. The tightening tor‐
que is 140 Nm.
3. Remove the adapter and stow it after
screwing on the lug bolt.
Preparing the vehicle
▷ Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip
ground at a safe distance from traffic.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ Engage a gear or move the selector lever
to position P.
▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,
have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment, get
wheel change tools and, if necessary, the
emergency wheel from the vehicle.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or
portable hazard warning light at an appro‐
priate distance.
▷ Do not place wood blocks or similar items
under the vehicle jack; otherwise, it cannot
reach its carrying capacity because of the
restricted height.
▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against roll‐
ing.
▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
▷ Deactivate the air suspension level adjust‐
ment, refer to page 226.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated at the indicated positions.
Jacking up the vehicle
WARNING
Hands and fingers can be jammed when
using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with the described hand position and
Seite 311
Wheels and tires Mobility
311
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
do not change this position while using the ve‐
hicle jack.◀
1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar‐
row 1, and grasp the vehicle jack crank or
lever with your other hand, arrow 2.
2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular
recess of the jacking point closest to the
wheel to be changed.
3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the vehi‐
cle jack crank or lever clockwise.
4. Take your hand away from the vehicle jack
as soon as the vehicle jack is under load
and continue turning the vehicle jack crank
or lever with one hand.
5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot is ex‐
tended vertically.
6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands
vertically and perpendicularly beneath the
jacking point after extending the vehicle
jack.
7. Crank the vehicle up, until the vehicle jack
is with the entire surface on the ground
and the relevant wheel is maximum 1.2 in‐
ches/3 cm above ground.
Mounting a wheel
Mount one emergency wheel only, as required.
1.
Unscrew the lug bolts.
2. Remove the wheel.
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and screw in at least two lug bolts in a
crosswise pattern until hand-tight.
If non-original light-alloy wheels of the ve‐
hicle manufacturer are mounted, the ac‐
companying lug bolts may have to be used
as well.
4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and
tighten all lug bolts well in a crosswise pat‐
tern.
Seite 312
Mobility Wheels and tires
312
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counterclock‐
wise to retract the vehicle jack and lower
the vehicle.
6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it se‐
curely.
After the wheel change
1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tight‐
ening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo
area, if necessary.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored
under the cargo floor panel because of its
size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐
portunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the run-flat tires.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the
nearest dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 313
Wheels and tires Mobility
313
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Engine compartment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Filler neck for washer fluid
2 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal
3 Oil filler neck
4 Manual unlocking, charging cable
5 Coolant reservoir, engine
6 Coolant reservoir, auxiliary cooling
7 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal
8 Vehicle identification number
Hood
Safety information
WARNING
Improperly executed work in the engine
compartment can damage vehicle compo‐
nents and impair vehicle functions. There is a
risk of personal and property damage. The
manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that, in the effort to avoid such risks, work in
the engine compartment be performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.◀
Seite 314
Mobility Engine compartment
314
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
WARNING
The engine compartment accommo‐
dates moving components. Certain compo‐
nents in the engine compartment can also
move with the vehicle switched off, for in‐
stance the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury.
Do not reach into the area of moving parts.
Keep articles of clothing and hair away from
moving parts.◀
WARNING
There are protruding parts, for instance
locking hook, on the inside of the hood. There
is a risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay atten‐
tion to protruding parts and keep clear of these
areas.◀
WARNING
An incorrectly locked hood can open
while driving and restrict visibility. There is a
risk of an accident. Stop immediately and cor‐
rectly close the hood.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when open‐
ing and closing the hood. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the area of movement of
the hood is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is a risk of
property damage. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
Opening
1.
Pull lever, arrow 1.
Hood is unlocked.
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever
again, arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.
3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.
Closing
Let the hood drop from a height of approx.
16 inches/40 cm and push down on it to lock it
fully.
The hood must engage on both sides.
Seite 315
Engine compartment Mobility
315
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Engine oil
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
General information
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
the driving style and driving conditions.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling by taking a detailed measure‐
ment.
The engine oil consumption can increase in
the following situations, for example:
▷ Sporty driving style.
▷ Break-in of the engine.
▷ Idling of the engine.
▷ With use of engine oil types that are classi‐
fied as not suitable.
Different Check Control messages appear on
the Control Display depending on the engine
oil level.
Safety information
NOTE
An engine oil level that is too low causes
engine damage. There is a risk of property
damage. Immediately add engine oil.◀
NOTE
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk
of property damage. Do not add too much en‐
gine oil. When too much engine oil is added,
have oil level corrected by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
Electronic oil measurement
General information
The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐
uring principles:
▷ Monitoring.
▷ Detailed measurement.
When making frequent short-distance trips or
using a dynamic driving style, for instance
when taking curves aggressively, regularly per‐
form a detailed measurement.
Monitoring
Concept
The engine oil level is monitored electronically
while driving and can be shown on the Control
Display.
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
operating range, a Check Control message is
displayed.
A red indicator light indicates that the
engine oil pressure is too low.
Functional requirements
A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of normal driving with the
combustion engine running.
Seite 316
Mobility Engine oil
316
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Displaying the engine oil level
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed.
System limits
When making frequent short-distance trips or
using a dynamic driving style, it may not be
possible to calculate a measured value. In this
case, the measured value for the last, suffi‐
ciently long trip is displayed.
Detailed measurement
Concept
The engine oil level is checked when the vehi‐
cle is stationary and displayed via a scale.
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
operating range, a Check Control message is
displayed.
General information
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
creased somewhat.
Functional requirements
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ Drive-ready state is established.
▷ Selector lever in selector lever position N
or P and accelerator pedal not depressed.
▷ The combustion engine is at operating
temperature.
Performing a detailed measurement
Using iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
4. "Measure engine oil level"
5. "Start measurement"
The engine oil level is checked and displayed
via a scale.
Adding engine oil
General information
Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster. The quantity
to be added is indicated in the message shown
on the Control Display.
Only add suitable types of engine oil, refer to
page 318.
Safely park the vehicle and switch off drive-
ready state before adding engine oil.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating materials, e.g., oils, greases,
coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredi‐
ents. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Observe the instructions on the containers.
Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or
eyes with operating materials. Do not refill op‐
erating materials into different bottles. Store
operating materials out of reach of children.◀
NOTE
An engine oil level that is too low causes
engine damage. There is a risk of property
damage. Immediately add engine oil.◀
NOTE
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk
of property damage. Do not add too much en‐
gine oil. When too much engine oil is added,
have oil level corrected by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
Seite 317
Engine oil Mobility
317
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Overview
The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐
partment, refer to page 314.
Adding engine oil
1. Open the hood, refer to page 315.
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise.
3. Add engine oil.
Engine oil types to add
General information
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of
the engine.
Safety information
NOTE
Oil additives can damage the engine.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not use
oil additives.◀
NOTE
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc‐
tions in the engine or damage it. There is a risk
of property damage. When selecting an engine
oil, make sure that the engine oil has the cor‐
rect oil rating.◀
Suitable engine oil types
Add engine oils that meet the following oil rat‐
ing standards:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
BMW Longlife-14 FE+.
The oil rating BMW Longlife-14 FE+ is only
suitable for particular gasoline engines.
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Alternative engine oil types
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is
not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐
gine oil with the following oil rating can be
added:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01.
API SL, API SM, or API SN.
Viscosity grades
Gasoline engine:
When selecting an engine oil, make sure that
the engine oil has the viscosity grade SAE
0W-30 or SAE 0W-20. The suitable viscosity
grade is indicated on a label in the engine com‐
partment.
Viscosity class SAE 0W-20 is only suitable for
particular engines.
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Engine oil change
NOTE
Engine oil that is not changed in timely
fashion can cause increased engine wear and
thus engine damage. There is a risk of property
Seite 318
Mobility Engine oil
318
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
damage. Do not exceed the service data indi‐
cated in the vehicle.◀
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop change
the engine oil.
Seite 319
Engine oil Mobility
319
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Coolant
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
General information
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for the vehicle. Information about suit‐
able additives is available from a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Safety information
WARNING
With the engine hot and the cooling sys‐
tem open, coolant can escape and lead to
scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only open
the cooling system with the engine cooled
down.◀
WARNING
Additives are harmful and incorrect addi‐
tives can damage the engine. There is a risk of
injury and risk of property damage. Do not al‐
low additives to come into contact with skin,
eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable addi‐
tives only.◀
Coolant level
General information
The vehicle features two cooling circuits. Al‐
ways check the coolant levels of both coolant
reservoirs and refill as needed.
Checking the coolant level in the filler
neck
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess
pressure to dissipate, then open it.
3. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
4. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐
tween the minimum and maximum marks
in the filler neck.
Adding
1.
Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess
pressure to dissipate, then open it.
3. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up
to the specified level; do not overfill.
5. Close the cap.
6. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Seite 320
Mobility Coolant
320
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmen‐
tal protection regulations when dispos‐
ing of coolant and coolant additives.
Seite 321
Coolant Mobility
321
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
BMW maintenance system
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby provides
support in maintaining road safety and the op‐
erational reliability of the vehicle.
In some cases, scopes and intervals may vary
according to the country-specific version. Re‐
placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐
cants, and wear materials are calculated sepa‐
rately. Further information is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Condition Based Service
CBS
Concept
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐
count the driving conditions of the vehicle.
CBS uses these to calculate the need for
maintenance.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance corresponding to your
user profile.
General information
Information on service requirements, refer to
page 139, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is
continuously stored in the remote control. The
dealer’s service center can read this data out
and suggest a maintenance scope for the vehi‐
cle.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote
control with which the vehicle was driven most
recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop
update the time-dependent maintenance pro‐
cedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if
necessary, changing the engine oil and the mi‐
crofilter/activated-charcoal filter.
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐
formation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
els for additional information on service re‐
quirements.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that maintenance and repair be performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
Seite 322
Mobility Maintenance
322
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
service center or repair shop. Records of regu‐
lar maintenance and repair work should be re‐
tained.
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
Safety information
NOTE
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an
intricate component intended to be used in
conjunction with specialized equipment to
check the vehicle’s primary emissions system.
Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diag‐
nosis, or contact with the socket for Onboard
Diagnosis for other than its intended purpose,
can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates
risks of personal and property damage. Given
the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access to the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a
dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop or other persons
that have the specialized training and equip‐
ment for purposes of properly utilizing the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis.◀
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle's emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain
circumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
firing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
riod can seriously damage emission con‐
trol components, in particular the catalytic
converter.
Seite 323
Maintenance Mobility
323
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Replacing components
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Onboard vehicle tool kit
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located in the
left storage compartment of the cargo area.
Remove charging cable as needed.
Wiper blade replacement
Safety information
NOTE
If the wiper arm falls onto the windshield
without the wiper blades installed, the wind‐
shield can be damaged. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Secure the wiper arm when re‐
placing the wiper blades and do not fold down
the wipers without the wiper blades installed.◀
NOTE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is a risk of
property damage. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
Replacing the front wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the
wiper arms, refer to page 120.
2. Lift the wiper all the way off of the wind‐
shield.
3. Press button, arrow 1, and pull out the
wiper blade, arrow 2.
4. Insert the new wiper blade and press it on
until it you hear it snap into the holder.
5. Fold down the wipers.
Seite 324
Mobility Replacing components
324
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Lights and bulbs
General information
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu‐
tion to vehicle safety.
All headlights and lights are made using LED
or laser technology.
Some items of equipment use light-emitting
diodes installed behind a cover as a light
source. These light-emitting diodes, which are
related to conventional lasers, are officially
designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you let a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop perform
the work in case of a malfunction.
Safety information
WARNING
Focused laser light can irritate or perma‐
nently damage the retina of the eye. There is a
risk of injury. The manufacturer of your vehicle
recommends that the work on the lighting sys‐
tem including bulb replacement be performed
by a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.◀
WARNING
Too intensive brightness can irritate or
damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of
injury. Do not look directly into the headlights
or other light sources. Do not remove the LED
covers.◀
Headlight glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When
driving with the lights switched on, the con‐
densation evaporates after a short time. The
headlight glass does not need to be changed.
If despite driving with the headlights switched
on, increasing humidity forms, for instance wa‐
ter droplets in the light, have the headlights
checked.
Vehicle battery
General information
The battery is maintenance-free.
The added amount of acid is sufficient for the
service life of the battery.
More information about the battery can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that you have a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop
register the vehicle battery to the vehicle after
the battery has been replaced. Once the bat‐
tery has been registered again, all comfort fea‐
tures will be available without restriction and
any Check Control messages displayed which
relate to comfort features will disappear.
Safety information
NOTE
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible
can damage vehicle systems and impair vehi‐
cle functions. There is a risk of personal and
property damage. Only vehicle batteries that
are compatible with your vehicle type should
be installed in your vehicle. Information on
compatible vehicle batteries is available at your
dealer’s service center.◀
Charging the battery
General information
Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐
ciently charged to guarantee that the battery
remains usable for its full service life.
A discharged battery is indicated by a
red indicator light.
The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐
lowing cases:
▷ When making frequent short-distance
drives.
Seite 325
Replacing components Mobility
325
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
▷ If the vehicle is not used for more than a
month.
Safety information
NOTE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
work can be overloaded or damaged. There is
a risk of property damage. Only connect bat‐
tery chargers for the vehicle battery to the
starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐
ment.◀
Starting aid terminals
In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
starting aid terminals, refer to page 331, in the
engine compartment with the engine off.
Power failure
After a power loss, some equipment needs to
be newly initialized or individual settings up‐
dated, for example:
▷ Memory function: store the positions
again.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop
or take them to a collection point.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Safety information
WARNING
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
electrical lines and components. There is a risk
of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse.
Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a sub‐
stitute of another color or amperage rating.◀
Replacing a fuse
Open the cover on the right side trim.
Information on the fuse types and locations is
found on a separate sheet.
Seite 326
Mobility Replacing components
326
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located in the center console.
The red light in the button flashes when the
hazard warning flashers are activated.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located on the inside of
the tailgate.
Press on the release, arrow 1, and swivel the
cover down, arrow 2.
First-aid kit
General information
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the first-aid kit
contents regularly.
Replace the articles prior to their expiration
date.
Storage
The first-aid kit is located under a cover on the
left in the cargo area.
Roadside Assistance
General information
Roadside Assistance can be reached around
the clock in many countries, and provides sup‐
port in the event of a breakdown or an acci‐
dent.
For more information, see the Integrated Own‐
er's Manual, Online Owner's Manual, BMW
Driver’s Guide app or, if necessary, the Own‐
er's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, and
Communication.
Seite 327
Breakdown assistance Mobility
327
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Roadside Assistance
Concept
BMW Roadside Assistance can be contacted if
assistance is needed in the event of a break‐
down.
General information
In the event of a breakdown, data on the vehi‐
cle's condition are sent directly to Roadside
Assistance.
Roadside Assistance can also be contacted via
a Check Control message, refer to page 137.
Requirements
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equip‐
ment version with Intelligent emergency
call or BMW ConnectedDrive services.
▷ Cellular network reception.
▷ Ignition or standby state is switched on.
Starting Roadside Assistance
If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices,
support is offered through Teleservice Diagno‐
sis.
Using iDrive:
1.
"ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW Assist"
3. "BMW Roadside Assistance"
A voice connection is established.
Teleservice Diagnosis
Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that is im‐
portant for vehicle diagnosis. This data is
transmitted automatically.
A voice connection is established to Roadside
Assistance.
Starting Teleservice Help
Teleservice Help enables an in-depth diagno‐
sis of the vehicle by Roadside Assistance via
wireless transmission.
You can launch Teleservice Help by requesting
it through Roadside Assistance.
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Control Display is switched on.
4. "Teleservice Help"
The driving ability of the vehicle can be re‐
stored for specific functions.
If this is not possible, further measures will be
initiated, for instance Roadside Assistance will
be informed.
BMW Accident Assistance
Concept
BMW Group Accident Assistance can be con‐
tacted if assistance is needed in the event of
an accident.
General information
If the vehicle sensors detect a minor to moder‐
ately severe accident, which did not trigger any
airbags, a Check Control message appears on
the instrument cluster. In addition, a text mes‐
sage appears on the Control Display.
When BMW Accident Assistance is activated,
data on the vehicle's condition is sent to BMW.
Requirements
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equip‐
ment version with Intelligent emergency
call or BMW ConnectedDrive services.
▷ Cellular network reception.
▷ Ignition or standby state is switched on.
Seite 328
Mobility Breakdown assistance
328
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Starting BMW Accident Assistance
If an accident is detected automatically
A text message prompting you to call
BMW Accident Assistance appears on the
Control Display.
The connection can be established directly:
"BMW Accident Assist."
The Check Control message for BMW Acci‐
dent Assistance can also be called up from the
stored Check Control messages, refer to
page 137, for a certain length of time.
Starting manually
BMW Accident Assistance can also be con‐
tacted independently of the automatic acci‐
dent detection function.
Using iDrive:
1.
"ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW Assist"
3. "BMW Accident Assistance"
Follow the displays on the Control Display.
A voice connection is established.
4. "End call"
The voice connection can be terminated.
Intelligent emergency call
Concept
In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐
quest can be made through the system.
General information
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
For technical reasons, the Emergency Request
cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable con‐
ditions.
Overview
SOS button in the roofliner.
Functional requirements
▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has
been activated.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ The Assist system is functional.
Initiating an Emergency Request
automatically
Under certain conditions, for instance if the air‐
bags trigger, an Emergency Request is auto‐
matically initiated immediately after an acci‐
dent of corresponding severity. Automatic
Collision Notification is not affected by press‐
ing the SOS button.
Initiating an Emergency Request
manually
1.
Touch the cover.
2. Press the SOS button and hold until the
LED on the microphone lights up green.
▷ The LED is illuminated green when an
Emergency Request has been initiated.
If a cancel prompt appears on the Control
Display, the Emergency Request can be
aborted.
Seite 329
Breakdown assistance Mobility
329
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
until the voice connection has been estab‐
lished.
▷ The LED flashes green when a connection
to the BMW Response Center has been
established.
The BMW Response Center then makes
contact with you and takes further steps to
help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
BMW Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circum‐
stances.
For this, data is transmitted to the BMW
Response Center which serves to deter‐
mine the necessary rescue measures. E.g.,
the current position of the vehicle, if it can
be established.
Even if you can no longer hear the BMW
Response Center through the loudspeak‐
ers, the BMW Response Center may still
be able to hear you.
The BMW Response Center ends the Emer‐
gency Request.
What to do after an accident
Safety information
WARNING
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. After an accident, do not touch
any high-voltage components such as orange
colored high-voltage cables or parts that are in
contact with exposed high-voltage cables.◀
WARNING
Fluids in the high-voltage battery are cor‐
rosive. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch
fluids escaping from the high-voltage battery.◀
General information
After an accident, compliance with the follow‐
ing safety precautions is required with regard
to the high-voltage system:
▷ Secure the crash site.
▷ Immediately notify rescue forces, police, or
firefighters of the fact that your vehicle is
equipped with a high-voltage system.
▷ Engage selector lever position P, set the
parking brake and switch off operating and
drive-ready state.
▷ Lock the vehicle after exiting.
▷ Do not inhale any gases escaping from the
high-voltage battery; if needed, maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle.
Jump-starting
General information
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle
and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐
bles with fully insulated clamp handles.
Vehicles with hybrid drive cannot be used for
jump-starting.
Safety information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Do not touch any components
that are under voltage.◀
WARNING
If the jumper cables are connected in the
incorrect order, sparking may occur. There is a
risk of injury. Pay attention to the correct order
during connection.◀
Seite 330
Mobility Breakdown assistance
330
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
NOTE
In the case of body contact between the
two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during
jump-starting. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. Make sure that no body contact occurs.◀
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage
information can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power
consumers in both vehicles.
Starting aid terminals
The starting aid terminal in the engine com‐
partment acts as the battery's positive termi‐
nal.
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
A special nut serves as the negative terminal of
the battery.
Connecting the cables
Before you begin, switch off all unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers, such as
the radio, on the assisting and receiving vehi‐
cle.
1. Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐
tance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
of the cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
the battery, or to the corresponding engine
or body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative terminal of the battery, or to the
corresponding engine or body ground of
the vehicle to be started.
Establishing drive-ready state
1.
Start the engine of the assisting vehicle
and let it run for several minutes at an in‐
creased idle speed.
2. Establish the drive-ready state for the vehi‐
cle to be started as usual.
If the first starting attempt is not success‐
ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐
other attempt in order to allow the dis‐
charged battery to recharge.
3. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐
verse order.
Check the battery and recharge, if needed.
Seite 331
Breakdown assistance Mobility
331
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Tow-starting and towing
Safety information
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated.
There is a risk of an accident. Switch all Intelli‐
gent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/
towing.◀
Transporting the vehicle
General information
The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
Safety information
NOTE
The vehicle can be damaged when tow‐
ing the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is
a risk of property damage. The vehicle should
only be transported on a loading platform.◀
NOTE
The vehicle can become damaged when
lifting and securing it.
There is a risk of damage to property.
▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow
fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.◀
Pushing the vehicle
To remove a broken-down vehicle from the
danger area, it can be pushed for a short dis‐
tance.
Roll or push, refer to page 123, the vehicle.
Tow truck
The vehicle should only be transported on a
loading platform.
Towing other vehicles
General information
Switch on the hazard warning system, depend‐
ing on local regulations.
If the electrical system has failed, clearly iden‐
tify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign
or a warning triangle in the rear window.
Safety information
WARNING
If the approved gross vehicle weight of
the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to
be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will
not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐
sponse. There is a risk of an accident! Make
sure that the gross vehicle weight of the tow‐
ing vehicle is heavier than the vehicle to be
towed.◀
NOTE
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐
correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can
occur. There is a risk of property damage. Cor‐
rectly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting.◀
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Seite 332
Mobility Breakdown assistance
332
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
that the tow rope is taut.
Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable
the vehicle to be towed without jerking.
Tow fitting
General information
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front
or rear of the vehicle.
The tow fitting is found in the onboard vehicle
tool kit, refer to page 324.
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for
instance do not lift the vehicle by the tow
fitting.
Safety information
NOTE
If the tow fitting is not used as intended,
there may be damage to the vehicle or to the
tow fitting. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Observe the notes on using the tow fit‐
ting.◀
Screw thread for tow fitting
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to
push it out.
Tow-starting
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Start the engine by jump-starting, refer to
page 330, if possible.
Have the reasons for the starting difficulties
corrected by a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Seite 333
Breakdown assistance Mobility
333
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Care
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Washing the vehicle
General information
Regularly remove foreign objects such as
leaves in the area below the windshield when
the hood is raised.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in
winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐
age the vehicle.
Steam blaster and high-pressure
washer
Safety information
NOTE
When cleaning with high-pressure wash‐
ers, components can be damaged due to the
pressure or temperatures being too high.
There is a risk of property damage. Maintain
sufficient distance and do not spray too long
continuously. Follow the operating instructions
for the high-pressure washer.◀
Distances and temperature
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
seals: 12 in/30 cm.
▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
31.5 in/80 cm.
Automatic vehicle washes
Safety information
NOTE
Improper use of automatic vehicle
washes can cause damage to the vehicle.
There is a risk of damage to property. Follow
the following instructions:
▷ Give preference to cloth vehicle washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
▷ Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails
higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to
the chassis.
▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to
avoid damage to tires and rims.
▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to
the exterior mirrors.
▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain
sensor to avoid damage to the wiper sys‐
tem.◀
Driving into a vehicle wash with a
Steptronic transmission
Safety information
NOTE
Selector lever position P is automatically
engaged when standby state is switched off.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not
switch standby state off in vehicle washes.◀
General information
In a vehicle wash, the vehicle must be able to
roll freely.
Roll or push the vehicle, refer to page 123.
Seite 334
Mobility Care
334
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Some vehicle washes do not permit persons in
the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from
the outside when in selector lever position N. A
signal sounds when an attempt is made to lock
the vehicle.
Driving out of a vehicle wash
Make sure that the remote control is in the ve‐
hicle.
Switch on drive-ready state, refer to page 109.
Headlights
Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use
abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.
Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance
from insects, with shampoo and wash off with
water.
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice
scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action
can be reduced. The heat generated during
braking dries brake discs and brake pads and
protects them against corrosion.
Completely remove all residues on the win‐
dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
wiper blade wear.
Vehicle care
Vehicle care products
General information
BMW recommends using vehicle care and
cleaning products from BMW. Suitable care
products are available from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Safety information
WARNING
Cleansers can contain substances that
are dangerous and harmful to your health.
There is a risk of injury. When cleaning the in‐
terior, open the doors or windows. Only use
products intended for cleaning vehicles. Fol‐
low the instructions on the container.◀
Vehicle paint
General information
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐
fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐
quency and extent of your vehicle care to
these influences.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐
tered or discolored.
Matte finish
Only use cleaning and care products suitable
for vehicles with matte finish.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather regularly, using
a cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
wear and premature degradation of the leather
surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, clean leather and provide leather care
roughly every two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
more visible.
Seite 335
Care Mobility
335
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Upholstery material care
General information
Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vac‐
uum cleaner.
If upholstery is very dirty, e.g., with beverage
stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth
with a suitable interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the
material vigorously.
Safety information
NOTE
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of
clothing can damage the seat covers. There is
a risk of property damage. Ensure that any Vel‐
cro® fasteners are closed.◀
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9.
Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam
jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐
turer's instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents
can destroy the protective layer of adjacent
components, such as the brake disc.
After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry
them. The heat generated during braking dries
brake discs and brake pads and protects them
against corrosion.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radia‐
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply
of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
ularly when they have been exposed to road
salt.
Rubber components
Environmental influences can cause surface
soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use
only water and suitable cleaning agents for
cleaning.
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning
rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing
vehicle care products in order to avoid damage
or noises.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a
soft cloth.
Kenaf
Only treat parts made of Kenaf fibers using
suitable care products.
Plastic components
NOTE
Cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐
vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
grease removers, fuel, or such, can damage
plastic parts. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen
cloth lightly with water.◀
Plastic components are e.g.:
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
▷ Roofliner.
▷ Light lenses.
▷ Matt black spray-coated components.
▷ Painted parts in the car's interior.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Dampen cloth lightly with water.
Do not soak the roofliner.
Seite 336
Mobility Care
336
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Safety belts
WARNING
Chemical cleansers can destroy the
safety belt webbing. Missing protective effect
of the safety belts. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Use only a mild soapy solution
for cleaning the safety belts.◀
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the
installed belt straps.
Do not retract the safety belts until they are
dry.
Carpets and floor mats
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in
the vehicle such that they are secured and
cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, for instance for cleaning.◀
The floor mats can be removed from the car's
interior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel only.
Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a
cloth moistened with a small amount of glass
detergent.
Displays, screens, and protective
glass of the Head-Up Display
NOTE
Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of
any kind can damage the surface of displays
and screens. There is a risk of property dam‐
age. Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber
cloth.◀
NOTE
The surface of displays can be damaged
with improper cleaning. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Avoid pressure that is too high
and do not use any scratching materials.◀
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
Clean the protective glass of the Head-up Dis‐
play, refer to page 147, using a microfiber cloth
and commercially available dish-washing soap.
Long idle times and long-term vehicle
storage
Concept
For idle phases that last several weeks, park
the vehicle with a fully charged battery if possi‐
ble.
Do not park the vehicle for longer than 14 days
if the electric range is exhausted.
With storage times of up to three months, if
possible plug the vehicle into a compatible
power source or park it in a nearly fully charged
state.
General information
Your dealer's service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop can advise
you on what to consider when storing the vehi‐
cle for longer than three months.
Seite 337
Care Mobility
337
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Safety information
NOTE
The high-voltage battery can be dam‐
aged by excessive discharge. There is a risk of
property damage. Before storing the vehicle
for an extended period, ensure that the high-
voltage battery is fully charged. During the idle
period, connect the vehicle to a charging sta‐
tion at a compatible charging location. If nec‐
essary, the high-voltage battery will be
charged automatically. Make sure that the
charging process takes place. Regularly check
the charge state.
Do not allow the vehicle to sit idle for longer
than three months with a charge state below
approx. 50 %.◀
Seite 338
Mobility Care
338
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Seite 339
Care Mobility
339
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Technical data
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
General information
The technical data and specifications in this
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values.
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this,
e.g., due to the selected special equipment,
country version or country-specific measure‐
ment method. Detailed values can be found in
the approval documents, on labels on the vehi‐
cle or can be obtained from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
The information in the vehicle documents al‐
ways has priority over the information in this
Owner's Manual.
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the
model version, equipment or country-specific
measurement method.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, e.g., a roof antenna, roof racks
or spoiler. The heights can deviate, e.g., due to
the selected special equipment, tires, load and
chassis version.
BMW 7 Series Sedan
Width with mirrors inches/mm 85.4/2,169
Width without mirrors inches/mm 74.9/1,902
Height inches/mm 57.8/1,467
Height L-models inches/mm 58.2/1,479
Length inches/mm 201.1/5,108
Length L-models inches/mm 206.6/5,248
Wheelbase inches/mm 120.9/3,070
Wheelbase L-models inches/mm 126.4/3,210
Seite 342
Reference Technical data
342
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
BMW 7 Series Sedan
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 41.1/12.5
Smallest turning radius diam. L-models ft/m 42.0-42.4/12.8-12.9
Weights
740Le xDrive iPerformance
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,904/2,678
Load lbs/kg 899/408
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,690/1,220
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,300/1,497
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 100/45
Capacities
US gal/liters Notes
Fuel tank, approx. 12.1/46.0 Fuel quality, refer to
page 288
Seite 343
Technical data Reference
343
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the ve‐
hicle are listed here.
Updates made after the
editorial deadline
These chapters of the printed Owner's Manual
contain updates made after the editorial dead‐
line.
▷ Information: vehicle identification number,
refer to page 12.
▷ Safety: approach control warning with
braking function, refer to page 162.
▷ PDC Park Distance Control: emergency
braking function, refer to page 207.
License Texts and
Certifications
The following applies in addition to the radio
transmission license texts of the Integrated
Owner’s Manual in the vehicle.
Remote Control
Argentina
Titular: APPROVE - IT S.A.
CUIT/CUIL: 30-71193155-0
Expediente: EXPAFTIC 1986/2015
Tipo de Equipo: TRANSCEPTOR PORTATIL
Número de Inscripción: C-15097
Marca: VALEO
Modelo: ID2A
Disposición: 544 DINAPTIC 2015
Vigencia Desde: 13/11/2015
Hasta: 13/11/2018
Bahrain
Authority
Refer‐
ence
DLM/
0000001249
Reference no.:
0000001572
J: 0000002186
P: 0000000039
S: 0000000039
Date of
Grantee
07/05/15
Name of
Grantee
BATEC
Villa #1279, Road #3327, Block
#332
Mahooz, Kingdom of Bahrain
Manufac‐
tured by
Valeo Comfort and Driving Assis‐
tance
Europarc –76 rue Auguste Perret
F-94046 CRETEIL
FRANCE
Model/
Type/No.
ID 2A
Equip‐
ment De‐
scription
Car Smart Key “ID-Geber”
Frequen‐
cies/
Fre‐
quency
Bands
ch1: 433.20 MHz, ch2: 434 MHz
Output
Power
-15.92 dBm
Emission FSK
Remarks —
Validity 06/05/2018
Seite 344
Reference Appendix
344
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Brazil
ANATEL: 2901-15-8605
Este equipamento opera em caráter secun‐
dário, isto é, não tem direito a proteção contra
interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações
do mesmo tipo, e não pode causar interferên‐
cia a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
China
CMIIT ID: 2015DJ3039
Egypt
TAC.02081510322.WIR
TYPE APPROVAL CERTIFICATE
This is to certify that the product VALEO ID2A
has been approved by NTRA to the following
standards & conditions:
Certificate Holder: VALEO COMFORT AND
DRIVING ASSISTANCE
Product Description: RKE/ ENGINE START
UNIT
Brand: VALEO
Model: ID2A
Manufacturer: VALEO COMFORT AND DRIV‐
ING ASSISTANCE
Country of Origin: France
Standards: EN300 220-1/-2, EN301 489-1/-3,
EN60950-1
Issue Date: 09. August 2015
Europe
Remote control
Čeština
Valeo Comfort and Driving Assistance tímto
prohlašuje, že tento ID2A je ve shodě se zá‐
kladními požadavky a dalšími príslušnými usta‐
noveními smernice 1999/5/ES.
Hrvatski
Ovime, Valeo Comfort and Driving Assistance
izjavljuje da je model ID2A je u sukladu sa os‐
novnim zahtjevima I drugim relevantnim odred‐
bama Direktive 1999/5/EC.
Dansk
Undertegnede Valeo Comfort and Driving As‐
sistance erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr
ID2A overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige
relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Deutsch
Hiermit erklärt Valeo Comfort and Driving As‐
sistance, dass sich das Model ID2A in Überein‐
stimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderun‐
gen und den übrigen einschlägigen
Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befin‐
det.
Eesti
Käesolevaga kinnitab Valeo Comfort and Driv‐
ing Assistance seadme ID2A vastavust direk‐
tiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud dir‐
Seite 345
Appendix Reference
345
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
ektiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele
sätetele.
English
Hereby, Valeo Comfort and Driving Assistance,
declares that the model ID2A is in compliance
with the essential requirements and other rele‐
vant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Español
Por medio de la presente Valeo Comfort and
Driving Assistance declara que ID2A cumple
con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera
otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la
Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Ελληνικά
Με την παρουσα Valeo Comfort and Driving
Assistance δηλώνει oτι ID2A συμμορφωνεται
πρoσ τισ ουσιωδεισ απαιτησεισ και τισ λοιπεσ
σχετικεσ διαταξεισ τησ οδηγιασ 1999/5/ΕΚ.
Français
Par la présente Valeo Comfort and Driving As‐
sistance déclare que les appareils modèle
ID2A sont conformes aux exigences essen‐
tielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de
la directive 1999/5/CE.
Italiano
Con la presente Valeo Comfort and Driving As‐
sistance dichiara che questo ID2A è conforme
ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni
pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latviski
Ar šo Valeo Comfort and Driving Assistance
deklarē, ka ID2A atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK
būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to saistīta‐
jiem noteikumiem.
Lietuvių
Šiuo Valeo Comfort and Driving Assistance de‐
klaruoja, kad šis ID2A atitinka esminius reikala‐
vimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.
Nederlands
Hierbij verklaart Valeo Comfort and Driving As‐
sistance dat het toestel ID2A in overeenstem‐
ming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere
relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Malti
Hawnhekk, Valeo Comfort and Driving Assis‐
tance, jiddikjara li dan ID2A jikkonforma mal-
ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti oħrajn
relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.
Magyar
Alulírott, Valeo Comfort and Driving Assistance
nyilatkozom, hogy a ID2A megfelel a vonat‐
kozó alapvető követelményeknek és az
1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb előírásainak.
Polski
Niniejszym Valeo Comfort and Driving Assis‐
tance oświadcza, że ID2A jest zgodny z zasad‐
niczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosow‐
nymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Português
Valeo Comfort and Driving Assistance declara
que este ID2A está conforme com os requisi‐
tos essenciais e outras disposições da Direc‐
tiva 1999/5/CE.
Slovensko
Valeo Comfort and Driving Assistance izjavlja,
da je ta ID2A v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in
ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive
1999/5/ES.
Slovensky
Valeo Comfort and Driving Assistance týmto
vyhlasuje, že ID2A spĺňa základné požiadavky a
Seite 346
Reference Appendix
346
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice
1999/5/ES.
Suomi
Valeo Comfort and Driving Assistance vakuut‐
taa täten että ID2A tyyppinen laite on direktii‐
vin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä
koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukai‐
nen.
Svenska
Härmed intygar Valeo Comfort and Driving As‐
sistance att denna ID2A står I överensstäm‐
melse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och
övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av
direktiv 1999/5/EG.
Íslenska
Hér með lýsir Valeo Comfort and Driving Assis‐
tance yfir því að ID2A er í samræmi við grunnk‐
röfur og aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun
1999/5/EC.
Norsk
Valeo Comfort and Driving Assistance erklærer
herved at utstyret ID2A er i samsvar med de
grunnleggende krav og øvrige relevante krav i
direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Hong Kong
Name & Address of Certificate Holder: Valeo
Comfort and Driving Assistance Europarc –76
rue Auguste Perret, F-94046 CRETEIL,
FRANCE
Name & Address of Manufacturer: Valeo Com‐
fort and Driving Assistance Europarc –76 rue
Auguste Perret, F-94046 CRETEIL, FRANCE
Equipment information
▷ Type of Equipment: Short Range Device
(433Mhz Band)
▷ Brand name: Valeo
▷ Model number: ID2A
▷ Trade name: N/A
Specification/ Issue date: HKTA 1061 Issue 1
(May 2011)
Certification Number: HK0021500093
India
No. J — 22022/176/2015–RLO(NR)/1625
Date: 30/10/2015
EQUIPMENT TYPE APPROVAL (No. NR-ETA/
3148)
This Equipment Type Approval Certificate is
hereby granted for the under mentioned devi‐
ces / equipments with the following parame‐
ters / conditions:
1 Equipment Transmitter Smart Key
2 Model No. ID2A
3 Manufactured by Valeo comfort and
Driving Assistance, Eu‐
rope
4 Frequency
Range (in MHz)
433–434 MHz
5 Max Output
Power (EIRP)
-15.92 dBm
6 Type of Modula‐
tion
FSK
7 Name of Grantee Vincular Testing Labs
India Pvt. Ltd.
8 Remarks Nil
Indonesia
41159I/SDPPI/2015
5153
Date of issue: 14/07/2015
Israel
ID2A :(
םש םגדה ) Model name
:( םש ןרציה ותבותכו ) Manufacturer and address
Valeo Comfort and Driving
Seite 347
Appendix Reference
347
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Japan
209-LSD029
This is to certify that the above-mentioned
certification by type has been granted in ac‐
cordance with the provisions of Article 38-24,
Paragraph 1 of the Radio Law.
Kuwait
Ref: 2410
Issue Date: 19/05/2015
Applicant: Valeo Comfort and Driving Assis‐
tance Europarc –76 rue auguste Perret
F-94046 CRETEIL/ FRANCE
Manufactuer: Valeo Comfort and Driving Assis‐
tance Europarc –76 rue auguste Perret
F-94046 CRETEIL/ FRANCE
Equipment Description: The Smart Key (ID-
Geber)
Model: ID2A
Frequency: 433.20 – 434.64 Mhz
Power output: Less than 10 mW
Malaysia
RAAU/18C/0615/S (15-1996)
Mexico
CERTIFICADO DE HOMOLOGACION
Clase: PROVISIONAL
Número: RCPVAID15-1456
Vigencia: 24 de agosto de 2016
Morocco
AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC
Numéro d’agrément: MR 10533 ANRT 2015
Date d’agrément: 29/06/2015
Namibia
TELECOMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT
TYPE APPROVAL NUMBER
TA-2106/793
The Communications Regulatory Authority of
Namibia, in the exercise of powers conferred
upon it by the Communications Act No. 8 of
2009, the Regulations in respect of Type Ap‐
proval and Technical Standards for Telecom‐
munications Equipment and such conditions
as have been and may be imposed form time
to time hereby issues a Telecommunications
Equipment Type Approval Certificate in re‐
spect of the equipment listed below and in the
name of the following Entity / person whose
name and particulars are listed below:
ENTITY / PERSON PARTICULARS
Name: Valeo Comfort and Driving Assistance
Street Address: 76 Rue Auguste Perret, 94046
Creteil, France
Telephone Number: +33 1 48 8457 14
Facsimile Number: +N/A
Registration Number: 017 251 067 RCS CRE‐
TEIL
DESCRIPTION OF TELECOMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
Category: Access Control (including door and
gate openers)
Model: ID2A
Frequency Range: 433.2 MHz
ITU Emission Code: F1D
Modulation: FSK
Channel Spacing: N/A
Power Output: 0.03 mW
Features: Smart Key
Seite 348
Reference Appendix
348
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Oman
OMAN TRA
Aproval number: TRA/TA-R/2583/15
Aplicant number: D080134
Philippines
TYPE ACCEPTANCE CERTIFICATE:
ESD-1511132C
Qatar
Approval Ref: CRA/SA/2015/R-4797
Saudi Arabia
Certificate No: TA 30042015-30042016-7326
Applicant: CETECOM ICT Services GmbH
Issue Date: 30/04/2015
Validity Period: 30/04/2016
Product Name: ID-Geber
Product model: ID2A
Manufacturer: Valeo Comfort and Driving As‐
sistance Systems
Operating Frequency: 433.20 MHZ:-15.92
Watt
Maximum Output Power allowed (EIRP):
433.64–434.64 MHZ:-15.92 Watt
Device comply with CITC technical Specifica‐
tion No.: RI054
Singapore
Registration Number: N1533–15
Brand/Trade Name: VALEO
Mode Name/No.: ID2A
ISM Frequency Band: 433.05 – 434.79 Mhz
Max. Radiated Power/ Field Strength: 10 mW
EIRP or 94.8 dBuV/m at 10 m
SRD/LPD usage: Car Key
Date of Registration: 12 MAY 2015
Date of Expiry: 30 APRIL 2020
South Africa
TA-2015/543
APPROVED
South Korea
MSIP-CRM-VCD-ID2C
Trade Name or Applicant: VALEO COMFORT
AND DRIVING ASSISTANCE
Equipment name: 특정소출력 무선기기(데이터
전송용 무선기기)
Basic Model Number: ID2C
Cetification No.: MSIP-CRM-VCD-ID2C
Manufacturer and Country of origin: VALEO
COMFORT AND DRIVING ASSISTANCE/ 프랑
스
Seite 349
Appendix Reference
349
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Date of Certification: 2015–09–21
It is verified foregoing equipment has been
certificated under the Clause 2, Article 58–2 of
Radio Waves Act.
Taiwan
CCAE15LP2230T9
UAE
TRA REGISTERED No: ER40670/15
Name of Registered Dealer: VALEO COM‐
FORT AND DRIVING ASSISTANCE
Ukraine
109
USA, Canada
For US & Canada owners only
The transmitter unit and receiver comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. and with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Op‐
eration is governed by the following:
For Transmitter:
FCC ID: N5F-ID2A
IC: 3248A-ID2A
Compliance statement:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada licence-ex‐
empt RSS standard(s).
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer‐
ence, and
(2) this device must accept any interference re‐
ceived, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to
operate this equipment.
Pour les propriétaires au Canada
seulement:
L'unité émetteur et le récepteur sont con‐
formes à la partie 15 des règlements de la
Commission FCC / Federal Communication. et
avec Industrie Canada exempts de licence
standard RSS (s). Le fonctionnement est régi
comme suit :
Pour l'émetteur:
FCC ID: N5F-ID2A
IC: 3248A-ID2A
Déclaration de conformité:
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils
radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est au‐
torisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et
(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement
Seite 350
Reference Appendix
350
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Side Radar Sensor
Malaysia
HIDF15000171
Approval #: E 030680
Seite 351
Appendix Reference
351
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐
tem 188
Accessories and parts 8
Accident Assistance 328
Accident prevention, see Ac‐
tive Protection 185
Accident, what to do 330
ACC, see Active Cruise Con‐
trol with Stop&Go func‐
tion 195
Acoustic pedestrian protec‐
tion 113
AC quick charging cable, see
Level 2 charging cable 278
Activated-charcoal filter 232
Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion 178
Active Cruise Control with
Stop&Go function,
ACC 195
Active damping control, see
Dynamic Damping Con‐
trol 227
Active Guard, see Intelligent
Safety 160
Active Protection 185
Active seat ventilation 103
Active Steering, integral 190
Adaptive brake assistant 188
Adaptive brake lights, see
Brake force display 185
Adaptive Light Control 151
ADAPTIVE, see Driving Dy‐
namics Control 126
Additives, engine oil
types 318
Advance climate control, see
Stationary climate con‐
trol 239
Airbags 157
Airbags, indicator/warning
light 159
Air circulation, see Recircu‐
lated-air mode 230
Air conditioning 229
Air, dehumidifying, see Air
conditioning 229
Air distribution, manual 231
Air flow, automatic climate
control 231
Air outlets, see Ventila‐
tion 232
Air pressure, tires 290
Air suspension 226
Alarm system 78
Alarm, unintentional 79
Alertness assistant 186
All-season tires, see Winter
tires 296
All-wheel-drive, see
xDrive 190
Ambient air package 235
Ambient highlight 155
Ambient light 154
Animal detection, see Night
Vision 171
Antifreeze, see Washer
fluid 121
Antilock Brake System,
ABS 188
Anti-slip control, see
DSC 188
Anti-theft protection, lock‐
ing 61
Anti-theft protection, see Lug
bolt lock 310
App, BMW Driver’s Guide
app 6
Apple CarPlay, connection to
the vehicle 49
Approach control warning
with City light braking func‐
tion 162
Approach control warning
with light braking func‐
tion 162
Approved axle load 343
Apps, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, Communication 6
Armrest heating 102
Arrival time 143
Artificial engine noise, see
Acoustic pedestrian protec‐
tion 113
Ashtray 245
Ashtray, front 245
Ashtray, rear 245
Assistance for the combus‐
tion engine 114
Assistance when driving off,
see Drive-off assistant 188
Assistance with break‐
down 327
AUC Automatic Recirculating
Air Control 230
Audio, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication 6
AUTO H button, see Parking
brake 115
Automatic climate con‐
trol 228
Automatic cruise control with
Stop&Go function 195
Automatic Curb Monitor, ex‐
terior mirror 97
Automatic deactivation,
Front-seat passenger air‐
bags 159
Seite 352
Reference Everything from A to Z
352
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Automatic headlight con‐
trol 150
Automatic Hold, see Parking
brake 115
Automatic locking 77
Automatic Recirculating Air
Control AUC 230
Automatic Soft Closing 74
Automatic transmission, see
Steptronic transmis‐
sion 122
Automatic unlocking 78
Automatic vehicle wash 334
AUTO program, automatic cli‐
mate control 230
AUTO program, intensity 230
Auto Start/Stop function 110
AUX-IN port, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Average speed and average
fuel consumption 144
Axle loads, weights 343
B
Backrest curvature, see Lum‐
bar support 88
Backrest, seats 86
Backrest tilt 88
Backrest, width 87
Bandages, see First-aid
kit 327
Bar for tow-starting/
towing 332
Basic position, rear seats 89
Battery, changing, remote
control of the vehicle 63
Battery, charge state indica‐
tor 131
BATTERY CONTROL, elec‐
tric driving 113
Battery, disposing of 326
Battery, vehicle 325
Being towed, see Tow-start‐
ing and towing 332
Belts, see Safety belts 91
Beverage holder, see Cup
holders 254
Blocking, power window, see
Safety switch 81
Bluetooth connection 45
Blu-ray, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication 6
BMW 360° ELECTRIC Portal,
see Intelligent charging 282
BMW Assist, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation 6
BMW display key 64
BMW display key, malfunc‐
tion 67
BMW Driver’s Guide app 6
BMW eDRIVE, see Hybrid
system 55
BMW Gesture Control 32
BMW maintenance sys‐
tem 322
BMW Touch Command 38
Bottle holder, see Cup
holder 254
Brake assistant 188
Brake assistant, adaptive 188
Brake discs, breaking in, see
Brake system 264
Brake force display 185
Brake lights, brake force dis‐
play 185
Brake pads, breaking in, see
Brake system 264
Brake system 264
Braking, information 266
Breakdown assis‐
tance 327, 328
Breakdown, see FTM Flat
Tire Monitor 307
Break-in 264
Brightness, Control Dis‐
play 42
Bulbs, replacing, see Lights
and bulb 325
Buttons on the steering
wheel 16
Button, SOS, see Intelligent
emergency call 329
Button, Start/Stop 109
Bypassing, see Jump-start‐
ing 330
C
Cable for tow-starting/
towing 333
Calendar, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication 6
California Proposition 65
Warning 8
Calling up mirror adjust‐
ment 77
Calling up seat adjust‐
ment 77
Calling up steering wheel ad‐
justment 77
Camera-based assistance
systems, see Intelligent
Safety 160
Camera-based cruise control,
see Active Cruise Control
with Stop&Go function 195
Camera lenses, care 337
Camera, rearview camera,
without Surround View 209
Camera, see Surround
View 211
Can holder, see Cup hold‐
ers 254
Captain’s Chair, see Execu‐
tive Lounge Seating 100
Care, Head-Up Display 337
Care of displays, screens 337
Care, see Washing the vehi‐
cle 334
Seite 353
Everything from A to Z Reference
353
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Care, vehicle 335
Cargo area 256
Cargo area, enlarging, cargo
floor panel 259
Cargo area, loading, see
Stowing and securing
cargo 257
Cargo area, storage compart‐
ments 257
Cargo, stowing and secur‐
ing 257
Cargo straps, see Lashing
eyes in the cargo area 257
Carpet, care 337
CarPlay, connection to the
vehicle 49
Car seats, see Transporting
children safely 104
Cartridge replacement, see
Ambient air package 235
Car wash 334
Car washing 334
Catalytic converter, see Hot
exhaust system 265
CBS Condition Based Serv‐
ice 322
CD, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, Communication 6
Cell phone, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation 6
Center armrest 253
Center console 18
Central Information Display
(CID), see Control Dis‐
play 23
Central locking system 69
Central screen, see Control
Display 23
Changes, technical, see For
Your Own Safety 8
Changing parts 324
Changing wheels 309
Changing wheels/tires 295
CHARGE, energy recov‐
ery 114
Charge state indicator of the
high-voltage battery 131
Charging cable, storing, see
Storage 278
Charging cable, unlocking
manually 279
Charging screen 130
Charging, see Charging the
vehicle 276
Charging, see Vehicle charg‐
ing 276
Charging status, see Display
of the charging status 280
Charging the battery, see Ve‐
hicle charging 276
Charging the vehicle 276
Charging the vehicle, see Ve‐
hicle charging 276
Charging to save fuel 269
Chassis number, see Vehicle
identification number 12
Check Control 134
Checking the engine oil level
electronically 316
Checking the oil level elec‐
tronically 316
Children, seating posi‐
tion 104
Children, transporting
safely 104
Child restraint system
LATCH 106
Child restraint systems,
mounting 105
Child restraint systems, see
Transporting children
safely 104
Child safety locks 108
Child seat, mounting 105
Child seats, see Transporting
children safely 104
Chrome-plated surfaces,
care 336
Chrome surfaces, care 336
Cigarette lighter 245
Cigarette lighter, front 246
Cigarette lighter, rear 246
Cleaning displays,
screens 337
Cleaning, Head-Up Dis‐
play 337
Climate control 228
Climate control wind‐
shield 265
Clothes hooks 255
Coasting 113
Combination switch, see Turn
signals 118
Combination switch, see
Washer/wiper system 118
Comfort Access 69
COMFORT PLUS, see Driv‐
ing Dynamics Control 126
COMFORT, see Driving Dy‐
namics Control 126
Communication, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation 6
Comparison of entries, see
Entry comparison 26
Compartments in the
doors 252
Compatible devices, see Suit‐
able devices 45
Compressor 298
Computer, see Onboard
Computer in the instrument
cluster 142
Concierge Service, see Own‐
er's Handbook for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Condensation, removing from
the windows 231
Condensation water under
the parked vehicle 267
Condition Based Service
CBS 322
Seite 354
Reference Everything from A to Z
354
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Confirmation signal from the
vehicle 77
ConnectedDrive, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation 6
Connecting device 44
Connecting electrical devices,
see Sockets 247
Connecting, mobile devi‐
ces 44
Connecting mobile phone 44
Connecting smartphone 44
Connecting telephone 44
Connections, Screen Mirror‐
ing 49
Contacts, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication 6
Contact with water, hybrid
system 57
Container for washer
fluid 121
Continued driving with a flat
tire 305, 308
Control Display 23
Control Display, settings 40
Controller 24
Control systems, driving sta‐
bility 188
Convenient closing with the
remote control 62
Convenient opening with the
remote control 61
Coolant 320
Coolant level 320
Cooling, maximum 229
Cooling system 320
Cornering light 151
Corrosion on brake discs 266
Cosmetic mirror 244
Coupling, mobile devices, see
Connections 44
Crossing traffic warning 223
Cruise control 192
Cruise control, active with
Stop&Go function 195
Cruise control with distance
control, see Active Cruise
Control with Stop&Go func‐
tion 195
Cruise control without dis‐
tance control, see cruise
control 192
Cruising range 138
Cup holder 254
Cup holder, front 254
Cup holder, rear 255
Current fuel consumption,
Onboard Computer 144
Cushions for the electric head
restraints 95
D
Damage, tires 294
Damping control, dy‐
namic 227
Data memory 9
Data protection, settings 43
Data, see Deleting personal
data in the vehicle 43
Data, technical 342
Date 41
Daytime running lights 151
Deactivation of the hybrid
system 57
Defogging the windows 231
Defrosting the windows 231
Dehumidifying, air 229
Deleting personal data 43
Departure times, stationary
climate control 240
Destination distance 143
Device list, displaying 50
Devices, managing 50
Diagnosis connection 323
Digital clock 138
Dimensions 342
Dimmable exterior mirrors 97
Dimmable interior mirror 97
Direct dial buttons, see Pro‐
grammable memory but‐
tons 30
Direction indicator, see Turn
signals 118
Display, engine tempera‐
ture 145
Display in the windshield, see
Head-up Display 147
Display key, malfunction 67
Display key, see BMW display
key 64
Display lighting, see Instru‐
ment lighting 153
Displays 129
Displays and symbols 6
Displays, hybrid system 131
Displays, screens 337
Disposal, coolant 321
Disposal, vehicle battery 326
Distance control, see
PDC 205
Distance to destination 143
Divided screen view, see Split
screen 29
Door handle lighting, see wel‐
come lights 150
Door lock, see Remote con‐
trol 60
Drive-off assistant 188
Drive-off assistant, see
DSC 188
Driver assistance, see Intelli‐
gent Safety 160
Drive-ready state, elec‐
tric 109
Drive-ready state, engine
start 109
Drive-ready state, idle state,
and standby state 21
Driver profiles 74
Driver profiles, welcome
screen 74
Driver’s Guide app, see BMW
Driver’s Guide app 6
Seite 355
Everything from A to Z Reference
355
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Driving Assistant, see Intelli‐
gent Safety 160
Driving comfort 226
Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 126
Driving instructions, break-
in 264
Driving instructions, hybrid
system 269
Driving mode, ECO PRO 270
Driving mode, see Driving Dy‐
namics Control 126
Driving notes, general 264
Driving on racetracks 267
Driving stability control sys‐
tems 188
Driving style analysis, ECO
PRO 271
Driving tips 264
Driving with combustion en‐
gine, POWER 114
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trol 188
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐
trol 189
DVD, Video, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Dynamic Damping Con‐
trol 227
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 188
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 189
E
eASSIST, assistance for the
combustion engine 114
eBOOST, assistance for the
combustion engine 114
ECO PRO 270
ECO PRO driving style analy‐
sis 271
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL, see
Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 126
ECO PRO, see Driving Dy‐
namics Control 126
eDRIVE button 112
eDRIVE, see Hybrid sys‐
tem 55
Electric drive-ready state 109
Electric driving, BATTERY
CONTROL 113
Electric driving, ePO‐
WER 111
Electric driving, MAX
eDRIVE 112
Electric sunroof, glass 82
Electronic oil measure‐
ment 316
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, see DSC 188
e-mail, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication 6
Emergency Request 329
Emergency service, see Acci‐
dent Assistance 328
Emergency service, see
Breakdown assistance 328
Emergency service, see
Roadside Assistance 327
Emergency unlocking, charg‐
ing cable 279
Emergency unlocking, fuel
filler flap 286
Emergency unlocking, tail‐
gate 74
Emergency unlocking, trans‐
mission lock 125
Energy recovery,
CHARGE 114
Energy savings, see Gear
shift indicator 140
Engine, automatic Start/Stop
function 110
Engine compartment 314
Engine compartment, work‐
ing in 314
Engine coolant 320
Engine noise, artificial, see
Acoustic pedestrian protec‐
tion 113
Engine oil 316
Engine oil, adding 317
Engine oil change 318
Engine oil filler neck 317
Engine oil types, suitable 318
Engine oil types to add 318
Engine start, jump-start‐
ing 330
Engine start, see drive-ready
state 109
Engine stopping, see drive-
ready state 109
Engine temperature dis‐
play 145
Entering a destination, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Entering an address, naviga‐
tion, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication 6
Entertainment, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation 6
Entry comparison, naviga‐
tion 26
ePOWER, electric driv‐
ing 111
Equipment, interior 242
Error displays, see Check
Control 134
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
gram, see DSC 188
Evasion assistance 166
Exchanging wheels/tires 295
Executive Lounge Seat‐
ing 100
Exhaustion warner 186
Seite 356
Reference Everything from A to Z
356
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Exhaust system 265
Exterior lighting during un‐
locking 61
Exterior lighting with the vehi‐
cle locked 62
Exterior mirror, Automatic
Curb Monitor 97
Exterior mirror, automatic
dimming feature 97
Exterior mirrors 96
Exterior mirrors, malfunc‐
tion 96
External start 330
External temperature 138
Eyelet for towing 333
Eyes, see Lashing eyes in the
cargo area 257
F
Failure message, see Check
Control 134
False alarm, see Avoiding un‐
intentional alarms 79
Fan, see Air flow 231
Filler neck for engine oil 317
Finding charging stations, see
Charging stations and points
of interest, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Fine wood parts, care 336
First-aid kit 327
Flat tire, changing
wheels 309
Flat tire, continued driv‐
ing 305, 308
Flat tire message, FTM 307
Flat tire message, TPM 304
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 307
Flat tire, repairing 297
Flat tire, see Tire Pressure
Monitor TPM 302
Flat tire warning light,
FTM 307
Flat tire warning light,
TPM 304
Flooding 265
Floor carpet, care 337
Floor mats, care 337
Fog, removing from the win‐
dows 231
Fold-away position of the
wipers 120
Folding table in rear 249
Foot brake 266
For Your Own Safety 8
Fragrance cartridge, see Am‐
bient air package 235
Fragrance, see Ambient air
package 235
Fragrancing, see Ambient air
package 235
Front airbags 157
Front center armrest 253
Front fog light, replacing, see
Lights and bulbs 325
Front fog lights 153
Front lights, replacing, see
Lights and bulbs 325
Front passenger seat, adjust‐
ing from the rear 90
Front passenger seat, adjust‐
ing, see Gentleman func‐
tion 88
Front-seat passenger airbags,
automatic deactivation 159
Front-seat passenger airbags,
indicator lamp 160
Front seats 86
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 307
Fuel 288
Fuel cap 286
Fuel consumption display,
Onboard Computer 144
Fuel filler flap 286
Fuel filler flap, unlocking man‐
ually 286
Fuel gauge 138
Fuel quality 288
Fuel recommendation 288
Fuel, tank capacity 343
Functions, hybrid system 55
Fuses 326
G
Garage door opener, see
Integrated Universal Remote
Control 242
Gasoline 288
Gear change, Steptronic
transmission 122
Gear shift indicator 140
General driving notes 264
General settings 40
Gentleman function 88
Gesture Control 32
Gestures, see BMW Gesture
Control 32
Glare shield, see Sun vi‐
sor 244
Glare shield, sun visor 244
Glass sunroof, electric 82
Glass sunroof, initialize the
system 85
Glove compartment 251
GPS geolocation, vehicle po‐
sition 41
GPS, navigation, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
proved 343
H
Handbrake, see Parking
brake 115
Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
nating code 243
Hands-free kit, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Hazard warning flashers 327
Seite 357
Everything from A to Z Reference
357
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Head airbags 157
Headlight control, auto‐
matic 150
Headlight courtesy delay fea‐
ture 150
Headlight courtesy delay fea‐
ture, switching on 62
Headlight flasher 118
Headlight glass 325
Headlights, care 335
Headlights, replacing, see
Lights and bulbs 325
Head restraints, front 92
Head restraints, rear 94
Head-up Display 147
Head-Up Display, care 337
Head-up Display, see Mem‐
ory function 98
Heavy cargo, stowing
cargo 257
High-beam Assistant 151
High beams 118
High beams/low beams, see
High-beam Assistant 151
High-voltage battery, charge
state indicator 131
Hills 266
Hill start assistant, see Drive-
off assistant 188
Holder for beverages, see
Cup holders 254
Homepage 6
Hood 314
Horn 16
Hotel function, tailgate, see
Locking separately 73
Hot exhaust system 265
Hotline, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication 6
Humidity in the headlight, see
Headlight glass 325
Hybrid system, adapting to
the course of the road 133
Hybrid system, at a glance 55
Hybrid system, automatic de‐
activation 57
Hybrid system, contact with
water 57
Hybrid system, displays 131
Hybrid system, safety 57
Hybrid system, working
on 57
Hydroplaning 265
I
iBrake – PostCrash 186
Ice warning, see External
temperature 138
Icy roads, see External tem‐
perature 138
Identification marks, tires 292
Identification number, see Ve‐
hicle identification num‐
ber 12
Idle state, standby state, and
drive-ready state 21
iDrive 23
Ignition key, see Remote con‐
trol 60
Indicator/warning lights, see
Check Control 134
Individual air distribution 231
Individual settings, see driver
profiles 74
Inductive charging, see Wire‐
less charging, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Inflation pressure monitor,
see Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 302
Inflation pressure, tires 290
Inflation pressure warning
FTM, tires 307
Information 6
Initialization, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 307
Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 303
Instrument cluster 129
Instrument lighting 153
Integral Active Steering 190
Integrated key 68
Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle 53
Integrated Universal Remote
Control 242
Intelligent charging 282
Intelligent emergency
call 329
Intelligent Safety 160
Intended use 8
Intensity, AUTO pro‐
gram 230
Interior equipment 242
Interior lights 153
Interior lights during unlock‐
ing 61
Interior lights with the vehicle
locked 62
Interior mirror 96
Interior mirror, automatic dim‐
ming feature 97
Interior motion sensor 79
Internet connection 48
Internet hotspot 48
Internet page 6
Intersection warning, see Ap‐
proach control warning with
light braking function 162
Interval display, see Service
requirements 139
Ionization, see Ambient air
package 235
J
Jacking points for the vehicle
jack 311
Jam protection system, glass
sunroof 84
Jam protection system, win‐
dows 80
Seite 358
Reference Everything from A to Z
358
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Joystick, Steptronic transmis‐
sion 122
Jump-starting 330
Jump-starting terminals 331
K
Kenaf, care 336
Keyless Go, see Comfort Ac‐
cess 69
Key, mechanical 68
Key, see BMW display key 64
Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐
mission 122
Knee airbag 158
L
Label on recommended
tires 295
Lane control assistant, see
Steering and lane control as‐
sistant 201
Lane control assistant with
active side collision protec‐
tion, see Side collision warn‐
ing 181
Lane departure warning 175
Lane threshold, warning 175
Language, setting on the
Control Display 40
Laser headlights, replacing,
see Lights and bulbs 325
Laser high beams 153
Lashing eyes in the cargo
area 257
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 106
Leather care 335
LED front fog light, replacing,
see Lights and bulbs 325
LED headlights, replacing,
see Lights and bulbs 325
LEDs, light-emitting diodes,
replacing, see Lights and
bulbs 325
Letters and numbers, enter‐
ing 26
Level 1 Charging 281
Level 1 charging cable 278
Level 2 charging cable 278
Light-alloy wheels, care 336
Light carpet, see welcome
lights 150
Light control, adaptive 151
Light-emitting diodes, LEDs,
replacing, see Lights and
bulbs 325
Lighter, cigarettes 245
Lighting 149
Lighting, speakers 155
Light in the exterior mirror,
see Active Blind Spot De‐
tection 178
Light in the exterior mirror,
see crossing traffic warn‐
ing 223
Light replacement, see Lights
and bulbs 325
Lights 149
Lights and bulbs 325
Light switch 149
List of all messages 42
Load 257
Loading 256
Location, vehicle position 41
Locking, automatic 77
Locking, settings 76
Locking using the remote
control 61
Lock, lug bolts 310
Locks, child safety 108
Longer idle times and long-
term vehicle storage 337
Long-term vehicle stor‐
age 337
Low beams 149
Low beams, automatic, see
High-beam Assistant 151
Lower back support 88
Lug bolt lock 310
Luggage rack, see Roof-
mounted luggage rack 267
Lumbar support 88
M
Maintaining charge state,
BATTERY CONTROL 113
Maintenance 322
Maintenance requirements,
see Condition Based Serv‐
ice CBS 322
Maintenance, see Service re‐
quirements 139
Maintenance system,
BMW 322
Make-up mirror 244
Malfunction, BMW display
key 67
Malfunction displays, see
Check Control 134
Malfunction, remote con‐
trol 63
Manual air distribution 231
Manual air flow 231
Manual brake, see Parking
brake 115
Manual mode, Steptronic
transmission 122
Manual operation, fuel filler
flap 286
Map update, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Marking, run-flat tire 296
Massage seat, front 99
Massage seat, rear 99
Master key, see Remote con‐
trol 60
Matte finish 335
MAX eDRIVE, electric driv‐
ing 112
Maximum cooling 229
Maximum speed display, see
Speed Limit Info 140
Seite 359
Everything from A to Z Reference
359
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Maximum speed of winter
tires 296
Measurement, units of 41
Medical supplies, see First-
aid kit 327
Memory function 98
Menu, instrument cluster, see
Selection lists 142
Menus, operating, see
iDrive 23
Messages 42
Messages, see Check Con‐
trol 134
Microfilter 232
Minimum tread depth,
tires 294
Mirror 96
Mirror, see Memory func‐
tion 98
Mobile communication devi‐
ces in the vehicle 265
Mobile devices, managing 50
Mobile phone, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation 6
Mobility System 297
Mode, ECO PRO 270
Modifications, technical, see
For Your Own Safety 8
Monitor, see Control Dis‐
play 23
Mounting of child restraint
systems 105
MP3 player, see Audio, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Multi-function hook 257
Multifunction steering wheel,
buttons 16
Multimedia, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation 6
Music hard disk, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
N
Navigation, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation 6
Neck restraints, front, see
Head restraints 92
Neck restraints, rear, see
Head restraints 94
Neutral cleaner, see Light-al‐
loy wheels 336
New wheels and tires 295
Night Vision device, see Night
Vision 171
Night Vision with pedestrian
and animal detection 171
Notes, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment, Communication 6
No-touch opening and clos‐
ing of the tailgate 71
Nylon rope for tow-starting/
towing 333
O
OBD Onboard Diagnosis 323
Object detection, see Night
Vision 171
Obstacle marking, rearview
camera 211, 215
Octane rating, see Recom‐
mended fuel grade 289
Odometer and trip odome‐
ter 143
Officially use hybrid sys‐
tem 269
Oil 316
Oil, adding 317
Oil change 318
Oil change interval, see Serv‐
ice requirements 139
Oil filler neck 317
Oil types, suitable 318
Oil types to add, engine 318
Onboard Computer in the in‐
strument cluster 142
Onboard Computer on the
Control Display 145
Onboard Diagnosis OBD 323
Onboard vehicle tool kit 324
Online Entertainment, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Opening and closing 60
Operating concept, iDrive 23
Operating with the Control‐
ler 25
Operation via touchscreen 27
Outside air, see AUC 230
Overwintering, care 337
P
Paint, vehicle 335
Pairing, mobile devices, see
Connections 44
Panic alarm, see Panic
mode 79
Panic mode 79
Panorama View, see Sur‐
round View 211
Panoramic glass sunroof 82
Park Distance Control
PDC 205
Parked vehicle ventilation,
see Stationary climate con‐
trol 239
Parking aid, see PDC 205
Parking assistant 218
Parking brake 115
Parking lights 149
Parking with Automatic Hold,
see Parking brake 115
Parts and accessories 8
Seite 360
Reference Everything from A to Z
360
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Passenger's side mirror, tilt‐
ing, see Automatic Curb
Monitor, exterior mirror 97
Pathway lines, rearview cam‐
era 210, 214
PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol 205
Pedestrian detection, see
Night Vision 171
Pedestrian protection, acous‐
tic 113
Performance display, see
Sport displays 146
Personal data, deleting 43
Personal profile, see driver
profiles 74
Person warning with City light
braking function 168
Plastic parts, care 336
PostCrash – iBrake 186
POWER, driving with com‐
bustion engine 114
Power failure 326
Power sunroof, glass 82
Power windows 80
Prescribed engine oil
types 318
Pressure monitor, see Tire
Pressure Monitor TPM 302
Pressure, tire air pres‐
sure 290
Pressure warning FTM,
tires 307
Profiles, see driver profiles 74
Programmable memory but‐
tons, iDrive 30
Protective function, glass
sunroof, see Jam protection
system 84
Protective function, windows,
see Jam protection sys‐
tem 80
Push-and-turn reel, see Con‐
troller 24
Q
Queuing Assistant, see
Steering and lane control as‐
sistant 201
Quick charging cable, see
Level 2 charging cable 278
R
Racetrack operation 267
Radiator fluid 320
Radio-operated key, see Re‐
mote control 60
Radio, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication 6
Rain sensor 119
Rear automatic climate con‐
trol 233
Rear axle steering, see Inte‐
gral Active Steering 190
Rear center armrest 253
Rear collision prevention 184
Rear collision warning, see
Rear collision preven‐
tion 184
Rear lights, replacing, see
Lights and bulbs 325
Rear seat backrest tilt 90
Rear seats 89
Rear storage 253
Rear vanity mirror 97
Rearview camera, see Sur‐
round View 211
Rearview camera, without
Surround View 209
Rear window defroster 232
Recirculated-air filter, see Mi‐
crofilter/activated-charcoal
filter 232
Recirculated-air mode 230
Recommended fuel
grade 289
Recommended tire
brands 295
Refueling 285
Regular charging 269
Remote 3D View 218
Remote control 60
Remote control, additional 63
Remote control for audio, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Remote control, integrated
key 68
Remote control, loss 63
Remote control, malfunc‐
tion 63
Remote control of the vehicle,
changing the battery 63
Remote control, univer‐
sal 242
Remote control with display,
malfunction 67
Remote control with display,
see BMW display key 64
Remote services, App, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Replacing parts 324
Replacing wheels/tires 295
Reporting safety malfunc‐
tions 12
RES CNCL button, see Active
Cruise Control with
Stop&Go function 195
RES CNCL button, see Cruise
control 192
Reserve warning, see
Range 138
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 303
Retreaded tires 296
Roadside Assistance 327
Roadside Assistancee, see
Breakdown assistance 328
Roadside Assistance, see Ac‐
cident Assistance 328
Roadside parking lights 150
Seite 361
Everything from A to Z Reference
361
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Roller sunblind, rear win‐
dow 81
Roller sunblinds, rear side
windows 82
Rolling code hand-held trans‐
mitter 243
RON recommended fuel
grade 289
Roofliner 20
Roof load capacity 343
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 267
Rope for tow-starting/
towing 333
Route, navigation, see Own‐
er's Handbook for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
RSC Run-flat System Com‐
ponent, see Run-flat
tires 296
RTTI, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, Communication 6
Rubber components,
care 336
Run-flat tire 296
S
Safe braking 266
Safety belt reminder for driv‐
er's seat and front passen‐
ger seat 92
Safety belts 91
Safety belts, care 337
Safety belts, rear 92
Safety locks, doors and win‐
dows 108
Safety of the hybrid sys‐
tem 57
Safety package, see Active
Protection 185
Safety switch, windows 81
Safety systems, see Air‐
bags 157
Safety systems, see Intelli‐
gent Safety 160
Saving fuel 268
Screen Mirroring, connec‐
tion 49
Screensaver 42
Screen, see Control Dis‐
play 23
Screen tilt, adjusting 90
Screwdriver, see Onboard ve‐
hicle tool kit 324
Sealant, see Mobility Sys‐
tem 297
Seat and armrest heat‐
ing 102
Seat belts, see Safety
belts 91
Seat heating 102
Seating position for chil‐
dren 104
Seat, see Memory func‐
tion 98
Seats, front 86
Seats, rear 89
Seat ventilation, active 103
Securing cargo 257
Selection list in instrument
cluster 142
Selector lever, Steptronic
transmission 122
Self-leveling suspension, see
Air suspension 226
Self-supporting tires, see
Run-flat tires 296
Sensors, care 337
Service and warranty 9
Service Center, see Accident
Assistance, see Accident
Assistance 328
Service requirements 139
Service requirements, see
Condition Based Service
CBS 322
Services, ConnectedDrive,
see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication 6
SET button, see Active
Cruise Control with
Stop&Go function 195
SET button, see Cruise con‐
trol 192
Set speed, see Active Cruise
Control with Stop&Go func‐
tion 195
Settings, locking/unlock‐
ing 76
Settings on Control Dis‐
play 40
Shift paddles on the steering
wheel 122
Side airbag 157
Side collision warning 181
Side protection without Sur‐
round View 207
Side protection with Surround
View 215
Signaling, horn 16
Signals when unlocking, see
Confirmation signals from
the vehicle 77
Sitting safely 86
Size 342
Ski and snowboard bag 260
Slide/tilt glass roof, see Glass
sunroof 82
Smartphone, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation 6
Smoker's package 245
SMS, see Short messages,
see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment,
Communication 6
SMS text message, supple‐
mentary 137
Snow chains 301
Socket for OBD Onboard Di‐
agnosis 323
Sockets 247
Seite 362
Reference Everything from A to Z
362
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Software update 51
SOS button, see Intelligent
emergency call 329
Sound output, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Speaker lighting 155
Special equipment, see Vehi‐
cle features and options 7
Speed limit display, see
Speed Limit Info 140
Speed Limit Info 140
Speed, see Average speed
and average fuel consump‐
tion 144
Speed warning 146
Split screen 29
Sport displays 146
SPORT INDIVIDUAL, see
Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 126
Sport program, Steptronic
transmission 122
SPORT, see Driving Dynam‐
ics Control 126
Stability control systems 188
Standard charging cable, see
Level 1 charging cable 278
Standard charging, see Level
1 Charging 281
Standard equipment, see Ve‐
hicle features and options 7
Standby state, idle state and
drive-ready state 21
Start/stop, automatic func‐
tion 110
Start/Stop button 109
Starting aid terminals 331
Starting, see drive-ready
state 109
Starting the engine, see
drive-ready state 109
Stationary climate con‐
trol 239
Stations, AM/FM, see Own‐
er's Handbook for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Status control display,
tires 303
Status field symbols 30
Status information, iDrive 30
Status of Owner's Manual 7
Status, vehicle 146
Steering and lane control as‐
sistant incl. Traffic Jam As‐
sist 201
Steering, see Integral Active
Steering 190
Steering wheel, adjusting 97
Steering wheel, buttons 16
Steering wheel heating 98
Steering wheel, see Memory
function 98
Steptronic transmission 122
Stopping the engine, see
drive-ready state 109
Storage, charging cable 278
Storage compartment be‐
tween the rear seats 253
Storage compartment in the
center console 252
Storage compartments in the
cargo area 257
Storage compartments, loca‐
tions 251
Storage, tires 296
Storing the vehicle 337
Stowing and securing
cargo 257
Straps for cargo, see Lashing
eyes in the cargo area 257
Suitable devices 45
Suitable mobile phones 45
Summer tires, tread 294
Sun visor 244
Sun visor, sliding 244
Supplementary SMS text
message 137
Surface heating, see Seat and
armrest heating 102
Surround View 211
Suspension settings, see
Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 126
Switches, see Cockpit 16
Switch for driving dynamics,
see Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol 126
Symbols and displays 6
SYNC program, automatic cli‐
mate control 231
T
Table, see Folding table in the
rear 249
Tablet 38
Tachometer 138
Tailgate 72
Tailgate, emergency unlock‐
ing 74
Tailgate, hotel function, see
Locking separately 73
Tailgate, opening and closing
with no-touch activation 71
Tailgate via remote con‐
trol 62
Tail lights, replacing, see
Lights and bulbs 325
Tank unlocking, see Tank
vent 285
Tank vent 285
Technical changes, see For
Your Own Safety 8
Technical data 342
Telephone, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communi‐
cation 6
Teleservices, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Seite 363
Everything from A to Z Reference
363
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Television, TV, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Temperature, automatic cli‐
mate control 229
Temperature display, en‐
gine 145
Temperature display, see Ex‐
ternal temperature 138
Theft alarm system, see
Alarm system 78
Thermal camera, see Night
Vision 171
Thigh support 87
Through-loading system 258
Tilt alarm sensor 79
Tilt, backrest 88
Tilting the passenger's side
mirror, see Automatic Curb
Monitor, exterior mirror 97
Time 40
Time of arrival 143
Tire brands, recom‐
mended 295
Tire damage 294
Tire identification marks 292
Tire inflation pressure 290
Tire inflation pressure moni‐
tor, see FTM Flat Tire Moni‐
tor 307
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 302
Tire repair kit, see Mobility
System 297
Tires and wheels 290
Tires, changing 295
Tire sealant, see Mobility
System 297
Tires, run-flat 296
Tire tread 294
Tone, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication 6
Tool 324
Torque display, see Sport
displays 146
Total range, onboard com‐
puter 144
Total vehicle weight 343
Touch Command 38
Touchpad 28
Touchscreen 27
Tow bar 332
Tow fitting 333
Towing 332
Tow rope 333
Tow-starting 332
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor 302
Traction control 189
TRACTION, driving dynam‐
ics 189
Traffic bulletins, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Traffic Jam Assist, see Steer‐
ing and lane control assis‐
tant 201
Transmission lock, electronic
unlocking 125
Transmission, see Steptronic
transmission 122
Transporting children
safely 104
Travel information, see On‐
board Computer on the
Control Display 145
Tray, see Folding table in the
rear 249
Tread, tires 294
Trip computer 145
Triple turn signal activa‐
tion 118
Trip odometer 143
Trip recorder, see Trip odom‐
eter 143
Trunk, emergency unlock‐
ing 74
Trunk lid, see Tailgate 72
Turning radius lines, rearview
camera 211, 215
Turn signal, replacing bulbs,
see Lights and bulbs 325
Turn signals, high beams,
headlight flasher 118
TV, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, Communication 6
U
Unintentional alarm, avoid‐
ing 79
Units of measurement 41
Universal remote control 242
Unlock button, Steptronic
transmission 122
Unlocking, automatic 78
Unlocking, settings 76
Unlocking with the remote
control 61
Updates made after the edito‐
rial deadline 7
Update, software 51
Upholstery material care 336
Upper backrest, front 87
Upper backrest, rear 89
USB connection 47
USB interface, position in ve‐
hicle 248
Used battery, disposing
of 326
Use, intended 8
V
Vanity mirror 244
Variable steering, see Integral
Active Steering 190
Vehicle battery 325
Vehicle breakdown, see
Breakdown assistance 327
Vehicle, break-in 264
Vehicle care 335
Vehicle care products 335
Seite 364
Reference Everything from A to Z
364
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
Vehicle features and op‐
tions 7
Vehicle identification num‐
ber 12
Vehicle key, see Remote con‐
trol 60
Vehicle paint 335
Vehicle position, vehicle loca‐
tion 41
Vehicle status 146
Vehicle wash 334
Vehicle, washing 334
Ventilation 232
Venting, see Stationary cli‐
mate control 239
Venting, see Ventilation 232
Vent, see Ventilation 232
Video, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment and Communication 6
VIN, see Vehicle identification
number 12
Vitality program 101
Vitalization programs, see Vi‐
tality program 101
Voice activation system 35
Voice command response,
see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment,
Communication 6
W
Warning/indicator lights, see
Check Control 134
Warning against cross traf‐
fic 223
Warning light in the exterior
mirror, see Active Blind Spot
Detection 178
Warning light in the exterior
mirror, see crossing traffic
warning 223
Warning messages, see
Check Control 134
Warning triangle 327
Warranty 8
Washer fluid 121
Washer nozzles, wind‐
shield 120
Washer system 118
Washing the vehicle 334
Water, hybrid system 57
Water on roads 265
Water, see Condensation wa‐
ter under the parked vehi‐
cle 267
Website 6
Weights 343
Welcome Light Carpet, see
welcome lights 150
Welcome light during unlock‐
ing 61
Welcome lights 150
Welcome screen, driver pro‐
files 74
Wheel cleaner, light-alloy
wheels 336
Wheels and tires 290
Wheels, changing 295
Wheels, see FTM Flat Tire
Monitor 307
WiFi connection 48
Window defroster, rear 232
Window, defrosting and de‐
fogging 231
Windows, powered 80
Windshield, climate con‐
trol 265
Windshield washer fluid, see
Washer fluid 121
Windshield washer noz‐
zles 120
Windshield washer system,
see washer/wiper sys‐
tem 118
Windshield wiper, see Wiper
system 118
Winter storage, vehicle 337
Winter tires 296
Winter tires, tread 294
Wiper blades, replacing 324
Wiper fluid, see Washer
fluid 121
Wiper, fold-away posi‐
tion 120
Wiper, see Washer/wiper sys‐
tem 118
Wiper system 118
Wireless charging dock, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Wireless charging, see Wire‐
less charging, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
Wood parts, care 336
Wordmatch principle, see En‐
try comparison 26
Working on the hybrid sys‐
tem 57
Wrench, see Onboard vehicle
tool kit 324
X
xDrive 190
Seite 365
Everything from A to Z Reference
365
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
01402981865 ue
*BL298186500V*
Online Edition for Part no. 01402981865 - VI/17
